JP7480829B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a displacement means and a relative movement means configured to enable relative movement with respect to the displacement means (Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-116782 A

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of optimizing the movement of the relative movement means . The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can optimize the movement of the relative movement means .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 is a gaming machine comprising: displacement means configured to be displaceable; relative movement means configured to have a first portion engaged with the displacement means and capable of relative movement with respect to the displacement means; support means for supporting a predetermined portion of a second portion of the relative movement means; and drive means for generating a drive force for causing the displacement, wherein the support means is configured to be capable of restricting a position of the second portion corresponding to a position of the first portion in the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable between a first section and a second section, and the gaming machine is configured such that the displacement means is configured to be capable of restricting a position of the second portion corresponding to a position of the first portion in the displacement of the displacement means, The actuator is configured such that when the first section is displaced, the direction of a straight line connecting a first position and a second position to which a specific section of the second section different from the specified section of the second section is displaced is different from the direction of a straight line connecting a third position and a fourth position to which the specific section is displaced when the displacement means displaces the second section, and when the displacement means is displaced, there are cases in which the direction in which the specific section is displaced is along the displacement direction of the displacement means and cases in which the direction in which the specific section is displaced is not along the displacement direction of the displacement means, and the relative moving means rotates around the specified section when displacing the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the movement of the relative movement means can be made suitable .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. A front oblique view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. 13A and 13B are front oblique views of the variable winning device. FIG. FIG. An exploded front oblique view of the base plate, variable winning device, collection gutter and sorting device. An exploded rear oblique view of the base plate, variable winning device, collection gutter and sorting device. An exploded front oblique view of the variable winning device. An exploded rear oblique view of the variable winning device. FIG. FIG. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVI-XVI in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the distribution device along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the distribution device along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. A front view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in Figure 16. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type for special patterns, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and winnings for normal patterns. This is a diagram showing the changes over time in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate of the variable winning device and the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member of the distribution device in the first round for each jackpot type. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a first operating unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit; A front view of the first operating unit in a performance standby state. A rear view of the first operating unit in a performance standby state. 41 is a side view of the first operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40 . A front view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. A rear view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. FIG. 11 is a front view of the first operating unit in the extended state. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first operating unit in the extended state. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing the amount and angle of displacement of a supported member accompanying rotational displacement of a rotating member; 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams showing changes in angle accompanying rotation of a rotating member. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a rear case and a second operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of a rear case and a second operating unit. 28A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 33A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 30A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. 4A and 4B are front views of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inversion member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotation member. 57(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in Figure 57(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(b). 1A to 1C are front views of the performance device. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 5 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member, the driving mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in a time series. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 28. 11A to 11D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. 11A to 11D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. FIG. A front view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line LXXV-LXXV in Figure 73. A cross-sectional view of the middle member, slide displacement member, lower member, and detection sensor of the sorting device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in Figure 75. 1A to 1D are front perspective views of the inner member of the sorting device. 1 is a top view of the middle member, the state switching device, the sliding displacement member and the lower member. FIG. 78A is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in Figure 78, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in Figure 78, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in Figure 78. 13A and 13B are side views of the slide displacement member and a ball resting on the upper surface of the ball guide portion. 81(a) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81(a). FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. 13A and 13B are rear views of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. 13 is a rear view of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. FIG. A front oblique view of the first decorative rotating member and the second decorative rotating member. 13A and 13B are schematic front views showing the guide slots, the rectangular box portion, and the protruding decorative portion. 13A and 13B are schematic front views showing the guide slots, the rectangular box portion, and the decorative protrusion portion. 1 is a schematic front view showing the guide slot, the rectangular box portion, and the protruding decorative portion. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line XCIII-XCIII in Figure 85. FIG. 13 is a front view of the second operating unit in the extended state. A cross-sectional view of the second operating unit along line XCV-XCV in Figure 94. 1 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a top-bottom inversion member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. FIG. 1 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a top-bottom inversion member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. 1A is a front perspective view of an intermediate arm member, and FIG. 1B is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a third operating unit, illustrating the displacement of a metal bar and an intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a schematic front view of a third operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 4A is a rear view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member, and FIG. 4B is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a front view of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is a front view of a third operating unit. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit along line CVI-CVI in Figure 105. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line CVII-CVII in Figure 104. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15 . 17A and 17B are cross-sectional views of the sorting device according to the third embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15 . 13A and 13B are schematic top views of the third flow path component, the probability change detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member, which are schematic views showing the configuration downstream of the third flow path component in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the special rate detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along line CXIa-CXIa in Figure 110(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the special rate detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along line CXIb-CXIb in Figure 110(b). 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of a sorting device according to a fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15 . A cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of a sorting device according to a seventh embodiment. A cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line CXV-CXV in Figure 114. FIG. 23 is a schematic front view showing a relationship between a guide elongated hole and a rotating member in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic front view showing a relationship between a guide elongated hole and a rotating member in the ninth embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1 to 71, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following explanation, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (rear) side with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Figure 1. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Figure 1, the top side will be referred to as the upper (upper) side, the bottom side will be referred to as the lower (lower) side, the right side will be referred to as the right (right) side, and the left side will be referred to as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see Figure 2, for example) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11, whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be detached from the back side. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a roughly box-like shape that protrudes toward the front and has an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as an LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 on the left side that is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in Figure 2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, not shown in the upper half of the game area) and a windmill (not shown) on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, as well as rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 140, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows the player to see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, it is possible to shield various structures arranged on the outside of the center frame 86 from its front side to the rear side of the base plate 60 so that they cannot be seen by the player.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 2), which prevents a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, whereas when the ball has entered the second winning hole 140, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R special jackpot, a 4R special jackpot, and a 4R regular jackpot. The first pattern display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a pattern according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. A "4R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4, and is in a time-saving state for a specified number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot increases after the jackpot has ended as an added value, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (during a probability fluctuation), in other words, a state of play in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability fluctuation) includes a game state in which the probability of a jackpot increases for a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment), and the probability of a hit of the second pattern described below increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability fluctuation, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than during a probability fluctuation. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of a hit of the second pattern increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state when it is not in a special mode or time-saving mode (neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of hitting the second symbol has increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that a game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 described later during the first round of a jackpot game, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in a high probability state for 100 fluctuations. Note that if it is not determined that a game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in a time-saving state for 100 fluctuations.

During the special rate or time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device 140a (electric device) associated with the second winning port 140 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal times. When the electric device 140a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140 than when the electric device 140a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the winning probability of the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 is opened and the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 is opened and the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may not be changed, and only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the play area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the winning (initial winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is fastened to the rear case 510 so as to fill the opening 511a of the rear case 510 described below, and the center frame 86 is arranged to frame the window portion of the base plate 60. In other words, when viewed from the front, the center frame 86 appears to be arranged to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81, but in reality, the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged separately in the front and rear.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4) to display, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom. Each symbol row is configured with a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning lotteries can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning lottery, giving the player more opportunities to have the electric device 140a of the second winning slot 140 open. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 140.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 140 during a special probability or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a special probability or time-saving period than during normal times, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display unit 80, and are configured to allow a portion of the ball launched onto the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gates 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the through gate 67 can be reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second pattern reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81.

The second pattern change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. The maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). The number of through gates 67 installed is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. The installation position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left or right of the variable display unit 80, but may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, the second pattern reserve lamp may not be turned on.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When the first winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 140 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on, and when the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

The first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 are also each one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning port. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be five.

An electric device 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. This electric device 140a is configured to be able to open and close, and is normally in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 140a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 140a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving period, the time that the electric device 140a is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate and time-saving period, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning slot 140 than during normal play.

The probability of a jackpot occurring when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 is the same as when a ball enters the second winning slot 140, regardless of whether the probability is low or high. However, the probability of a 15R special jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot occurring when a jackpot occurs is set to be higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 140, and the ball is always capable of winning.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning opening 64, which does not have an electric device, by shooting the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning opening 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery and aiming to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, during the special bonus period or the time-saving period, the electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the through gate 67, making it easier to win at the second winning port 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the through gate 67 to open the electric device, and aiming for the ball to win at the second winning port 140 for a 15R special bonus jackpot.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since the game board 13 is configured symmetrically, it is possible to aim for the first winning slot 64 with a "right hit" and for the second winning slot 140 with a "left hit". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not require the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This eliminates the hassle of having to change the way the ball is shot.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is provided below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state as a special game state. Also, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

The right corner of the lower side of the game board 13 is provided with an attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The outlets 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning hole 65a.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a to the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b (see Figure 11) as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include the drive motors 631, 731, 782, and 861.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the sound lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the sound output from the sound output device 226 by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, and FIG. 6(a) and FIG. 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 6(a) illustrates the closed state of the opening and closing plate 65b, in which the opening and closing plate 65b is closed to restrict the flow of balls down to the specific winning opening 65a, and FIG. 6(b) illustrates the open state of the opening and closing plate 65b, in which the opening and closing plate 65b is open to allow the flow of balls down to the specific winning opening 65a. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of FIG. 5 and FIG. 6.

The variable winning device 65 is formed so that when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 65b is inclined downward toward the rear side so that it can receive a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b and guide it to the specific winning opening 65a.

Since the electric device 140a is located above the center of the opening and closing plate 65b (see Figure 2), the balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b are limited to balls that stray from the electric device 140a and flow down. In other words, balls do not land on the opening and closing plate 65b in the center, but mainly in the parts on the outside of the electric device 140a. In other words, the placement of balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b is limited to positions closer to the outside of the opening and closing plate 65b.

However, this does not apply to the placement of the ball after it lands on the opening and closing plate 65b. In other words, depending on how the ball flows after it lands on the opening and closing plate 65b, it may end up being placed closer to the center of the opening and closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric prop 140a from the front side is curved to ensure space on the opening and closing plate 65b side (it is curved so that it juts out downward from the lower front end that faces the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) toward the rear side), so that the degree to which a ball that bounces near the left-right center of the opening and closing plate 65b collides with the front design member 141 and loses momentum can be reduced. This increases the likelihood that the ball will be positioned near the left-right center of the opening and closing plate 65b.

The center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower part of the front design member 141 may be located either forward or backward. In this embodiment, the radius of curvature in a side view is formed to be located at the lower front, making it possible to secure a larger space on the opening and closing plate 65b side. In addition, the front design member 141 is shaped so that the left and right width becomes smaller as it moves downward at the left and right ends, making it easier to secure space between the opening and closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

When the opening and closing plate 65b is in the open state, balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b are guided almost without exception to the specific winning opening 65a. In front of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is arranged at an upper and lower position that can guide the ball into the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right ends of the lower surface 163a so that a ball rolling to the left and right outside by the lower surface 163a can move over with less resistance. In order to reduce the flow resistance of a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b outside the left and right of this inclined flow lower surface 163a1, a guide plate portion 163a2 is formed on the left and right outside of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion that extends forward and inward from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163, and the front end surface is formed as an inclined surface that is shifted rearward as it moves inward to the left and right.

As a result, when a ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b abuts against the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided down along the slope of the inclined surface, so that the ball can be guided with little resistance to the inclined flow-down surface 163a1. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts to close with a ball on it, even if the ball is positioned to the left or right outside the inclined flow-down surface 163a1, the degree to which the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b is hindered can be reduced.

In other words, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunctions such as, for example, poor ball flow causing delays in closing the opening/closing plate 65b, or balls being swept backwards by the closing action of the opening/closing plate 65b bouncing off the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and striking the opening/closing plate 65b again, applying a load in the direction (forward) that causes the opening/closing plate 65b to open, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to open unintentionally.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the opening and closing plate 65b closes by rising up. In other words, a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning opening 65a by the movement of the opening and closing plate 65b, so that the ball does not move to the left or right of the ball resting on the opening and closing plate 65b, and almost all of the balls resting on the opening and closing plate 65b are guided to the specific winning opening 65a.

In this case, if the arrangement of the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b is on the outer left or right side, or if there are a large number of balls, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b may be delayed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate portion 163a2 are designed in such a way that the flow of balls guided to the specific winning opening 65a is not stagnated, and the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be kept prompt.

In addition, instead of modifying the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rests in the open state is formed in a flat surface (see FIG. 6(b)). Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b first flows backward, and then flows left and right due to the effect of the shape of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, making it easier to avoid ball collisions on the opening/closing plate 65b.

In other words, even if multiple balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls will first move backward in parallel, preventing the balls from colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to when the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is shaped with a left-right inclined surface like the lower surface 163a, which creates a left-right flow in the rolling balls, the possibility of the balls moving irregularly on the opening/closing plate 65b can be reduced, making it possible to prevent unintended malfunctions.

The receiving member 163 is formed with abutment surfaces 163a3 that abut against the pivot tips at both left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, thereby improving the reproducibility of the positioning of the opening/closing plate 65b. The abutment surfaces 163a3 are formed in a pair on the left and right, and are designed to match the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b so that they can make surface contact rather than point contact. This makes it easier to stabilize the positioning of the opening/closing plate 65b, and by receiving the load at the time of abutment on the surface, stress concentration can be avoided, improving durability.

In addition, an auxiliary abutment surface 163a4 is formed on the underside of the abutment surface 163a3, and is formed in a surface shape that is approximately parallel to the opposing opening and closing plate 65b with a small gap between them. The auxiliary abutment surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in case the abutment between the abutment surface 163a3 and the opening and closing plate 65b becomes poor for some reason.

In this embodiment, a fixed member 161 that restricts the flow of the ball is disposed in front of the contact surface 163a3, and is configured so that the ball does not collide with the contact surface 163a3. However, for example, if the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface 163a3 is chipped, it may become impossible to maintain the repeatability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front-to-rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b come into surface contact with the auxiliary contact surface 163a4, thereby maintaining the stability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b. This improves the reproducibility of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening and closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since the contact surface portion 163a3 contacts the opening and closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal, there may be a disadvantage that loads are easily accumulated. However, since the area over which the load is distributed can be increased, the magnitude of the local load that the contact surface portion 163a3 receives due to contact with the opening and closing plate 65b can be reduced.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the game ball that is in the process of being received by the opening and closing plate 65b can be configured to be received in a manner that pushes it into the opening and closing plate 65b due to the shape of the front design member 141 described above.

In other words, if the ball comes into contact with the lower shape of the front design member 141 while being received (for example, while it is being sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific winning opening 65a and sliding sideways), the ball can be guided by the curved shape to flow down into the inside of the specific winning opening 65a. This makes it easier to prevent the ball that has deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b from falling down the front side of the third flow path component 336, making it easier to ensure visibility into the third flow path component 336.

When the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, balls do not land on the opening and closing plate 65b, so the placement of balls flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state is limited to the outside on the left and right of the electric prop 140a.

Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the placement of the balls that flow down without being guided to the specific winning opening 65a can be limited to positions on the left and right outer side of the electric role device 140a. This ensures visibility below the electric role device 140a at positions on the left and right inner side of the left and right ends of the electric role device 140a.

Next, the configuration downstream of the specific winning port 65a (the side where the balls flow after passing through the specific winning port 65a) will be described. Figure 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and Figure 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. Note that Figures 7 and 8 show the configuration arranged on the base plate 60 with all components removed except for the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65.

As shown in FIG. 8, a collecting gutter 150 is provided at the rear of the variable winning device 65 on the rear side of the base plate 60, forming a path for directing balls that enter the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 2) to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The collecting gutter 150 has a grooved portion that forms a flow path, and the front side of the grooved portion that faces the base plate 60 is open. When this open portion is closed by the base plate 60, a path for flowing the balls to the ball discharge passage is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path section 151 that forms a flow path for balls that enter the first winning opening 64, a second flow path section 152 that forms a path for balls that enter the second winning opening 140, and a plurality of third flow path sections 153 that form flow paths on the left and right for balls that enter the general winning openings 63 located on both the left and right sides.

The first flow path section 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the first winning opening 64 to the lower left, and the second flow path section 152 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the second winning opening 140 to the lower right. The third flow path section 153 is configured as a flow path that extends below the general winning opening 63.

Therefore, while the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are positioned in the left-right center of the play area when viewed from the front, the flow of balls that enter the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is directed from the left-right center to the left-right outer side by the collecting gutter 150. This allows a space to be created below the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and this space can be used to position the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described below.

Figure 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300, and Figure 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300. Note that in Figures 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is shown, and other parts are omitted, and other components assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted, so that the base of the base plate 60 can be seen. Also, for ease of explanation, Figure 9 shows the center frame 86 assembled to the base plate 60.

The following describes the fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300. The variable winning device 65 is placed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is placed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The sorting device 300 has an insertion hole 311 at the top that is fastened to the variable winning device 65, and an insertion hole 331 at the left and right that is fastened to the collecting gutter 150. In other words, unlike the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 that are directly fixed to the base plate 60, the presence or absence of the sorting device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as is whether the sorting device 300 is installed or not. This allows the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 to be used in common regardless of whether the sorting device 300 is installed or not.

Next, the details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the game area through the specific winning port 65a, and the sorting device 300 constitutes a flow path along which the balls received by the variable winning device 65 flow. In this embodiment, the profits obtained by the player are controlled to change based on the detection results of the balls flowing through the flow path of the sorting device 300, and details will be described later.

11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like, a front design member 162 arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161 and fastened to the fixed member 161, a receiving member 163 arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161, fastened to the fixed member 161, and configured to be able to receive balls that have passed through the specific winning opening 65a, an intervening member 164 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened to the receiving member 163, and intervening as a connecting part with the sorting device 300, and a state switching device 165 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened to the receiving member 163, and configured to be able to switch the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on whether or not electricity is applied.

The fixed member 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side is flat except for the through holes for screw insertion, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, the rear side of the fixed member 161 is three-dimensional, projecting toward the rear side inside the thin-walled portion that abuts the base plate 60 on the outer periphery.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin portion is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately elliptical frame shape, and a through hole large enough to accommodate this boundary portion 161a is formed through the base plate 60. In other words, the boundary portion 161a is the portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

Inside the boundary 161a, a specific winning opening 65a and an extended support plate 161b are formed, which are configured as a pair of roughly T-shaped supports on the left and right, and include a horizontally elongated plate-like portion that extends rearward slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a and is parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a, and a vertically elongated plate-like portion that extends downward midway through the horizontally elongated plate-like portion.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the area behind the specific winning opening 65a and the flow path of the sorting device 300, which will be described later. The protruding support portion 161c protruding from the horizontally elongated plate portion of the extended support plate 161b, the protruding support portion 161d protruding from the vertically elongated plate portion of the extended support plate 161b, and the protruding support portion 161e protruding from the upper surface of the lower edge of the boundary portion 161a function as parts that support the sorting device 300, and will be described in detail later.

The symmetrical protrusion 161f, which is protruded symmetrically below the center of the specific winning opening 65a inside the boundary 161a, has the function of contacting the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 and guiding the balls as they flow down.

Multiple through holes 161g for inserting the fastening screws that are screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged on the inside and outside of the boundary portion 161a. Multiple fastened portions 161h having female threads for inserting the fastening screws that are inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged on the inside of the boundary portion 161a.

The fastening portion 161i, which has a female thread for threading the fastening screw inserted into the intervening member 164, is positioned outside the boundary portion 161a at the gap (center position from left to right) of the boundary portion 161a. In other words, the fastening portion 161i is disposed at the connection portion (see FIG. 9) between the through hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for inserting the second winning opening 140 and the electric role object 140a among the through holes formed in the base plate 60.

The front design component 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape to ensure a uniform distance from the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1). The balls are allowed to flow down within the area between the rear side of the front design component 162 and the front side of the fixed component 161.

The rear side of the front design member 162 is provided with a number of fastening portions 162a that are arranged in positions that match the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161 and have female threads that allow the fastening screws inserted into the through holes 161g to be screwed in, and a number of extension portions 162b, 162c that extend to the rear side in a shape that covers the fastening portions 162a from above.

The extensions 162b and 162c prevent the balls flowing between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, thereby improving the durability of the fastened portion 162a.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of the extensions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, it is possible to restrict the path of the balls flowing down. That is, by forming the upper surfaces of the extensions 162b (two locations on the left and right central sides) that are extended near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right outside, it is possible to prevent balls on the extensions 162b from flowing toward the specific winning opening 65a. That is, after the balls on the extensions 162b fall downward on the left and right outsides of the extensions 162b, they flow down along the inner rail 61 (see Figure 2) toward the outlet 71.

In addition, by forming the upper surfaces of the extension parts 162c (two parts on both the left and right ends) that extend to both the left and right ends as inclined surfaces that slope downwards toward the inside of the left and right sides, the flow path of the balls flowing on the extension parts 162c can be unified with the flow path of the balls on the extension parts 162b. This makes it possible to narrow the area in which the flowing balls are arranged compared to the number of balls flowing down (the ball arrangement density can be increased), and to secure areas where visibility is not obstructed by the balls (space where no flow path is formed).

The front design component 162 shown in FIG. 11 is blank and has good visibility on the back side, but the front design component 162 does not have to be blank. For example, the front side of the front design component 162 may be decorated by attaching a sticker with a pattern or character on it, or grooves may be dug in the front design component 162 with a geometric pattern, and the geometric pattern may be made visible by shining light into the grooves. The front design component 162 may also be blank or have the above-mentioned decorations added, and then be configured to be opaque.

The receiving member 163 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material in a horizontally elongated frame (or box) shape with the front side open, and includes the above-mentioned guide plate portion 163a2, the contact surface portion 163a3, the auxiliary contact surface 163a4, the lower surface portion 163a forming a flow-down surface inside the frame, the ball passing hole 163b arranged as a through hole through which the ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, a plurality of insertion holes 163c arranged at a position matching the fastening portion 161h of the fixed member 161 and through which fastening screws fastened to the fastening portion 161h are inserted from the back side, a pair of fastening portions 163d arranged on the left and right central sides as female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the intervening member 164 are screwed, and a plurality of fastening portions 163e having female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the state switching device 165 are screwed.

The lower surface 163a is formed as a left and right inclined surface that slopes downward to the left and right outward from the left and right central portions as apexes, and is provided with an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward to the rear at a position one step lower than the left and right outer ends of the left and right inclined surfaces, so that a ball flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 can pass through the ball passage hole 163b with little resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 that engages with the back side of the receiving member 163. In other words, the passage of the ball through the ball passage hole 163b is detected by the detection sensor SE1.

The intermediate member 164 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes a main body 164a having a light refracting surface that slopes downward toward the rear, a pair of insertion holes 164b formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and capable of receiving fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion 163d of the receiving member 163, a light emitting board 164c arranged above the insertion holes 164b and on which an LED is disposed, a pair of fastening portions 164d formed at both left and right ends of the lower end of the main body 164a with female threaded portions capable of receiving fastening screws inserted into the sorting device 300, and an insertion hole 164e formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and capable of receiving fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion 161i of the fixed member 161.

The light-emitting board 164c is disposed so that the surface on which the LEDs are arranged faces diagonally upward and forward, and in the assembled state, is positioned directly above the specific winning hole 65a when viewed from the front (see FIG. 6) and directly below the second winning hole 140. With this arrangement, the light from the light-emitting board 164c easily enters the field of vision of a player who is hoping for the ball to land in the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and is gazing diagonally downward and backward at these locations.

Therefore, by controlling the LED of the light-emitting board 164c to light up when a ball has entered the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a, the player can easily know whether or not a ball has entered the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. This allows the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 to be more firmly fixed than when the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened to each other. In addition, the arrangement of the sorting device 300, which is connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164, can be stabilized, so that the relative positional deviation between the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300 can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion parts 165a through which fastening screws are inserted into the fastening part 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, a lower case part 165b formed in a deep box shape with a plurality of openings for wiring and heat dissipation and an open upper side, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case part 165b, a sliding part 165d that engages with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c and slides together with the plunger, a rotating part 165e that is rotatably supported by the lower case part 165b in such an arrangement that the rotating tip protrudes from the front end of the lower case part 165b and rotates with the sliding displacement of the sliding part 165d, and an upper cover part 165g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case part 165b by fastening screws inserted into a plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The tip of the rotating part 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped part can engage with it, and the transmission protrusion 65c that protrudes rightward from the right end of the opening/closing plate 65b fits into this recess and engages with it. The transmission protrusion 65c is positioned eccentrically from the metal shaft rod part 65d that forms the rotation axis for the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b. By configuring it in this way, the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be caused to occur in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating part 165e.

Figures 13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. Figure 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from above, and Figure 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from below.

As shown in Figures 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 164d of the intervening member 164 can be inserted therethrough, a middle member 330 that is fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and has a pair of insertion holes 331 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted therethrough, a substrate 350 that is housed between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 and has a light emitting means 351 such as an LED disposed on the front side, and a substrate 350 that is connected to the middle member 330 and the upper member 310. It is equipped with a state switching device 360 that is housed in a position between the member 310 and is configured to be able to switch states depending on whether or not electricity is applied, a sliding displacement member 370 that is arranged below the middle member 330 and slides back and forth between a front position and a rear position as the state switching device 360 switches states, and a lower member 380 that is arranged below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the sliding displacement member 370 between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 and has an insertion hole 381 formed therethrough that can insert a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150.

Before describing the details of the configuration of each part, we will provide an overview of the function of the sorting device 300. The sorting device 300 is a device that configures a flow path along which balls that pass through the ball passage hole 163b (see Figure 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow.

The balls that pass through the ball passage hole 163b flow down through the interior of the upper member 310, the flow path configurations 334, 335, and 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the interior of the lower member 380, and the balls that flow down from the lower member 380 are discharged into the ball discharge path (not shown).

The balls flowing down inside the distribution device 300 are configured to be visible to the player, and depending on the way they flow down, it is not just a dramatic effect that pleases the player's eyes, but also has an effect related to the gaming profits, such as bringing about changes in the profits that the player can obtain.

Differences in the flow patterns of balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 are mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

As a result, the player's gaze will naturally tend to be focused on the location where the ball flows from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380 (where the slide displacement member 370 is located, as described below), so this embodiment is designed to accommodate this focus.

Next, the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. The upper member 310 is a thin-walled member that is U-shaped when viewed from above and is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 formed therethrough to be able to receive balls, a pair of colored (red in this embodiment) transparent seal members 313 that are attached as markers, a pair of upper surface parts 314 that extend from the lower edge of the openings 312 along the outer periphery to the front side, a plurality of insertion tube parts 315 in which through holes are formed through which fastening screws that are screwed into the middle member 330 can be inserted, a fastening part 316 having a female thread through which the fastening screw inserted into the middle member 330 can be screwed, and the upper member 310. 10 from the underside, a pair of long front-rear projections 317 arranged side by side, a pair of inner left-right projections 318 arranged between the pair of long front-rear projections 317, a pair of outer left-right projections 319 arranged on the outer left-right sides of the pair of long front-rear projections 317, a pair of outer left-right projections 319 arranged on the outer left-right sides of the pair of long front-rear projections 317, and a storage recess 320 formed as a recess large enough to accommodate the upper part of the substrate 350.

The opening 312 is a passage-like portion (tunnel-like portion) that receives balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and allows them to flow downward, and its upper front edge is shaped as if it had been cut with an inclined surface so that it is flush with the back surface of the plate of the inclined detection sensor SE1 (see Figure 12). This allows the upper front edge of the opening 312 to come into contact with the back surface of the plate of the detection sensor SE1.

In addition, the opening 312 is formed with an opening size that does not allow the ball to enter the inside of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. This reduces the flow resistance when guiding the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b to the opening 312.

The sealing member 313 functions as a member that attracts the player's attention by receiving light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350 and becoming brightly visible, but details will be given later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is sloped to match the path that the ball takes below the upper member 310. The first upper surface portion 314a, which is located on the front side of the opening 312, is formed to slope downward as it approaches the front side, and the second upper surface portion 314b, which is connected to the front end of the first upper surface portion 314a and is located on the left and right inside, is formed to slope downward as it approaches the left and right inside. The left and right second upper surface portions 314b are configured so that the left and right distance between them is longer toward the front, thereby ensuring the player's visibility when viewing the ball through the second upper surface portions 314b.

The insertion tube portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the upper surface to receive the head of the fastening screw. Therefore, even though the fastening screw is inserted from above, it is easy to prevent the player from seeing the head of the fastening screw.

The insertion tube portion 315 is positioned to match the fastening portion 332d having a female thread formed in the inner member 330. In particular, the fastening portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion that supports the rotating portion 363, as will be described in detail later.

The fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 is positioned with the screw portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, while the fastening portion 316 is positioned at the front, the screw head is not easily noticeable to a player viewing from diagonally above. This makes it possible to securely fasten the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 together while avoiding the fastening screw spoiling the appearance of the sorting device 300.

The reason why the fastening portion 316 is only formed on the right side is that since the insertion tube portion 315 is already arranged in two places on the rear side, one fastening position on the front side is sufficient, and although the screw head is facing downward and is not very noticeable, omitting it if unnecessary will improve the appearance of the sorting device 300. Note that the arrangement of the fastening portion 316 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on the left side, or it may be arranged in a pair on the left and right.

The fastening portion 316 is positioned to avoid the path of the balls flowing down and to minimize any loss in appearance of the sorting device 300, as will be described in more detail below.

The undersides of the long front-rear projections 317, the inner left-right projections 318, and the outer left-right projections 319, which form each pair, are formed as curved surfaces that use the same point as a reference point and become lower the further away from that point. The curved surfaces of the long front-rear projections 317, the inner left-right projections 318, and the outer left-right projections 319 have different shapes, and the difference in shape is intended to control the way the ball flows down.

The middle member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (approximately box-shaped) with a lower bottom at the rear side, a pair of front frame portions 333 formed in a frame shape (approximately box-shaped) with a lower bottom at the front side, a pair of first flow path components 334 recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame portion 333 to form a flow path for the balls, a pair of second flow path components 335 connected to the front end of the first flow path components 334 to form a flow path for the balls and recessed in front of the front frame portion 333, and a pair of third flow path components 336 connected to the left and right inner ends of the second flow path components 335 to form a flow path for the balls and recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333.

The middle member 330 also includes a discharge hole 337 that is elongated from side to side and penetrates the lower base at the rear side of the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and functions as a discharge path for the balls; a partition plate portion 338 that is elongated in the front-rear direction and divides the discharge hole 337 and the third flow path component 336 into left and right parts; and a pair of alignment protrusions 339 that protrude from the lower surface at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 as elongated rectangular protrusions.

Unlike the front part which forms a path for the balls to flow down, the rear frame part 332 does not form a path for the balls to flow down, but is mainly configured as a part supporting the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame part 332 has an arrangement through hole 332a formed in the front end of the left-right center part in the vertical direction and configured to be able to arrange the slide displacement member 370, a guide hole 332b formed in the lower bottom part as a long through hole in the left-right direction and guiding the slide displacement of the guided part 362c of the state switching device 360, a plurality of fastened parts 332c having a female threaded part formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 can be screwed in, and a cylindrical fastened part 332d having a female threaded part at the upper tip into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion tube part 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed in.

The front frame portion 333 has a light diffusion treatment applied to the inside of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom, which reduces visibility of the rear side of the front frame portion 333. The front frame portion 333 is formed in a frame shape that is roughly square when viewed from above, and has an insertion hole 333a formed as a countersunk hole through which a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted.

The first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 are each parts that form the flow path of the balls, and are designed to have different flow directions and inclination angles of the balls, etc., but details will be given later.

The open portion 335a, which is open on the front side at the connection position between the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, is a gap that allows the symmetrical protrusion 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65 to enter. In other words, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is positioned to enter the inside of the flow path through the open portion 335a so that it can abut against the balls flowing down the sorting device 300.

The discharge holes 337 are divided by a partition plate 338 and are configured as a pair on the left and right, and are formed with a size that allows the ball to be discharged in at least two ways. In other words, the left and right length is at least twice the diameter of the ball. In this embodiment, multiple detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side on the lower member 380 located below the discharge holes 337, so the shape of the discharge holes 337 can be designed to match the arrangement of the ball through holes of the detection sensors SE1.

The partition plate portion 338 not only separates the third flow path component 336 as described above, but also functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, as will be described in detail later. The alignment protrusion portion 339 is fitted into the protrusion portion 383a of the lower member 380 to prevent misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, as will be described in detail later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T shape with the lower portion 353 being longer in the left-right direction than the upper portion 352, and has a recessed portion 354 for positioning at the lower end on the left side of the lower portion 353.

The recessed portion 354 engages with a corresponding portion of the internal shape of the middle member 330 to determine the position in the left-right direction, the left-right long lower portion 353 is supported by being sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 to determine the position in the front-rear direction, and the upper portion 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent it from falling out upwards, thereby fixing the arrangement; details of the arrangement, together with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351, will be described later.

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the inner member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361, a sliding portion 362 that engages with the tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 for linear displacement in the left-right direction and slides together with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is supported rotatably by being inserted through the fastened portion 332d on the left side and rotates in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding portion 362.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so that the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be received from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes to the right from the right side surface, and a guided portion 362c that protrudes downward from the center of the front and rear of the lower side surface and is formed with an oval cross section that is long in the left-right direction.

The disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above due to the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, so that the slide portion 362 can be prevented from falling off upward. Therefore, the position of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disk portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the inner member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disk portion 361a with adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is inserted into the guide hole 332b of the inner member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the sliding portion 362 from deviating from the left-right direction. In particular, in this embodiment, it is formed long in the left-right direction, so that the position of the sliding portion 362 can be maintained by engaging the guided portion 362c with the guide hole 332b. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be, for example, circular or rectangular.

The rotating part 363 is formed in a generally L-shape when viewed from above, and includes a support tube part 363a formed in a vertically long cylindrical shape at the connection part of the L-shape and having a through hole large enough to insert the fastened part 332d of the middle member 330, an upper cylindrical part 363b protruding upward from the short end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the through hole of the protruding part 362b, and a lower cylindrical part 363c protruding downward from the long end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the recessed part 378 of the sliding displacement member 370.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the rotating part 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder part 363a as a central axis. The displacement of this rotating part 363 occurs due to a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the plunger slides and the slide part 362 is displaced in the left-right direction by passing electricity through the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the upper cylindrical part 363b inserted into the through hole of the protruding part 362b is displaced, and the lower cylindrical part 363c is displaced accordingly, resulting in the displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

The sliding displacement member 370 is a member supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at a position between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and includes a thin plate portion 371 supported by being sandwiched from above and below between the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, upper protrusions 376 protruding upward from the thin plate portion 371 in a pair on the left and right, and a recessed portion 378 recessed at the protruding end of the protrusion protruding upward in the left-right center rearward of the upper protrusions 376 and formed to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 is provided with a pair of supported holes 371a formed on the left and right sides in the rear half, a recessed portion 372 recessed from the front end in the left and right center portion to a long length in the front-to-rear direction with a left-to-right width shorter than the spacing of the upper protrusions 376, a pair of lower protrusions 373 protruding downward in a protruding shape along the edge of the recessed portion 372, a plurality of upper and lower protrusions 374 protruding in both the up and down directions in a protruding shape along the left and right edges of the rear half, and a cylindrical protrusion 375 protruding downward from the rear end in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the long guide hole 386 of the lower member 380.

The lower protrusion 373 and the upper and lower protrusions 374 are intended to slide against the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged above and below, and are protrusions for reducing the contact area with the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 compared to flat contact. By reducing the contact area, the displacement resistance of the sliding displacement member 370 can be reduced, and therefore the displacement speed of the sliding displacement member 370 can be prevented from slowing down.

The upper protrusion 376 is a columnar portion that is generally trapezoidal in front view, and is positioned so as to pass through the placement through-hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332. The width length of the gap on the left and right inner sides of the upper protrusion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protrusion 376.

In other words, the upper protrusion 376 is arranged in the gap on the left and right inside to sandwich the partition plate 338, and is configured so that misalignment in the left and right direction is suppressed by abutting against the partition plate 338. This allows the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 to be well guided, and the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole that is long in the left-right direction so that it can accommodate the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 that is required to cause the sliding displacement member 370 to displace in the front-rear direction.

The protruding portion in which the recess 378 is formed is configured to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332, so that the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 can be easily inserted into the recess 378.

In this way, the shape of the placement through hole 332a is designed as a through hole whose shape includes the entire area in which the upper protruding portion 376, which is intended to be inserted, and the protruding portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed, are placed.

The lower member 380 includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed in a long, thin plate shape on the left and right, and a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape below the plate-like portion 382 that allows multiple detection sensors SE1 (four in this embodiment) to be arranged side by side on the left and right.

The sensor holding frame 389 is formed in a frame shape with openings on the rear side where the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and on the top and bottom sides through which the ball passes through the through-hole of the detection sensor SE1, and the other parts are closed.

The plate-shaped portion 382 has a through hole formed at a position that matches the through hole of the detection sensor SE1, just as the sensor holding frame portion 389 has a through hole formed in the up-down direction. The plate-shaped portion 382 has a protrusion portion 383 that protrudes upward in the front-rear direction at the intermediate position between the two detection sensors SE1 on the left and right inside, a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions spaced apart on the left and right, and a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions spaced apart on the left and right sides, and a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions rearward of the protrusion portion 383 and are fitted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370. It is equipped with a pair of guide protrusions 384 that protrude in an insertable position, a pair of guide protrusions 385 that are formed as long protrusions in the front-rear direction at both left and right positions outside the guide protrusions 384, a long guide hole 386 that extends in the same straight line as the protrusions 383 when viewed from above, a curved surface portion 387 that is formed in a curved surface shape that protrudes rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 that is formed through so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 332c of the inner member 330 can be inserted.

The protrusion 383 is formed as a protrusion with a left-right thickness that is slightly shorter than the left-right gap width of the recess 372 of the sliding displacement member 370, and the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged so that the recess 372 sandwiches the protrusion 383. In other words, the protrusion 383 functions as a guide that guides the forward/rearward displacement of the sliding displacement member 370.

The protrusions 383a are designed so that their left and right inner ends are in the same position as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 are fitted into the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a in abutting engagement, so that the left and right position of the middle member 330 can be appropriately determined with respect to the lower member 380. At the same time, the back side of the front frame part of the lower member 380 (the part connecting the protrusions 383 and the protrusions 383a at the front end side) is abutted against the front side of the alignment protrusions 339, so that the front and rear position of the middle member 330 can be appropriately determined with respect to the lower member 380.

This makes it easier to avoid misalignment between the third flow path configuration portion 336, which is a component of the middle member 330, and the detection sensor SE1, which is a component of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in an oval shape that is long from side to side, and is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the sliding displacement member 370 to limit the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370. In other words, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the range in which the guide protrusion 384 is disposed inside the supported hole 371a.

This prevents the sliding displacement member 370 from colliding with the protruding portion 383, and therefore improves the durability of the protruding portion 383 compared to a configuration in which the forward displacement end is determined at the position where the sliding displacement member 370 collides with the protruding portion 383. As a result, the guiding effect of the protruding portion 383 can be maintained for a long period of time.

The guide protrusion 384 does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 even if it is broken, but functions as a part to prevent collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, while the guide protrusion 384 is usually designed with a strength that allows it to be used for a set period (e.g., three years) without being broken, the strength of the guide protrusion 384 and the protrusion 383 may be designed in anticipation of the use in a state in which the protrusion 383 and the slide displacement member 370 collide after the guide protrusion 384 is broken. In other words, the life of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to less than the set period (e.g., two years), and the remaining period may be designed to withstand the strength of the protrusion 383. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in the shape can be improved.

The guide ribs 385 are arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left-right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, and are formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be placed in the gap. The displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left-right inner side of the guide ribs 385. This allows the sliding displacement member 370 to be displaced in the front-rear direction with little misalignment in the left-right direction.

The guide slot 386 is a slot formed with a width large enough to allow the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the sliding displacement member 370 to pass through. The direction of displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the front-rear direction by the cylindrical protrusion 375 being guided by the guide slot 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is an abutment surface for guiding the ball flowing down below the inner member 330. In this embodiment, it guides the ball that enters the outlet 71, but details will be described later.

The fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. This makes it possible to prevent the fastening screw from being conspicuously visible. The insertion hole 388 is also positioned on the left and right outer side and on the rear side of the area in which the multiple detection sensors SE1 are arranged. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 will block the view of the ball passing near the detection sensor SE1 or through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the sliding displacement member 370 is guided by a number of parts, namely the guide ridge 385 for the thin plate portion 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, the protrusion 383 for the recessed portion 372 and the lower protrusion 373, the guide long hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, the partition plate portion 338 for the upper protrusion 376, etc., and displaces in the front-rear direction. This allows the load during guiding to be shared among a number of positions, preventing the load from being applied locally and avoiding damage to the sliding displacement member 370 and the guiding portion that guides the sliding displacement member 370.

As can be seen from this, the sliding displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by at least a plurality of members, the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, the sliding displacement member 370 has at least a pair of upper protrusions 376 guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 guided by the protrusion portion 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are poorly assembled and there is a large misalignment, the movement of the sliding displacement member 370 will be hindered. Here, since the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are parts that continuously configure the ball's flow path, it is preferable to keep the misalignment small, and by making the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 good, it is possible to ensure that the misalignment is small.

In other words, if the misalignment of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 will not be performed properly, and by detecting that the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is poor, it is possible to control the system to issue an error notification because there is a possibility that the relative positioning of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor.

This prevents the player from continuing to play with the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 in a poor relative positioning, reducing the possibility of the player suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. Here, the configuration related to the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 and the configuration entering the flow path of the balls will be mainly described.

Figure 15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300, Figure 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVI-XVI in Figure 15, Figure 17 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15, and Figure 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15.

In the figures from Fig. 15 to Fig. 18, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state in which it is disposed in the front position. First, the details of the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be described.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), a ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b rolls on the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passing hole 163b. The ball that passes through the ball passing hole 163b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path component 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path component 334, the subsequent second flow path component 335, and the subsequent third flow path component 336 are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and the connected flow paths are formed into a spiral shape that forms an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path component 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the front side in the front-to-rear direction, the second flow path component 335 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down in a left-to-right direction rotated 90 degrees based on the flow direction of the ball flowing down the first flow path component 334, and the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the back side in the front-to-rear direction rotated 90 degrees in the same direction as the previous rotation direction based on the flow direction of the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335.

In this way, by forming the flow path into a spiral shape with a right-angled bend, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the flow velocity of the ball increases as it moves downstream. In more detail, the ball flows down the first flow path component 334 accelerating toward the front side, but the flow direction in the subsequent second flow path component 335 does not have a front-to-rear component, so it is possible to realize a flow pattern in which the influence of the acceleration in the first flow path component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow path component 336 following the second flow path component 335, the ball flows backward, which is the opposite of the acceleration direction in the first flow path component 334, so it is possible to realize a flow pattern in which the influence of the acceleration in the front-to-rear direction is suppressed.

Therefore, unlike a flow pattern in which the ball flows consistently in the same direction (e.g., to the left), it is easier to prevent the ball's flow speed from becoming excessively fast downstream. In other words, it is easier to make the ball's flow speed uniform throughout the entire flow path, which has the effect of keeping the player's attention on the ball high and making it easier to prevent the player from losing sight of the ball.

For example, it is also possible not to form the second flow path component 335, but forming the second flow path component 335 makes it easier to prevent clogging and backflow of the balls. If the second flow path component 335 is not formed (if the left-right length of the second flow path component 335 is 0), that is, if the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 are connected, it becomes necessary to reverse the flow direction of the balls by 180 degrees from the flow toward the front to the flow toward the rear at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the flow direction of the balls is large, and in particular the speed direction needs to be reversed back and forth, making it difficult to make the balls flow smoothly, and the balls are likely to become stuck, clogged, or backflow, which may cause malfunctions.

In contrast, as in this embodiment, if the flow direction switching angle is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in this embodiment), the ball's speed direction does not reverse, so the ball can flow smoothly, making it easier to avoid the ball becoming stuck, clogging, or flowing back.

The flow path shape at the connection end of each flow path component 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical protrusion 161f is arranged as a part that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow direction of the ball.

The symmetrical protrusions 161f are formed so that the portion located downstream of the ball is further back from the path of the ball than the portion located upstream of the ball. For example, the width of the opposing symmetrical protrusions 161f is longer than the width of the adjacent partition plate portions 338. In addition, the rear ends of the left and right ends of the opposing symmetrical protrusions 161f are positioned closer to the front than the flow path side of the second flow path configuration portion 335 near the open portion 335a (see FIG. 17).

This prevents the ball from being excessively decelerated or from flowing backwards when the ball collides with the symmetrical protrusion 161f.

In addition, at the connection end between the second flow path component 335 and the first flow path component 334, the side wall portion 334a is curved at the front left and right ends of the central member 330 and is formed as a portion that guides the flow of the ball by bending the flow direction of the ball.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334, a curved protrusion 334b is formed that protrudes upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path forming part 334 with a curved surface shape (see Figure 16) that descends toward the front side, and is formed as a part that guides the downstream flow of the ball in a manner that bends the downstream direction of the ball.

That is, the ball that passes through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first flow path forming part 334, and while flowing down, the ball abuts against the side wall part 334a, changing the flow direction, flows down the second flow path forming part 335, and while flowing down, the ball abuts against the symmetrical protrusion part 161f, changing the flow direction, flows down the third flow path forming part 336, and reaches the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with the protruding support portion 161d of the fixed member 161 and aligned. In other words, the side wall portion 334a is supported by being sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and misalignment in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 can be aligned in the left-right direction.

The longitudinal inclination angle and length ratio of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be described below. With regard to the longitudinal inclination angle, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle of approximately 7 degrees relative to the horizontal, the second flow path component 335 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal, and the third flow path component 336 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path component 334, and a slightly gentler common inclination angle is set in the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

Regarding length, each flow path component 334-336 is formed so that the front frame portion 333, which is formed with a square outer shape when viewed from above, forms the inner side, and a large square having the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame portion 333 forms the outer side. Here, in this embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square described above is 45 mm, forming a flow path with a width of 12 mm around the perimeter.

Therefore, for a normally used 11 mm diameter sphere, the clearance with the flow path is set to 1 mm total on both sides of the sphere, so the sphere flows down with almost no misalignment in the width direction. Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see Figure 2) and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) is set at approximately 19 mm, this is a small clearance, and misalignment of the sphere as it flows down can be suppressed.

Of the parts constituting the ends of each flow path component 334-336 arranged on a square surrounding the periphery of the square-shaped front frame portion 333, only the curved protrusion 334b constituting the upstream end of the first flow path component 334 is arranged inside (on the front side) the apex of the square, so the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

In terms of actual measurements when viewed from above, the flow paths formed by the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 are approximately the same length (33 mm center-to-center spacing of the spheres), and this length is approximately 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path component 334 (22 mm center-to-center spacing of the spheres).

The longitudinal inclination angle and length ratio of each of the flow path components 334-336 described above explain that the time required for a ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334-336 is not constant. In other words, the time it takes for a ball to pass through the first flow path component 334, which has the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length, is shorter than the time it takes for a ball to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, which have a gentler inclination angle and a path length 1.5 times longer.

In this embodiment, by configuring it in this manner, the ball can be displaced to the front side early on when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, and the ball's visibility can be reduced by being partially hidden by the non-transparent resin part of the detection sensor SE1, switching the state to one where the ball is closer to the player and has high visibility. This makes it easier to avoid situations where the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

Furthermore, when the visibility of the ball is high, the speed at which the ball flows down can be slowed down, eliminating the need for the player to quickly move their gaze toward the ball, reducing the gaming burden on the player who is focusing on the ball (eye strain caused by eye movement).

When focusing on a ball flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, which have thus increased visibility, the amount of displacement of the ball in a front-to-back direction when viewed from the front is smaller when the ball flows down the third flow path component 336 compared to when the ball flows down the second flow path component 335 in the left-to-right direction. Therefore, the playing burden on the player focusing on the ball can be minimized when focusing on the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In other words, since the lengths and inclination angles are equivalent, the time required for the ball to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path component 336 are equivalent, but since the amount of displacement of the ball when viewed from the front is different, the apparent flow speed of the ball (the displacement speed of the ball when viewed from the front) is slower for the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 than for the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335.

The only place where the ball's flow path changes is at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, where the player's burden is minimized and the player's attention is easily drawn to the ball, and in other areas the ball's flow path is the same for each of the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, the player's line of sight is naturally likely to be focused on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and the game burden on the player who focuses their gaze in this way can be effectively reduced.

In addition, in order to ensure the player's field of vision when focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, in this embodiment, an opening 335a is formed on the front side of the second flow path component 335 (see Figure 17), which makes it possible to prevent the flesh of the second flow path component 335 from obstructing the line of sight toward the third flow path component 336.

Furthermore, the symmetrical protrusion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a is formed only with the portion necessary for contacting and guiding the flowing ball, and the formation of shaped portions is omitted above and below it. In other words, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion on the top and bottom, and space is secured above and below it (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to when the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed with thickness on the top and bottom, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336 will be obstructed by the symmetrical protrusion 161f, and visibility can be improved.

The third flow path component 336 is also configured so that balls that deviate from the opening/closing plate 65b and head toward the outlet 71 gather toward the field of view centered on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in this embodiment, balls that enter the outlet 71 flow downward below the third flow path component 336, come into contact with the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and are discharged downward.

Assuming that the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 are viewed from the diagonally upward front, the balls entering the outlet 71 will flow down the back side of the third flow path component 336. As a result, the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 and the balls entering the outlet 71 will be viewed overlapping from the front to the back, and the total number of balls entering the field of view focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 will be increased.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path component 336, or whether the ball does not enter the specific winning port 65a and enters the out port 71, the ball will enter a field of view that draws attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, regardless of the ease with which the balls are directed toward the specific winning port 65a, i.e., the configuration of the nails set into the base plate 60 (the so-called quality of the gauge), the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (the part that attracts the player's attention) is positioned at a position that overlaps in the front-to-rear direction with the position where most of the shot balls (excluding balls that enter the other winning ports 63, 64, 140) gather. This allows the balls flowing down to efficiently guide the player's gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

As described above, visibility has been improved in positions closer to the front side, but in this embodiment, visibility in positions closer to the back side is reduced except for the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

For example, a light diffusion surface 333b is formed on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the inner member 330 in a shape similar to a prism to cause light diffusion. In FIG. 17, the area that appears sawtooth-like is the light diffusion surface 333b, which is formed on almost the entire inner circumference of the inner surface, from top to bottom.

When light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, making the entire surface appear to be shining, and while it is possible to make the surface appear to be shining brilliantly, the light blocks the view, making the visibility of the area behind it poor. According to this embodiment, visibility is poor when light is irradiated from the light-emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when light is not irradiated, visibility can be improved at least compared to when light is irradiated.

On the other hand, if there is an object blocking the light, the shadow of the object will be seen as a black dot, making its position easier to determine.

Surfaces similar to the light diffusion surface 333b are also formed in other areas. For example, light diffusion surface 319a is formed on the rear side of the left and right external protrusions 319, and light diffusion surface 332e is formed on the rear side of the front part of the rear frame portion 332 (see FIG. 17).

Examples of processed surfaces formed in a similar shape include the light diffusion processed surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the plate-like portion extending to the rear side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, which is a portion that covers the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion of the middle member 330 that is forward of the rear frame portion 332.

In this embodiment, due to these configurations, the flow paths formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow path components 334 to 336 have light diffusing surfaces formed on the back side, bottom side, inner surface of the spiral, and upper surface of the spiral, achieving the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

When no light is irradiated onto the light diffusion surface, from the player's perspective looking at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 from the front side, the ball that has changed direction left or right from the third flow path component 336 is hidden by the front frame portion 333, making it immediately difficult to see.

Furthermore, even if a player tries to see the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held in the sensor holding frame 389 and fallen from the player's line of sight when viewed from diagonally above, the line of sight passes through the light diffusion surface 340, and light is irradiated onto the light diffusion surface 340, making it difficult to identify the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen.

In this embodiment, as described below, the profit obtained by the player is controlled to change depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, in order to understand how the ball flows down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, it becomes necessary to check the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, which can further improve attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, it is possible to create a state in which the shadow of the ball is easily visible as a black spot. In this way, by switching the light emission on or off depending on the situation, it is possible to switch the visibility of the ball between good and bad. Also, depending on whether or not a ball is placed in front of the black spot, it is possible to create a situation in which the black spot is hidden by the ball, and a situation in which the black spot is visible and not hidden by the ball.

As described above, the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed near each of the flow path components 334 to 336, but are consistently formed on the side that does not come into contact with the spheres flowing down the flow paths formed by each of the flow path components 334 to 336.

This prevents the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped off by contact with the sphere, so the shape of the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be maintained for a long period of time, and the light diffusion effect can be maintained.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the ball from coming into contact with the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, which would hinder the ball's flow downward or slow it down. In addition, by ensuring visibility inside the flow path, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the ball from decreasing even while it is flowing down the flow path formed by each flow path component 334 to 336.

The light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the size of the prism, it is possible to create both the effect of light diffusion and the effect of decelerating the ball by colliding with it.

In the front frame portion 333 of the inner member 330, the formation of the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and there is a possibility that visibility will remain high without measures. Therefore, in this embodiment, the fastening screw is used to reduce visibility.

That is, the fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transparent, so that it can be used to conceal areas where it would be difficult to form the light diffusion surface 333b. When light is irradiated onto the front frame portion 333, the light diffusion surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in areas where the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted, the fastening screw reflects the light and shines, so that it is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front frame portion 333 when viewed from the front side, including areas where the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted.

The light-diffusing surface 332e of the inner member 330 is formed on the back side of each flow path component 334-336, and in addition to providing a brilliant glow, the purpose of this is to provide a function of concealing the board 350 and the state switching device 360 that are disposed on the back side. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is disposed on the back side of the board 350 (see FIG. 17), the board 350 acts as a screen, making it easier to prevent the state switching device 360 from being seen by the player.

The substrate 350 is housed in a manner that it is supported by the rear frame portion 332 of the inner member 330, but is positioned with a gap between it and the bottom of the rear frame portion 332 at the center from left to right, and the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in that gap (see FIG. 18). In other words, the substrate 350 is positioned so that the sliding displacement member 370 is sandwiched between it and the bottom of the rear frame portion 332.

In more detail, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower portion 353 is sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame portion 332 at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17). At this support point, the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 has a thick portion 332f (see FIG. 16), and near the left and right center position, a gap is created due to the absence of this thick portion, and the sliding displacement member 370 can be placed in this gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the storage recess 320 of the upper member 310 and is positioned opposite the light diffusion surface 164f formed on the intervening member 164 in the front-to-rear direction.

Therefore, by irradiating light from the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352, the light diffusing surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can have a brilliantly shining effect, and further, the visibility of the area on the back side of the intervening member 164 can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion surface 164f, and since the light diffusion surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape imitating a prism formed along the entire surface in the vertical direction, the light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as a light with a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it can be made to appear as if light is being emitted from above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the light diffusion surface 164f is positioned at the center of the left and right of the receiving member 163. However, even if it is positioned behind the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 will obstruct the view and will not be clearly visible. Therefore, if it is formed within the gap between at least one pair of detection sensors SE1, a sufficient effect can be achieved.

The lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is positioned so that light is directed toward the sealing member 313 and the portion below it through which the balls flow, as will be described in more detail below.

Next, referring to Figures 19 and 20, we will explain the switching of the flow path of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336 and its significance. In the explanation of Figures 19 and 20, Figures 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

Figure 19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15, and Figure 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. In Figures 19 and 20, when shown, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state disposed in a rear position.

Here, we will explain the four detection sensors SE1 on the left and right sides supported by the sensor holding frame 389, the flow of the balls to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1.

The four detection sensors SE1 are arranged symmetrically in two sets, and include a special chance detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12, which share the same function. The special chance detection sensor SE11 is arranged on the inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged on the outside in the left-right direction.

The function of these four detection sensors SE1 is different from that of the detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening and closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening and closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor that causes the payout of prize balls. In other words, when a ball that has entered a specific winning opening 65a is detected as having entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 for each detection) are paid out to the player by the payout control device 111 (see Figure 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389 does not function as a detection sensor that pays out prize balls, but rather as a detection sensor that detects balls entering the machine and changes the game state after the big win game ends.

As described later, in this embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed in the sensor holding frame 389 is used to switch whether or not to transition to a high probability state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor to switch whether or not the next jackpot will be won.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the front position (see Figures 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is positioned so that the thin plate portion 371 covers the upper side of the probability change detection sensor SE11, preventing the ball from passing through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336 is guided by the upper protrusion portion 376 of the slide displacement member to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 that faces the ball is formed in an arc shape with a concave flow path side, so that the ball can flow smoothly toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position (see Figures 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retreats rearward from above the probability change detection sensor SE11, allowing the ball to pass through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In other words, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the position (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through-hole of the special probability detection sensor SE11 during a jackpot game, the game state after that jackpot game is controlled to be the special probability state. In other words, when it is not detected that the ball has passed through the through-hole of the special probability detection sensor SE11, and it has only passed through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after that jackpot game is controlled to be the normal state (or time-saving state).

As described above, in this embodiment, two types of jackpots are prepared: a guaranteed jackpot and a normal jackpot. To achieve this, in this embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared for the sliding displacement member 370 for each type of jackpot.

In other words, in the case of a guaranteed jackpot, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operating pattern that allows the ball to easily pass through the through-hole of the guaranteed jackpot detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operating pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the guaranteed jackpot detection sensor SE11 and makes it easy for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12; details of this control will be described later.

In this way, the placement of the sliding displacement members 370 is directly related to the profits that the player can obtain, and so the placement naturally attracts the player's attention. On the other hand, there have been quite a few instances of fraudulent attempts to illegally switch the placement of the sliding displacement members 370, and measures against this are considered important.

As a premise, the position of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360. In other words, when no current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are positioned on the right side by a biasing spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is positioned on the front side, so that the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the portion inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370) is displaced toward the rear side, thereby maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the rear position. This is the normal operating mode, and there is a one-to-one correspondence between the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

A person committing the above-mentioned fraudulent acts may, for example, insert a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the distribution device 300 through the ball dispensing opening or the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see Figure 1), and press the thin metal wire against the sliding displacement member 370, pushing the sliding displacement member 370 toward the back, thereby fraudulently creating a state in which a ball can enter the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged such that the thin plate portion 371 is disposed below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 18), so when a thin metal wire is passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 and pressed against the sliding displacement member 370, it is difficult to press the thin plate portion 371 against the front end portion, and the thin plate portion 371 is pressed against the upper protrusion portion 376. The front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion portion 376 is curved to release the load to the left and right sides as described above, so that even if the thin metal wire is pressed against it, the load can be released to the left and right sides, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the sliding displacement member 370 is improperly displaced to the rear position.

In addition, the path taken to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is not a straight line but a spiral, and the sliding displacement member 370 itself is located far away (approximately 10 cm) from the front side to the rear side of the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1), making it difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the sliding displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the design freedom of the configuration of the state switching device 360. That is, in the past, in order to deal with the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, the position of the sliding displacement member 370 was often maintained by mechanically devising (displacement regulation) the mechanism that transmits the driving force, and in such cases the configuration of the state switching device 360 was limited. In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the sliding displacement member 370 so that it is difficult to apply load to it in the first place, it is possible to partially omit the conditions required for the state switching device 360, and the design freedom of the state switching device 360 can be increased.

In addition, when a pressure load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 by using a thin metal wire threaded through the third flow path component 336, the thin metal wire itself will obstruct the flow of the ball down the third flow path component 336, making it difficult for the ball to reach the probability change detection sensor SE11.

As mentioned above, the profit a player can obtain varies greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through-hole of the special bonus detection sensor SE11 or the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, so it is desirable to avoid erroneous balls as much as possible.

In conventional models, it was common to configure the system to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are permitted to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11. However, in this embodiment, no movable parts are provided to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are permitted to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11 (see Figures 19 and 20), and the system is configured to allow balls to enter the normal detection sensor SE12 as well.

Even with this configuration, if at least one of the 10 balls that flow down passes through the through hole of the special probability detection sensor SE11, the special probability state after the big win is ensured. Based on this concept, this embodiment omits the placement of the movable parts that open and close the normal detection sensor SE12, thereby reducing material costs and reducing product costs. Furthermore, not placing a movable part has the positive effect of eliminating the need for maintenance associated with breakdowns or malfunctions of the movable parts, and of extending the lifespan of the pachinko machine beyond the lifespan of the movable parts.

On the other hand, as a measure separate from the movable member, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 have been devised to guide the ball to the appropriate detection sensor SE1. In other words, the shape of the parts fixedly positioned inside the flow path (i.e., the protrusions 317, 318, 319) is used to realize a mechanism that prevents more balls than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position. This will be explained below.

First, the design of the flow path shape will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward at an angle of 5 degrees from the horizontal toward the center in the left-right direction (toward the partition plate portion 338) in the short direction (see FIG. 15).

This inclination angle is set to be the same angle and direction as the longitudinal inclination of the second flow path component 335, so that it is possible to reduce the bouncing of the ball (bouncing away from the partition plate portion 338) when the ball flows from the second flow path component 335 to the third flow path component 336.

This inclination in the short direction allows the positioning of the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 to be closer to the partition plate portion 338. Therefore, as the balls flow from the rear end of the third flow path component 336 to the detection sensor SE1 side, they can be positioned closer to the partition plate portion 338, reducing the possibility of the balls accidentally passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 positioned away from the partition plate portion 338) when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the short side of the lower bottom surface 336a, the flow paths formed by each flow path component 334-336 have a left-right path formed only by the second flow path component 335, and the inclination direction is toward the left-right center (toward the partition plate portion 338), so the left-right velocity occurs inward to the left and right. This also reduces the possibility of the ball erroneously passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 arranged away from the partition plate portion 338).

Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 will be described. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the first to be positioned adjacent to the ball that has flowed down the third flow path component 336. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the smallest of the protrusions 317, 318, 319, but are positioned closer to the front than the center of the detection sensor SE1 and closer to the front than the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370, so that they come into contact without fail with the ball that passes the rear end of the third flow path component 336 while sliding against the partition plate 338.

The protruding end surfaces of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are configured as curved surfaces that are concave downward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protrusion is formed to extend outward and downward to the left and right than the front end side of the protrusion, so that the front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, a ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and abuts against the left and right inner protrusions 318 receives a load in a direction that is a mixture of a left and right outward component and a downward component, and flows downward.

On the other hand, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are small, the load received from the left and right inner protrusions 318 alone does not determine whether the ball flows downward or outward, but rather functions solely as a momentum imparting force. Furthermore, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are positioned upstream of the slide displacement member 370, the momentum imparted to the ball occurs regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370.

The flow of the ball after it comes into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be explained in different cases. When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while coming into contact with the upper protrusion 376 and the front-rear long protrusion 317 (see Figure 18), and flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

The protruding end of the long front-rear protrusion 317 has the same purpose as the upper protrusion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the flow direction of the ball, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is approximately the same as the radius of curvature of the front side 376a of the upper protrusion 376. As a guideline, the upper protrusion 376 forms a curved surface that starts on the inner left and right sides and ends at a position rear of the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 when viewed from above (see FIG. 17), while the long front-rear protrusion 317 forms a curved surface that starts on the ceiling surface of the flow path and ends at a position close to the end position (rear end position) of the front side 376a at the front position of the slide displacement member 370 when viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 18).

Here, the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward outward to the left and right, and the ball is forced outward to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318, and uses that momentum to flow down in the outward left and right direction, allowing the ball to flow down smoothly.

Furthermore, left and right external protrusions 319 are formed above the ball flowing outward to the left and right, and ball bouncing is suppressed, allowing the ball to flow smoothly down the ball. Since the purpose of left and right external protrusions 319 is not to change the direction the ball flows down, but to suppress ball bouncing, its shape is significantly different from front and rear long protrusions 317, and its protruding end is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature that extends from above the special rate detection sensor SE11 to above the normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in this embodiment, the left and right external protrusions 319 are disposed closer to the front than the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (i.e., the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), so when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is likely to be disposed rearward of the center of the thickness of the left and right external protrusions 319. Therefore, when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact in the vertical direction, a load having a rearward component is likely to be applied to the ball, which makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing back toward the front.

These configurations make it easier to prevent balls from clogging or flowing backwards when multiple balls are flowing downstream.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protrusion portion 376 are retracted rearward of the long front-rear protrusion portion 317, so the ball abuts against the long front-rear protrusion portion 317 and flows.

The surface shape of the protruding end (curved surface) of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is shaped so that the normal passes through the center of the third flow path component 336, and the center of the thickness is located directly behind the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so it is easy to apply a load to the ball that it comes into contact with that has a suppressed left-right component. This load functions as a load that flows the ball diagonally downward and forward, because the protruding tip of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is shaped like a concave curved surface (see Figure 20).

Therefore, if the ball does not go all the way to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner protrusions 318, it will be subjected to a load from the front and rear long protrusions 317 diagonally downward and flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11.

Depending on the location of impact with the front-rear long protrusions 317, there is a concern that the ball may bounce back to the front side (causing a backflow). However, in this embodiment, as described above, the ball is given momentum diagonally downward to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318. Therefore, even if the ball bounces back to the front side, it will only collide with the rear end of the lower base of the third flow path component 336 (see Figure 20) or the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 (see Figure 19), making it easier to avoid the ball flowing back through the third flow path component 336.

What is unique about this embodiment is that even when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned at the rear and the ball flows toward the special rate detection sensor SE11, the ball is displaced outward to the left and right due to the load from the left and right inner protrusions 318, just as it is when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned at the front and the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12. The use of this will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be able to slide between a front position and a rear position. If the slide displacement member 370 performs a closing operation (movement from the rear position to the front position) while the ball is flowing down the third flow path component 336 toward the slide displacement member 370, a forward load may be applied to the ball, and a load may be applied in a direction (forward) that causes the ball to flow backward through the third flow path component 336.

To prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if the closing operation is controlled to be completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 during operation can be eliminated, thereby reducing the possibility of the ball flowing back.

In addition, by forming the front surface of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 as a curved surface facing outward to the left and right, and by positioning the left and right inner protrusions 318 so that they collide with all balls, it is possible to create an action of guiding the balls that reach the rear end of the third flow path component 336 outward to the left and right. This makes it difficult for the balls to flow back.

In addition, the opening movement of the sliding displacement member 370 (movement from the front position to the rear position) is not a movement in a direction opposite to the ball, but rather a movement away from the ball, so even if the movement is performed when the ball is resting on the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, a load that pushes the ball back toward the front is unlikely to be generated. Therefore, even if the opening movement is controlled to be performed at any timing without taking into account the position of the ball, it is not thought to make it easier for the ball to flow back.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the top surface of the sliding displacement member 370 (still in the early stages of flowing outward to the left or right), the opening operation of the sliding displacement member 370 applies a load to the ball in a direction that suppresses the rotation (in the direction that causes the ball to roll backwards), so the rotation of the ball can be stopped, the flow of the ball can be halted, and it becomes easier to move into free fall.

As a result, when the sliding displacement member 370 opens while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is easier to prevent the ball from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of its previous rolling, and it is easier to guide the ball to the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In the present embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 equipped with the above-mentioned sorting device 300, we will explain how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's point of view. Below, as an example, we will explain cases where the angle of the line of sight relative to the horizontal direction is different.

Figure 21 is a front view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, Figure 22 is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXII in Figure 16, and Figure 23 is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in Figure 16.

As a premise, a player operating the pachinko machine 10 can play in any posture he or she likes, except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, a player may play the game with his or her head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight that is horizontal or inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 22), or he or she may play the game by bringing his or her head closer to the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight that is inclined downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 23). In general, the former provides a wider field of view, but makes it difficult to notice small details, while the latter provides a narrower field of view, but makes it easier to notice small details within that field of view.

Figure 21 is shown as a reference, and the following explanation will be mainly made by comparing Figures 22 and 23. For convenience, Figures 21 to 23 show the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is shown by imaginary lines. Note that the light emitting means 351 are arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), but only the left half is shown to facilitate understanding. The function of the light emitting means 351 located at the top has been described above, so here we will explain the three light emitting means 351 in the left half located in the lower portion 353.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 irradiates light towards the seal member 313. As described above, the seal member 313 is formed in a red transparent color, so when light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. This can increase the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings. As the seal member 313 is disposed directly above the third flow path configuration section 336 (see Figure 18), it can draw attention to the third flow path configuration section 336.

The light diffusion surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351 (see FIG. 18). This prevents the light from the light emitting means 351 from being visually stretched in the vertical direction by the light diffusion surface 332e, and allows the light to be concentrated around the sealing member 313.

Although there are no limitations to the light emission control, for example, during a jackpot game, in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, it is possible to control the light to be irradiated onto the sealing member 313, thereby drawing attention to the sealing member 313 and naturally guiding the gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 located below it.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to the positions directly above the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the light emitting means 351 is controlled so that when the ball enters the special chance detection sensor SE11, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the special chance detection sensor SE11 emits light, whereas when the ball enters the normal detection sensor SE12, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the normal detection sensor SE12 emits light, thereby notifying the player of the location where the ball has passed.

The light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed toward the light diffusion surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right center sides is arranged opposite the light diffusion surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides is arranged opposite the light diffusion surface 319a (see FIG. 17). The light diffusion surfaces 319a and 332e are formed across the top and bottom of each part.

Therefore, the position at which the light from the light emitting means 351 is visible is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a range that spreads vertically (visualized as a strip of light extending vertically). Therefore, as shown in Figures 21 to 23, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes.

The angle of the downward inclination from the horizontal in FIG. 22 (5 degrees) is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be seen. However, because the slide displacement member 370 displaces in the front-to-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the changes caused by the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 from this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 23, when viewed from a direction at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrower, making it more difficult to confirm the change in the flow pattern of the balls at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 compared to the view in Figure 22. However, in this field of view, it is easier to grasp the displacement of the upper protrusion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 332a for placement of the inner member 330 is formed as an opening of a minimum size sufficient to pass the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370 through, so that the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) placed inside the rear frame portion 332 can be hidden so as to be difficult to see.

During an actual jackpot game, multiple balls are guided to the specific winning port 65a during a round of play, and flow down each of the flow path components 334-336 in order. When multiple balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 at the same time, there is a possibility that the line of sight to the ball at the back will be obstructed by the ball at the front.

For example, when multiple spheres are placed in the third flow path configuration portion 336, the spheres are placed in the same position in FIG. 22. Therefore, the sphere in the front hides the sphere in the back.

In addition, when a ball normally flows toward the detection sensor SE12, it flows outward in the left-right direction from the rear end of the third flow path component 336. After it leaves the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction, visibility is reduced due to the light diffusion surface 333b of the front frame portion 333, so it is preferable to grasp the movement of the ball in the process of leaving the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction. However, if there is a ball (a ball that is slightly shifted left-right from the third flow path component 336) that flows from the downstream end position of the second flow path component 335 (position of ball P1) to the upstream end position of the third flow path component 336 (position of ball P2), the ball will hide the ball in the process of leaving the rear end of the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can be grasped by visually checking whether the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left or right outside at the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336, and it is sufficient to pay attention to the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336. In contrast, in this embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path configuration part 336 and the second flow path configuration part 335 on the upstream side in the line of sight, it is configured so that the ball can flow down a path that includes the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336 (movement from the position of ball P1 to the position of ball P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the ball flowing down the upstream side, it may be impossible to grasp whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the spheres flowing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and the spheres flowing through the second flow path component 335 are clearly separated in terms of their vertical arrangement, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the upstream spheres are obscured. On the other hand, because the vertical width of the flow path visible at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrow, the area of the spheres visible in the direction is smaller.

In particular, as described above, the ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 flows diagonally downward to the right regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370, and then the flow path switches to either the flow path toward the special bonus detection sensor SE11 or the flow path toward the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, the area of the ball visible at the switching position is smaller than when the ball flows straight down or the flow direction of the ball switches to the right as the flow path of the ball.

Other possible switching modes include cases where the switching position is located further upstream, such as when the ball's flow path switches between flowing straight down and to the right. For example, if the left and right inner protrusions 318 are not formed and the ball heading toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows straight down from the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336, the switching position will be at least a position behind the center line of the third flow path configuration part 336.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow path component 336, the ball falls below the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336 (falls by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), and in addition to the effect of part of the ball being hidden by the third flow path component 336 itself, the ball is displaced to the left and right outward from the range visible through the third flow path component 336, so that part of the ball is hidden by the front frame portion 333.

As a result, the area visible from the player's point of view of the ball that has passed the rear end of the third flow path component 336 becomes smaller, making it difficult to determine which path the ball has flowed down. This further increases the attention to the ball flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

In this way, according to this embodiment, advantages and disadvantages are set for each of the multiple directional views (see Figures 22 and 23) described as directional views for identifying the flow direction of the balls flowing down the rear end of the third flow path configuration 336. As a result, even when it comes to the way the sorting device 300 is viewed, the player is not required to play in a one-sided manner, but can be allowed to adjust and select the viewing method he or she prefers, and a variety of play styles can be provided, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game.

Ensuring the player's visibility can be achieved in various ways, but in this embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, it is possible to create a state in which the roof portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is removed, making it easier to see the third flow path forming portion 336.

The following describes the visibility in the direction of view in Figures 22 and 23 on the front side of the sorting device 300. Although not shown in Figures 22 and 23, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 (see Figure 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, and the visibility is obstructed because the light transmitted is reduced due to the thickness of the members.

Because the area obstructed by the front design member 162 is narrower, it may be easier to see the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 when viewed in the direction of Figure 23 than when viewed in the direction of Figure 22.

The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are basically flat as described above and are configured to reduce the refraction of light (see FIG. 12). This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the distribution device 300 from being impaired.

Even in areas that cannot be made flat for functional reasons, they are formed to minimize the impact on visibility. For example, the protruding support sections 161c-161e for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 are positioned outside the line of sight of the player looking at the flow path configuration sections 334-336 (upper rear, left and right outer sides, left and right downwards) so as not to block the line of sight of the player looking diagonally downwards.

For example, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed at the center height of the ball and is thin-walled to the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). This prevents the entire ball from being hidden even if the symmetrical protrusion 161f is positioned between the ball and the player's eyes, ensuring visibility of the ball flowing down the flow path configurations 334-336.

Balls that miss the specific winning hole 65a flow down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, and flow down toward the outlet 71. The effect on visibility of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 will be explained below.

Figures 22 and 23 show an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 when the opening and closing plate 65b is open. When the opening and closing plate 65b is open, balls flowing down from above the opening and closing plate 65b land on the opening and closing plate 65b and are guided toward the specific winning port 65a, so balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 are balls that deviate to the left or right of the opening and closing plate 65b. These balls flow down between the extension parts 162b and 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 to flow down toward the outlet 71.

As shown in Figures 22 and 23, from the player's point of view, the position of the balls flowing on the inner rail 61 is lower than each of the flow path components 334-336, making it easier to avoid a reduction in visibility of the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336 due to the balls flowing on the inner rail 61.

On the other hand, the balls flowing down the inner rail 61 flow toward the left-right center of the play area at a gentle angle, just like the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335, so like the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335, it has the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the left-right center of the play area. This effect guides the player's gaze to the outlet 71 as well as to the third flow path component 336. In other words, because the outlet 71 and the third flow path component 336 are in the same left-right position (left-right center position), the player can move their gaze up and down to guide their gaze to a state where both the outlet 71 and the third flow path component 336 are visible.

Therefore, regardless of whether the balls shot toward the play area tend to enter the specific winning port 65a efficiently (meaning fewer wasted balls during a jackpot game) or whether balls frequently stray and flow down between the extensions 162b and 162c (meaning frequent wasted balls during a jackpot game), the flowing balls can have the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the third flow path configuration portion 336.

In other words, if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the player's gaze can be guided to the third flow path component 336 as the ball flows down the second flow path component 335, and if the ball misses the specific winning opening 65a, the player's gaze can be guided to the third flow path component 336 as the ball flows down the inner rail 61.

Balls heading toward the outlet 71 are usually wasted balls and have no effect on the game, but in this embodiment, by configuring it as described above, balls heading toward the outlet 71 can have the role of guiding the player's gaze toward the third flow path configuration section 336.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball may flow along the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and pass through the front side of the second flow path component 335, potentially reducing the visibility of the second flow path component 335.

On the other hand, according to the configuration of this embodiment in which the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a are arranged above the center position of the specific winning opening 65a, and the third flow path component 336 is arranged below the center position of the specific winning opening 65a, the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a can prevent the balls from flowing down, so it is possible to prevent the balls from flowing down the front side of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the visibility of the third flow path component 336 and the area around its rear end is reduced due to balls flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 65b.

In this embodiment, the length of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 ensures the time it takes for a ball that enters the specific winning port 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370, but this avoids the problem of increasing the amount of space required for placement. That is, as shown in Figures 22 and 23, the placement distance between the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370, which serves as a guide for the placement of the third flow path configuration part 336, is made short from the player's line of sight.

Moreover, since the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned below and behind the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), when the player's line of sight is directed diagonally downward and rearward, which is a frequent line of sight as shown in FIG. 23, it appears as if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned so close that its outline is embedded into the outline of the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the flow path of the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a, which is configured to be long from left to right, and passes through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 located at both left and right ends is collected below the center of the specific winning opening 65a via each of the symmetrical flow path components 334-336. This makes it possible to shorten the time it takes for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 compared to when the ball flows left and right down the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, the structure required for the ball's flow path can be made to have a shorter left and right length the further down it is, making it easier to place it near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61.

In particular, in this embodiment, the design concept is to position the specific winning opening 65a close to the outlet 71, and instead of a structure that causes the balls to flow directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path component 335, a structure is adopted in which the balls flow backward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path component 335 through the third flow path component 336, making it possible to form the outlet 71 (an opening disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface portion 387) directly below the second flow path component 335. This shortens the vertical distance between the specific winning opening 65a and the outlet 71.

In this way, by shortening the vertical and horizontal widths of the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 at the player's line of sight, the vertical width of the area occupied by the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 can be shortened in the design of a play area where the size when viewed from the front is limited to a certain standard, thereby improving the design freedom of the play area.

For example, as in this embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a can be positioned near the bottom end of the play area, so that the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in a left-right symmetrical play area.

Next, we will explain the flow of the balls after they enter the distribution device 300, and an example of the operation pattern of the movable parts (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) that takes this flow into account.

First, as a premise, a ball that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 in that order (see Figures 16 and 17). The time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334-336 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, it is designed so that the ball passes through each of the flow path components 334-336 in approximately 0.3 seconds.

In other words, after the ball enters the specific winning port 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow path component 334, 0.3 seconds to pass through the second flow path component 335, and 0.3 seconds to pass through the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, even if a ball enters the specific winning port 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball is configured not to reach the detection sensor SE1 located at the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336 for 0.9 seconds. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, the ball does not approach the position of the slide displacement member 370 and cannot pass through either the special detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, so the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without worrying about the ball entering the prize by mistake.

For this reason, it is possible to eliminate the need for control (which involves unnatural operation of the opening and closing plate) that briefly opens the opening and closing plate at the start of a round R in order to prevent erroneous winning into the V winning sensor, as is commonly seen in pachinko machines equipped with a V-type probability attacker. This makes the operation of the opening and closing plate that opens and closes the specific winning port a natural operation, providing an environment in which players can enjoy playing with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine equipped with the V-type attacker in the above example, a ball that enters the V-type attacker immediately after it is opened is likely to result in an erroneous winning entry, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as described below, a ball that enters the V-type attacker immediately after it is opened can have a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the movement of the slide displacement member 370 with the ball), making it unnecessary to take measures to prevent the ball from entering the V-type attacker immediately after it is opened.

The time required for the ball to pass through can be set arbitrarily depending on the length and inclination of each flow path component 334-336, the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (whether it is smooth or uneven, etc.), etc.

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of ROM 202 in main control device 110, FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the big winning type in the special pattern, and FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal pattern.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above.

The first win random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 2 msec). If the value of the first win random number counter obtained based on the start winning matches any of the determination values specified in the first win random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot with a special symbol.

The first win type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment values of the first win type counter C2 are specified in correspondence with each jackpot type and the type of winning slot that triggered the selection of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is judged to be a jackpot, the value of the first win type counter C2 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the first win type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 1 (drawing based on the ball entering first winning slot 64), the value of first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is associated with jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24(b)).

When a jackpot A1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the first operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in the operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "10 to 19" is associated with the big winning type A2 (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

When jackpot A2 is reached, four rounds of jackpot play are played in the first operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "20 to 39" is associated with the big winning B1 (see 202b3 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot B1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the second operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "40 to 49" is associated with the big winning type B2 (see 202b4 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot B2 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the second operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "50 to 79" is associated with the big winning type C1 (see 202b5 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot C1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in the operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99" is associated with a big winning type C2 (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

When a jackpot C2 is reached, four rounds of jackpot play are played in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

As described above, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special symbol 1 (a drawing based on a ball entering first winning slot 64), a four-round jackpot game is selected in either case. Therefore, a large number of prize balls cannot be expected compared to when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special symbol 2, which will be described later. On the other hand, a four-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than a fifteen-round jackpot game, so balls can be shot earlier in an attempt to win a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 2 (drawing based on the ball entering the second winning slot 140), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 99" is associated with jackpot a (see 202b7 in FIG. 24(b)).

When jackpot a is reached, 15 rounds of jackpot play are played in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

As described above, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special pattern 2 (a drawing based on a ball entering second winning port 140), 15 rounds of jackpot play are selected in either case. Therefore, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special pattern 2, a larger number of prize balls can be paid out compared to if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special pattern 1, and this can increase the motivation of the player to play the game to draw for special pattern 2 (a game in which a ball is fired to enter second winning port 140).

In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to operation pattern X, there is little possibility that the player will be disadvantaged significantly even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern that has the disadvantage of slightly worsening the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 but the advantage of making it easier for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a, by setting the operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 for the jackpot in the lottery for special pattern 2 to the third operation pattern, the impact of the disadvantage can be reduced and only the advantage of being able to shorten the time required for the jackpot game can be highlighted.

In other words, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the jackpot game in the lottery for special pattern 2 will be drawn out, making it possible to realize a jackpot game that is pleasant for the player (good time efficiency in paying out prize balls).

The setting of the jackpot type for special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot type for special symbol 2 may be set in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced and controlled by the operation pattern Y. This jackpot type may also be set at a small rate (for example, about 20%).

This can increase the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370, preventing the player from playing the jackpot game aimlessly. In other words, the player can visually confirm the displacement movement of the slide displacement member 370, and the timing of the displacement movement can make the player happy or sad, increasing the player's interest.

As described above, during the special symbol probability change, the probability of winning the normal symbol increases, the normal symbol fluctuation time becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric device 140a when the normal symbol wins becomes longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it is easier to get the ball into the second winning slot 140, so it is easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once the special symbol probability change state is reached, it is easier to get a special symbol jackpot, and the special symbol probability change state, which is more likely to become a jackpot a (a jackpot with a good profit balance) when a jackpot is reached, is more likely to be repeated, making it easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. This allows the player to play while strongly expecting to move to the special symbol probability change state, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). Also, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referenced to determine whether or not a normal symbol is a winning symbol. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is stipulated for each display mode.

Figure 25 shows the time-based changes in the operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines that a jackpot has been awarded in the special winning determination process, it starts controlling the jackpot game (of the determined type) after the special winning display (pattern changing presentation) has ended. Below, we will explain the operation control of the opening and closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the sliding displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 that is performed when a jackpot game is awarded. Note that in the explanation of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate.

In this control example, the driving mode differs depending on the type of jackpot only in the first round, and the driving mode is the same from the second round onwards. Therefore, the driving mode in the first round for each type of jackpot will be explained below.

In the case of a jackpot A1 or A2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operating pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 0.2 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, causing the opening and closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if game balls are continuously shot, and shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The 0.2 second opening time in the first operating pattern is set to limit the number of balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a to one on either side while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This opening time is set to prevent multiple balls from entering the specific winning opening 65a in succession (hereinafter also referred to as "successive balls entering"), and is not intended to limit the number of balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a to one. In other words, even with an opening time of 0.2 seconds, it is possible that one ball will reach each side of the specific winning opening 65a, and that all balls will enter the specific winning opening 65a at the same time.

In the case of a big win A1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening and closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the drive control is performed so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the front position to the rear position at the same time that the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific winning port 65a passes through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 19), passes in front of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see Figure 20).

At this time, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side is limited to one, so visibility is not reduced by other balls. Therefore, the player can easily see the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the case of a big win A2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening and closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced from the front position to the rear position at the same time that the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state, and after 0.8 seconds has elapsed, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position.

As described above, the time required for the ball to pass through each flow path component 334-336 (see FIG. 17) is set to approximately 0.9 seconds, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370.

Therefore, a ball that enters the specific winning port 65a passes through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 17), passes above the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see Figure 17).

At this time, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side is limited to one, so visibility is not reduced by other balls. Therefore, the player can easily see the situation in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370, 0.8 seconds, is set based on the idea that this is a time shorter than the time it takes for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, and a time longer than the time it takes for the ball to reach the third flow path component 336.

In other words, according to this embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path component 335 and reaches the third flow path component 336 in approximately 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning opening 65a, so even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the 0.2 second opening time of the opening/closing plate 65b, the sliding displacement member 370 can be displaced after the ball reaches the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, as long as a ball enters the specific winning port 65a, the movement of the sliding displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball placed in the third flow path configuration part 336 regardless of the timing of the ball's entry (see FIG. 22). This makes it possible to prevent the displacement movement of the sliding displacement member 370 from being conspicuous, and increases the attention to the ball flowing down each flow path configuration part 334-336 as a ball entering the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused before the ball reaches the third flow path configuration portion 336, so there is little possibility that the ball will block the line of sight, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, because the second flow path forming portion 335 is disposed close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and disposed further forward than the sliding displacement member 370, the player's gaze is likely to be drawn to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335. In other words, by drawing attention to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 (for example, by displaying "Pay attention to the flowing ball!" on the third pattern display device 81), it is possible to easily avoid the player seeing the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370.

In this embodiment, each flow path component 334-336 is configured to be separated in the center from the left to the right, so if the ball enters the specific winning port 65a on one side, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be seen without being blocked by the balls flowing down by focusing on the rear of the third flow path component 336 on the side where no balls are entering (see Figure 22).

In this way, in the case of a jackpot A1 or A2, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side is limited to one, which increases the attention to that ball and allows the player to easily see whether the ball passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of a jackpot B1 or B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operating pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 1.0 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, causing the opening and closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if game balls are continuously shot, and shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The 1.0 second opening time in the second operation pattern is set as the time during which multiple balls can enter the specific winning opening 65a on either the left or right side while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This opening time is set to allow multiple balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a in succession on either the left or right side (hereinafter also referred to as "successive balls entering").

In this control example, the interval between ball launches is set to 0.6 seconds, so even if the interval between balls flowing down does not change from the time of launch, two balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b opens once in 1.0 seconds. On the other hand, because the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, it is possible to restrict the next ball from entering each of the flow path components 334-336 before the two balls have passed each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the case of a jackpot B1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In the case of a jackpot B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot B1, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot B2, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334-336 differs depending on whether there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side or two (or more). When there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, visibility is not reduced by other balls, so the player can easily see the ball passing through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two (or more) balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side, the upstream ball may be placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball, which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. This can improve the attention of players who want to know whether the ball will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the case of a jackpot C1, jackpot C2, or jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the opening and closing plate 65b is made to operate for a long period of time up to the first operating time T1.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In this control example, the opening and closing plate 65b remains open during the first round of play R, so a situation may arise where multiple balls enter the specific winning hole 65a in succession on either the left or right side. On the other hand, the opening interval of the opening and closing plate 65b is not limited, so unlike the second operating pattern, it is possible that the next ball will enter each of the flow path components 334-336 before two balls have passed through each of the flow path components 334-336. Therefore, compared to the second operating pattern, the third operating pattern is more likely to cause a situation in which the visibility of a ball placed downstream of each of the flow path components 334-336 is reduced by a ball placed upstream.

In the case of a jackpot C1 or a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In addition, in the case of a jackpot C2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot C1 or a, the ball that passes through each flow path configuration unit 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot C2, the ball that passes through each flow path configuration unit 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

In this way, the control mode is set to keep the opening and closing plate 65b in the open state regardless of whether the ball is passed through the special detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but because the time it takes for the ball to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is managed structurally, the possibility of the sliding displacement member 370 malfunctioning due to the ball getting caught can be eliminated.

At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334-336 differs depending on whether there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side or whether there are two balls. When there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, the visibility is not reduced by the other balls, so the player can easily see the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side, the upstream ball may be placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball, which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. This can improve the attention of players who want to know whether the ball will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the third operating pattern, there is no restriction on the timing at which a ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of play R, so compared to the second operating pattern, the arrangement of the balls in each flow path component 334-336 is more likely to become disorderly. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is more likely to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which balls can enter the specific winning port 65a has the effect of allowing the progress of the round game R to be carried out early. In other words, it is easier to quickly meet the round end condition (the passage of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the entry of a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) pachinko balls), and it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being drawn out.

In particular, when a jackpot of special symbol 2 is hit, the sliding displacement member 370 is driven and controlled in operation pattern X with a 100% probability, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, it is guaranteed that the ball will pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the sliding displacement member 370 is low to begin with.

Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, but priority is given to avoiding the jackpot game from being prolonged, thereby realizing the progress of the jackpot game in a short period of time and increasing the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Regardless of the type of jackpot, when the first round of round play R ends, the timer means controls the operation of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c to keep the opening and closing plate 65b closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the second round of round play R begins after the first interval time Int1 has elapsed.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b from a closed state to an open state to open the specific winning opening 65a, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time. From the second round onwards, the sliding displacement member 370 is constantly maintained in the front position, so that the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and is discharged (see Figure 17).

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls have won) is met in the second round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

After that, just like the second round, the round games R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) are repeated with a first interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening and closing plate 65b moves between the closed state and the open state to open and close the specific winning hole 65a.

When the final round R of play ends, the timer means controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c to keep the opening and closing plate 65b closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed, and the big win game ends as the time elapses.

In this control example, the short-opening displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are performed only in the first round, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be performed in all rounds, or in rounds other than the first round (e.g., the third round, the eighth round, the twelfth round, etc.).

In this way, according to this control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening and closing plate 65b can be changed by changing the opening pattern (first to third operating patterns) of the opening and closing plate 65b, and the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 located downstream of each of the flow path configurations 334 to 336 and the third flow path configuration 336 can be changed. This can motivate a player who pays attention to the ball passing through the detection sensor SE1 located downstream of the third flow path configuration 336 to devise a way to launch the ball.

For example, a decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur when multiple balls are placed simultaneously in each of the flow path components 334-336, so the decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 can be suppressed by intentionally increasing the interval between ball launches as necessary (for example, in the jackpot type of the second or third operation pattern). Note that in the first operation pattern, balls entering the specific winning hole 65a are restricted, so that a decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 can be avoided regardless of the launch mode.

On the other hand, if the interval between ball launches is increased, the time it takes for the specified number of balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a will be extended, which may result in the round game R becoming protracted. In other words, the player can select how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding protracted play in the round game R.

For example, in order to visually confirm the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, a short period (e.g., 1.0 second) may be allowed to pass after the start of the round game R, allowing the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball is placed in the third flow path component 336 at the timing when the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 occurs (0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R in the case of operation pattern Y), and therefore it is possible to avoid the displacement action of the slide displacement member 370 being blocked by the ball.

On the other hand, if there is a delay before the balls are released, the time it takes for the specified number of balls to enter the specific winning port 65a will be extended, which may result in the round game R being prolonged. In other words, the player can select how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding prolongation of the round game R.

For example, according to this embodiment, each flow path component 334-336 and slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, and balls can be inserted through the specific winning hole 65a from either the left or right side.

In other words, for example, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved by maintaining the above-mentioned launch pattern that widens the interval between ball launches or the launch pattern that allows a delay before the ball is launched when the ball lands on the left side, and launching the ball in any launch pattern when the ball lands on the right side.

Specifically, the balls aimed at the specific winning port 65a can be shot to the left and right in a shooting pattern in which at least the first ball is shot to the right, some balls (for example, the second ball) are shot to the left, and the remaining balls are shot to the right.

In this case, by focusing on the balls flowing down the left flow path rather than on the balls flowing down the right flow path of each flow path component 334-336, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the balls flowing down the left flow path pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 while avoiding having your line of sight blocked by other balls. In addition, in this case, since balls are constantly being shot toward the right side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid an extension of the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, and it is possible to avoid the round game R becoming protracted.

The purpose of shooting the balls left and right is not to limit the number of balls that enter the left flow path to one. In particular, it is sufficient to limit the number of balls placed in each of the left flow path components 334-336 to one during the approximately 0.9 seconds it takes for a certain ball to pass through the left flow path, and during the rest of the time, it is sufficient to shoot the balls so that they enter the left and right flow paths at will.

This makes it possible to prevent balls heading toward the specific winning opening 65a from colliding with each other and spilling to the outside of the specific winning opening 65a to the left or right, even in cases where the open width above the specific winning opening 65a is not long as in this embodiment (for example, when the ball's entry path is limited to a small number of paths due to the arrangement of the electric device 140a or the nail arrangement (see Figure 2)). Note that although the nail arrangement in Figure 2 is asymmetrical, it may also be symmetrical.

Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 that is fastened to the rear side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit that is fastened to the base plate 60 (see Figure 2) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

Figure 26 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and Figure 27 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. Note that in Figure 27, the liquid crystal display device (variable display unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown as being visible through the opening 511a. Also, Figure 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of Figures 26 and 27.

The operating unit 500 includes a rear case 510 formed in a box shape with the front side open from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed to a size that corresponds to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (i.e., capable of dividing the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front).

The rear case 510 is provided as a flat plate extending from the front end of the outer wall 512 along the rear surface of the game board 13 (e.g., arranged parallel to the rear surface), and includes a support plate portion 513 that provides surface support for the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

The support plate portion 513 has a positioning protrusion 513a that protrudes toward the front side and has a shape that can fit into a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a number of insertion holes 513b that are drilled so that fastening screws that are fastened to the base plate 60 can be inserted through them.

The rear case 510 is positioned relative to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60, thereby fixing the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 together, thereby improving the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500.

The shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a protrusion with an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the mating recess of the base plate 60 (circular or oval in this embodiment), or it may be a protrusion with a shape (even smaller outer shape) that increases the mating gap in consideration of workability during assembly. Furthermore, if the inner shape of the mating recess is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a will also be rectangular correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed inside. That is, the operation unit 500 comprises a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 disposed on the inside right part of the rear case 510, a second operation unit 700 disposed on the inside lower part of the rear case 510, and a third operation unit 800 disposed on the inside upper part of the rear case 510. In addition, on the inside left part of the rear case 510, a substrate having light emitting means such as LEDs, and a diffusion decorative plate LB1 disposed to cover the substrate from the front side, formed of a light-transmitting material, and having a light diffusion processing formed over the entire surface are disposed.

Specifically, the first operating unit 600 is disposed to the right of the opening 511a, the second operating unit 700 is disposed below the opening 511a, and the third operating unit 800 is disposed above the opening 511a, all of which are disposed on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510. First, an overview of the operation control of the operating unit 500 will be described.

Figures 28 to 35 are front views of the operating unit 500, showing an example of the operation of the operating unit 500. Figure 28 illustrates each operating unit 600-800 in a performance standby state, Figure 29 illustrates the state in which the first operating unit 600 has changed from the performance standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state, and Figure 30 illustrates the state in which the second operating unit 700 has changed from the performance standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state.

Note that in FIG. 30, the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the surface facing the front of the covering member 787 is different from the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIG. 29.

In Figures 28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is shown in phantom lines. Inside, the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the rear side can be clearly seen, but outside the center frame 86, even though the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin material, the view is likely to be obstructed by the nails arranged on the base plate 60, the various winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., and the through gate 67 (see Figure 2). Therefore, for example, when arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in Figure 28, the visibility of each operating unit 600 to 800 when viewed from the front is likely to be reduced.

The frame shape of the center frame 86 differs from that shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operating unit 500, but its role is the same. In addition, the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 is curved downward on the front side of the third operating unit 800, but it is not curved downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86, but a circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed on the inner frame side of the center frame 86 so as to cover the third operating unit 800 from the front. Therefore, the role of rolling a ball placed on the upper side of the center frame 86 to both the left and right is the same as that shown in FIG. 2, and the upper frame part (upper outer frame part) of the actual center frame 86 is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the third operating unit 800 from left to right.

Figures 31 and 32 show the state in which the third operating unit 800 has changed from the standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state. In Figure 31, the first decorative member 870 faces forward, showing the individual combined state of the third operating unit 800, while in Figure 32, the second decorative member 880 faces forward, showing the combined state of the third operating unit 800.

The displacement that switches between the state of FIG. 31 and the state of FIG. 32 occurs in a displacement mode that combines linear displacement and rotational displacement, so if it is executed when the third operating unit 800 is in a performance standby state, the surrounding decorative members will collide with the decorative members 870 and 880, causing a malfunction, so it is executed when the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

In other words, in this embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state (or in a state in which it has been displaced downward from the performance standby state to an extent sufficient to avoid a collision between the decorative members 870, 880) and is in a state in which the displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is permitted in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), and is then controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) to perform a reverse displacement (switching rotation operation), as will be described in more detail below.

Figure 33 shows the third operating unit 800 in an extended state and the second operating unit 700 in an intermediate performance state displaced slightly lower than the extended state, Figure 34 shows the state in which the first operating unit 600 has displaced from the state in Figure 33 to the intermediate performance state, and Figure 35 shows the state in which the third operating unit 800 has displaced from the state in Figure 33 to a performance standby state and the first operating unit 600 has displaced to the extended state.

28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third operating unit 800 partially overlaps with the displacement trajectory of the first operating unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second operating unit 700 in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), if the first operating unit 600 or the second operating unit 700 changes state from the performance standby state, there is a possibility of a collision.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the standby state is controlled so as to be executable on condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the standby state, and the state change of the third operation unit 800 from the standby state is controlled so as to be executable on condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the standby state, thereby making it possible to prevent the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 from overlapping when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the placement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 (it is possible to allow the front-to-back positions to overlap).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the state change of the second operating unit 700 to the extended state is controlled so as to be executable on the condition that the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and the position of the second operating unit 700 when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state is set to an intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), thereby preventing the second operating unit 700 from overlapping with the other operating units 600, 800 in a front view. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the positioning of each operating unit 600 to 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be tolerated).

In particular, the function of the second operating unit 700 as a performance device is improved by configuring multiple viewing states of the second operating unit 700, including a state in which it is viewed in a protruding state closer to the opening 511a, and a state in which it is viewed in a state in which it is slightly receding from the opening 511a but positioned close to the third operating unit 800.

As shown in Figures 28 to 35, the first operating unit 600 is displaced on the right side of the third pattern display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operating unit 600 has a box-shaped member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the box-shaped member 661 has a first performance surface 661a that faces diagonally left in a performance standby state, a second performance surface 661b formed on the back side of the first performance surface 661a, and a third performance surface 661c that is adjacent to the first performance surface 661a and the second performance surface 661b. Each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, letters, etc.

When the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state for presentation, the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned to the right of the third pattern display device 81, in a location where visibility from the front side is likely to be reduced due to the positioning of the center frame 86. However, the first presentation surface 661a is oriented diagonally toward the player (the surface on the near side is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L side with arrow F-B as the reference), so that visibility of the first presentation surface 661a at the player's line of sight when viewing the second decorative rotating member 660 from inside the frame of the opening between the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86, in a diagonal direction through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81, can be improved.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the second decorative rotating member 660 extends in front of the third pattern display device 81, facing directly toward the player viewing the inside of the center frame 86. In this case, the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented so that the second presentation surface 661b faces directly ahead, improving the visibility of the second presentation surface 661b at the player's line of sight viewing the second decorative rotating member 660.

In this way, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch between the presentation surfaces 661a-661c that are visible to the player depending on its position, and is also configured to be able to switch its posture depending on its position in order to improve the visibility of each presentation surface 661a-661c that is visible to the player.

In other words, it is not limited to a planar change in posture parallel to the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1), but is designed to have an angle change that is intentional in relation to the player's line of sight. That is, the closer to the center of the frame of the center frame 86, the easier it is for the player's line of sight to be in the front-to-back direction and to be directly facing the display surface, so visibility can be improved by having the display surface facing forward (in the direction of arrow F), but on the other hand, the closer to the frame of the center frame 86, the easier it is for the player's line of sight to be at an angle, so visibility can be improved by making the display surface at an angle to be directly facing the line of sight.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the protruding decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction with it. The protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front of the board, and is positioned in the upper right corner of the rear case 510 and hidden from view by the player when the first operating unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see Figure 28) and intermediate performance state (see Figure 34).

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state (see Figure 28), the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned inside the center frame 86 so that it overlaps with the right edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 from the front when viewed from the front, making it visible to the player.

In this state, the right edge of the exterior shape of the protruding decorative portion 652b is located to the right of the right edge of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by utilizing the decoration on the front side of the board of the protruding decorative portion 652b, a display effect can be created that gives the player the illusion that the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is expanding.

In more detail, the right edge of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible is defined by the first operating unit 600, and when the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state, the left edge of the first performance surface 661a of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the right end RE1 of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible roughly coincide with each other.

In contrast, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the protruding decorative part 652b is positioned so that it extends beyond the right end RE1 of the area to the right. Therefore, by relating or matching the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the decoration on the front of the board of the protruding decorative part 652b, the player can visually perceive as if the display area of the third pattern display device 81 has expanded beyond the right end RE1 of the area. This makes it possible to realize an unexpected presentation.

Examples of matching the above-mentioned display and decoration include, for example, displaying polka dots on the third pattern display device 81 and decorating the front of the plate of the protruding decorative section 652b with a similar polka dot pattern, or writing a certain number on the front of the plate of the protruding decorative section 652b in the same font as the number displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, the number to notify the winner of a lottery).

Examples of associating the above-mentioned display with decoration include, for example, a case in which six of the seven colors that make up the rainbow are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the front plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is colored with the remaining color, or a case in which a wooden stick is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with its right end aligned with the right edge of the area RE1 and the front plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with a flame-like decoration, thereby evoking the image of a fire when the first operating unit 600 is in the protruding state.

The presentation mode of the overhang decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type, and multiple types of presentation modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the overhang decorative portion 652b. The light-emitting means for changing the brightness of the overhang decorative portion 652b will be described later.

In addition, by arranging a small liquid crystal device with a display surface on the front side instead of the protruding decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in multiple types, thereby avoiding restrictions on the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when the display area is expanded beyond the right end RE1 of the area.

The object associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to a display, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on a member of the second operating unit 700 (e.g., covering member 787), or the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (decoration of the first covering portion 875, decoration of the second covering portion 885) formed on a member of the third operating unit 800 (e.g., first decorative member 870, second decorative member 880).

Figure 36 is a front perspective view of the first action unit 600, and Figure 37 is a rear perspective view of the first action unit 600. The first action unit 600 is configured in a complex displacement manner in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the protruding decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is displaced relative to the second decorative rotating member 660, allowing the player to visually see the different appearances before and after the displacement.

Figure 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600.

As shown in Figures 38 and 39, the first operating unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 fastened to the rear case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, a drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, a supported member 640 having one end rotatably supported on the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, a first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably arranged on the other end of the supported member 640, a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650, and a decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610.

The fixing means 610 includes a base member 611 arranged facing the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 from the front to the rear, and a front cover member 612 arranged on the front side of the base member 611 and fastened to the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 and the front cover member 612.

The front cover member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, a support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 on the inside of the fixing portion 614, and a guide long hole 616 formed as a long hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640.

The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape that is a mixture of straight and curved sections, the details and function of which will be described later.

The rotating member 620 includes a main body 621 formed in a long plate shape, a cylindrical portion 622 disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 and fitted and supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610, a transmission long hole 623 formed in the middle of the main body 621 as a long hole extending in a linear direction, a circular through hole 624 drilled as a circular hole in the drilling direction parallel to the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 622 at the other end (upper end) of the main body 621, and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured so that one arm abuts against the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm abuts against a protruding piece of the front cover member 612, and is configured to generate a biasing force in a direction that raises the rotating member 620 (clockwise when viewed from the front).

When the cylindrical portion 622 is supported, the support fastening portion 615 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 622, and a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread portion formed at the tip of the support fastening portion 615. This allows the rotating member 620 to be supported by the support fastening portion 615 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission long hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed, as will be described in detail later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding to the rear side through a through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, a transmission gear 633 journaled on the cylindrical portion 613b of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam 634 journaled on the cylindrical portion 613c of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633.

When the cylindrical parts 613b, 613c are inserted through the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, fastening screws are screwed into the female threads formed at the tips of the cylindrical parts 613b, 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are axially supported on the front cover member 612 so that they cannot fall off.

The front cover member 612 is formed with an arc-shaped hole 613d that penetrates along an arc centered on the tubular portion 613c, and a cylindrical portion 634a that protrudes cylindrically from the front side at an eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member having a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and has the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 634a and an extension portion 634b that extends in a plate shape in the outer diameter direction from an angular position that includes the cylindrical portion 634a.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d, and its front side is inserted into the transmission slot 623 of the rotating member 620. Here, the width length of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission slot 623 is designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. This makes it possible to reduce the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides through the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission slot 623.

The extension portion 634b is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the photocoupler type detection sensor KS1, which is fastened and fixed to the front cover member 612. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) to grasp the position of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading the change in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes a long main body 641, a tubular portion 642 protruding from the rear side of the main body 641 with a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, a tubular portion 643 protruding parallel to the tubular portion 642, an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to be able to mesh with the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being supported by the tubular portion 643, a bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large-diameter tube with a perforated bottom on the rear side of the intermediate gear 644, and an extended support portion 646 extended toward the front side at the end opposite the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is located.

The above-mentioned configuration allows for the transmission of driving force through meshing between the gear teeth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 in response to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

When the cylindrical parts 642, 643 are inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, fastening screws are screwed into the female threads formed at the tips of the cylindrical parts 642, 643. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are axially supported on the main body part 641 of the supported member 640 so that they cannot fall off.

The bottomed tubular portion 645 has a rear side of the bottom disposed close to the front edge of the front cover member 612, and is provided with an opening 645a formed in the peripheral surface so that the intermediate gear 644 can mesh with the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 on the front side of the bottom, and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circle centered on the tubular center and through which the cylindrical support portion 651a can be inserted. Details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotating member 660, and will be described in detail later.

The first decorative rotating member 650 includes a main body member 651 that forms an orthogonal rotation axis, a front rotating member 652 that is supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, an electric decoration board 653 that is fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b of the front rotating member 652 and has a light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side, a rear rotating member 654 that is coaxial with the front rotating member 652 and fastened to the rear side, a wiring receiving member 655 that is fastened to the main body member 651 from the front side and forms a cylindrical space for wiring, a front decorative portion 656 that is arranged on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and fastened by screwing in a fastening screw that is inserted into the main body member 651 from the back side, and an axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 that is supported on the outside of the cylindrical portion formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

The main body member 651 has a cylindrical support portion 651a that extends cylindrically from the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female threads 651b formed at the diameter position of the tip, and has a notch portion 651c that is cut out so as to reduce the wall portion on one side of a plane that passes through the female threads 651b.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the cutout portion 651c functions as an opening to secure an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is inserted, in order from the base end, through the center hole of the front rotating member 652, the center hole of the rear rotating member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and the guide elongated hole 616 of the front cover member 612, and is fastened and fixed by threading a fastening screw inserted into the dish-shaped cover portion C2 into the female threaded portion 651b at the tip.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 are supported coaxially on the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction, and are configured to be displaceable along the guide elongated hole 616.

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 has an opening C2a formed in part of its circumference, and in the assembled state, this opening C2a is positioned opposite the notch portion 651c of the main body member 651, forming a path for electrical wiring.

Some of this electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided into the inside of the second decorative rotating member 660, where the terminals are connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board 662. The remaining wiring passes through the gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (the gap formed on the upper side, i.e., the side that faces the main body member 651 on the upper and lower opposite sides of the semi-cylindrical portion 655a), and is guided to the back of the protruding decorative portion 652b, where the terminals are connected to the connector on the illumination board 653.

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear end, and these gear teeth 654a are formed so that they can mesh with the intermediate gear 644. Note that the gear teeth 654a are formed along a portion of the circumference, rather than along the entire circumference, in a position sufficient for the operation described below.

The front rotating member 652 has gear teeth 652a formed as a bevel gear and a protruding decorative part 652b that protrudes radially outward. An illumination board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the protruding decorative part 652b, and light from a light-emitting means arranged on the illumination board 653 can be used to light up or flash the protruding decorative part 652b.

The front rotating member 652 is fastened to the rear rotating member 654, so that the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate together.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported on a circular cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portion 651d of the main body member 651 and the semi-cylindrical portion 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and has gear teeth 657a formed as a bevel gear that can mesh with the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652. That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked, but the details of their operation will be described later. Note that the gear teeth 652a, 657a are formed along a portion of the circumference, rather than along the entire circumference, in an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

The second decorative rotating member 660 comprises a box-shaped member 661 fastened to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, an electric decoration board 662 fastened to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a wiring retaining plate 663 disposed between the box-shaped member 661 and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and fastened to the tip of the semi-cylindrical portion 651d, 655a.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 662 also undergoes a rotational displacement in conjunction with the rotation of the box-shaped member 661 described below. This may cause the electrical wiring passing between the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a to become twisted or disorganized when being guided into the connector of the illumination board 662. However, the function of the wiring retaining plate 663, which has a through hole for temporarily retaining the wiring, is to prevent the wiring from becoming twisted or disorganized.

In this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the illumination board 662, it is unavoidable that the electrical wiring will become twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not generated by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that reverses at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, so it is possible to avoid excessive strain on the electrical wiring or the electrical wiring becoming twisted and broken.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis (the rotation axis formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a) that is parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side having the longest side.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so that it cannot fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. The second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, so that the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from coming off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The illuminated board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the board coincides with the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661. On the thickness-wise side of the illuminated board 662, the first performance surface 661a is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the front side and whose optical axis faces in the thickness direction, the second performance surface 661b is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the back side and whose optical axis faces in the thickness direction, and the third performance surface 661c is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second performance surface 661b) and whose optical axis faces in the width direction.

In this way, the light emitting means arranged on the illumination board 662 functions to individually illuminate each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c, but since the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c is arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second performance surface 661b), when the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c (the surface facing upwards) is illuminated in a state in which the second performance surface 661b is positioned on the front side (the extended state of the first operating unit 600), the second performance surface 661b can be illuminated by light that travels at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

In other words, unlike when LEDs are placed behind the illumination board 662, the light can be prevented from being hidden by the illumination board 662, so the light illuminating the third performance surface 661c can also illuminate the second performance surface 661b. This makes it possible to increase the variety of performance patterns that illuminate the second performance surface 661b, and improve the brightness of the second performance surface 661b during a light-emitting performance.

The decorative fixing member 670 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and has decorative letters and figures formed thereon so that they can be seen by the player, and is equipped with an illuminated board 671 that shines light diagonally forward and to the left from its back side. The decorative fixing member 670 is fixedly positioned on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player's line of sight towards the decorative fixing member 670 is always tilted diagonally to the right. In other words, by tilting the direction of the light emitted from the illuminated board 671 to the left, the light can be illuminated on the side where the player's eyes are likely to be located.

The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge and a right edge that are raised toward the rear side, and a front-to-rear gap is formed between the upper edge and the left edge and the front cover member 612. This front-to-rear gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 passes when tilting and displacing.

Figure 40 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in a standby state, Figure 41 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in a standby state, and Figure 42 is a side view of the first operating unit 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in Figure 40. Note that the base member 611 (see Figure 38) and fastening screws are omitted from the illustration to make it easier to understand the shape.

In the standby state for performance, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (e.g. parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to displace while sliding along the transmission long hole 623. In other words, when the displacement starts, there is no assistance from inertia compared to during the displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to be large, but by configuring to reduce the displacement resistance as in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 when the displacement starts.

The same is also true for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see FIG. 45). That is, in this embodiment, the displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (i.e., the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed so that the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a arranged in the transmission long hole 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the position for the performance waiting state and the position for the extended state) is along (e.g., parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 when the rotating member 620 starts to displace from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with each other from both sides of the intermediate gear 644. In this embodiment, the radius R1 of the gear teeth 625 and the radius R2 of the gear teeth 654a are designed to be the same length, so the rotation angle of the gear teeth 625 relative to the intermediate gear 644 and the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 relative to the intermediate gear 644 are the same.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 can be configured to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 mesh with the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is transmitted to the second decorative rotating member 660, which is perpendicular to the rotation axis.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652. In other words, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are configured to be the same (gear ratio is 1), so the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operating unit 600 from the standby state will be explained in chronological order. Figure 43 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate state, and Figure 44 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate state. Figure 45 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state, and Figure 46 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state. Note that the base member 611 and fastening screws are omitted from the illustration to make the shape easier to understand.

Between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees, and between the intermediate performance state and the extended state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 26 degrees.

In the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented so that the narrow third performance surface 661c faces the front. In the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second performance surface 661b is configured to face the front (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide slot 616 has a straight portion 616a formed on a straight line extending vertically from the upper end, and a curved portion 616b connected to the lower end of the straight portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape).

When the first operating unit 600 is in the intermediate performance state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end of the straight section 616a, i.e., at the connection between the straight section 616a and the curved section 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end of the curved section 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of axis O1 between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state is a linear displacement along the straight line portion 616a, and the displacement of axis O1 between the intermediate performance state and the extended state is a curved displacement along the curved line portion 616b.

The first operating unit 600 is configured to be able to change state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is arranged on the base end side of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving a driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 are driven by the displacement of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, without any countermeasures, the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616 may cause a large displacement resistance between the guide slot 616 and the rotating member 620. However, in this embodiment, this is suppressed by configuring the guide slot 616 so that its longitudinal direction is aligned with the displacement direction of the rotating member 620.

For example, the displacement of the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state (Figure 41) is a displacement that tilts downward, and the guide long hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Also, for example, the displacement of the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the extended state (see Figure 46) is a displacement that rises diagonally upward to the right, and the guide long hole 616 is also formed to extend diagonally upward to the right.

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616, it is possible to suppress the displacement resistance of the portion (and axis O1) that displaces inside the guide slot 616.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram showing the displacement amount and displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 48(a) and FIG. 48(b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the rotating member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. Note that the positive and negative values are shown as positive downward displacement amounts and negative upward displacement amounts, and in FIG. 48(b), the values in FIG. 48(a) are shown as bar graphs.

In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support positions of the supported member 640 as the rotating member 620 rotates is illustrated at 10 degree intervals as the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and the rotating member 620 in the extended state of the first operating unit 600 is illustrated in solid lines.

In FIG. 47, the angle θ is illustrated as the angle between the line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and the line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622.

The guide elongated hole 616 functions as a long hole that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is caused by the displacement of the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640, which is connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620. Therefore, hereinafter, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the driving side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

The outline of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 is explained below. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 occurs as a result of the sum of the vertical displacement of the rotating tip (the driving side of the supported member 640) caused by the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 caused by the posture change of the supported member 640.

In the performance standby state, the supported member 640 is in a vertical position, and the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction (the position of the rotating arm is within a range of 45 degrees left and right from the vertical). In other words, the conditions for the displacement in the up-down direction to be small are met in two ways.

In the extended state, both of these are reversed, and the conditions for large vertical displacement are doubled. Therefore, the configuration is prone to a situation where the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and high at the end of the downward displacement.

Next, the details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the extended state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, if the guide slot 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may fall with force. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate performance state (a midway position of the tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

In this embodiment, the guide slot 616 is shaped so that a curved section 616b is combined below a straight section 616a. This increases the displacement resistance on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced down the straight section 616a due to its own weight and enters the curved section 616b. This makes it easier to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from falling too fast beyond the position in the intermediate performance state.

The displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the linear portion 616a will be explained. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the driven side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the performance standby state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is located to the right of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate performance state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is located to the left of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 tilts and displaces without changing direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces back and forth in the vertical direction.

This allows the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 to be kept small compared to the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the linear portion 616a, the supported member 640 appears to the player as if it is rotating around the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, a sliding displacement in the left-right direction can be generated by utilizing the run-up caused by the rotational displacement centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, so the load required for the displacement can be kept low compared to when the entire supported member 640 is caused to slide in the left-right direction from the start of the displacement. Therefore, the load required when the supported member 640 starts to operate can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be lowered. This allows the cost of the drive motor 631 to be reduced.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is kept small, the displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured in association with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and the rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 based on the driving part of the supported member 640 is maintained counterclockwise when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the direction of the change in posture of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 are maintained without being switched (reversed).

This makes it possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are moving back and forth (returning), and allows the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 to be a forceful displacement.

Even in a situation where the displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the driving part of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component and is a displacement in the direction along the direction of gravity (downward), so the load required to start displacing the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be lowered. This allows the cost of the drive motor 631 to be reduced.

The action caused by the curved portion 616b will now be described. The state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned at the connection between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned at the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angle width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG. 48.

First, as a premise, there is no need to use curved portions in the guide slot 616. In other words, the guide slot 616 may be configured with only straight portions, regardless of whether or not it uses any bending portions to increase the displacement resistance in the intermediate performance state as described above.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the curved portion 616b is deliberately used to prevent the speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This is explained below.

Whether guided by the straight portion 616a or the curved portion 616b, when the driven side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 displaces downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces downward.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, the curved portion 616b is formed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided to be displaced in a direction (rightward) opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driving side of the supported member 640, and the curved portion 616b is formed in the lower half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided to be displaced in a direction (leftward) that follows the displacement direction (leftward) of the driving side of the supported member 640.

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 becomes large (at the start of tilting), the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung left and right, ensuring a high displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640.

This makes it possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the displacement end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced up and down along an arbitrary path from a specific initial position to a terminal position, if the time required for displacement is the same, the result of integrating the speed in the up and down direction will be the same, so if the displacement starts slowly, the displacement speed will increase towards the end.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 47 for comparison, the displacement speed gradually increases from the start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, and reaches a maximum at the displacement end (displacement bottom end) of the supported member 640. In other words, compared to the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide long hole 616 during the period when the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the displacement bottom end, the vertical displacement amount UE1 of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period is larger.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis line OE1, the driven side of the supported member 640 may bounce back, which may adversely affect the performance of the first operating unit 600 if the performance is to stop the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by adopting a curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is also allocated to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, thereby making the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 uniform.

In this case, uniformity does not only mean making the speed uniform over the entire range of displacement, but also includes limiting the range of speed. In particular, in this embodiment, during tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases at the start of entry into the curved portion 616b, and the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually decreases after entry into the lower half of the curved portion 616b begins.

In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the supported member 640 from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved section 616b, i.e., the amount of displacement required per unit time, the amount of displacement required to lift the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time at the start of driving when the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised up), can be reduced, thereby reducing the burden on the drive motor 631.

Next, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described with reference to Figure 49. Figure 49 is a schematic diagram showing the change in angle θ [degrees] accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620.

The angle θ can be regarded as the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 around the circular through hole 624, and is directly linked to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. In other words, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is determined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

In this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth 652a and the gear tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are both set to 1. Therefore, the angle θ and the rotation angle with the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are the same, and therefore the change in the angle θ can be understood as a change in the posture of the second decorative rotating member 660.

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the standby state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 44), and 90 degrees from the intermediate state of the first operating unit 600 to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 46).

When in the standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a position where the first performance surface 661a is tilted 45 degrees to the left (the third performance surface 661c is tilted 45 degrees to the right), so that as the angle θ changes and the state is switched between the intermediate performance state and the extended state in sequence, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third performance surface 661c faces the front (see Figure 43), and then the second performance surface 661b faces the front (see Figure 45).

The setting of the angle θ is achieved by designing the guide elongated hole 616 to determine the position of the supported member 640. In other words, in this embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the position of the second decorative rotating member 660 according to the angle θ.

As a result, even if the detection sensor KS1 is only a sensor that detects the position of the rotating member 620, as in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 based on the output of the detection sensor KS1.

In other words, if the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state (see Figure 41), and the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 and the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 from that state.

Here, the amount of change in angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when determining the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not sufficient to obtain a numerical value by proportional calculation from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631. This also makes it possible to avoid the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 being constant even when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed. This will be explained below.

The change in angle θ is roughly the same as the change in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. That is, compared to the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees), the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state is roughly larger (approximately 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned in the upper half of the curved section 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved section 616b, and eventually becomes lower than the level of the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (reduced to about 7 degrees).

In this way, by configuring the angle θ relative to the rotation of the rotating member 620 per unit angle to vary, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be similarly configured to vary. That is, in a range where the value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be small, making it easier to maintain its posture, while in a range where the value of the angle θ is large, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be large, making it easier to quickly change the surface facing the player (presentation surfaces 661a to 661c).

The above-mentioned configuration allows the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 to be accelerated or accelerated. As described above, the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 simultaneously involves a change in position and posture associated with the displacement of the supported member 640, and a rotational displacement about the rotation axis formed at the center of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement around the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a becomes noticeably large when the driven side of the supported member 640 moves from the straight portion 616a of the guide slot 616 into the curved portion 616b.

In other words, during tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate performance state is reached, and even if the second decorative rotating member 660 moves up and down (bounces back) slightly from the position on the driven side of the supported member 640 in the intermediate performance state, the second decorative rotating member 660 can be maintained in a state in which the third performance surface 661c faces the front side (see Figure 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate performance state, the rotational speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases when the rotating member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the change in posture in the rotational direction is clearly visible. In other words, the player can visually see that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantly rotating and displaced.

In this embodiment, since the second presentation surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 faces the front side at the rotation end (lower displacement end) of the rotating member 620 and is viewed as a single unit when positioned closely adjacent to the decorative fixing member 670 (see Figure 28), it is desirable to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from bouncing back upward when the rotating member 620 is positioned at the lower displacement end.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 as described above, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform, so that it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive when the rotating member 620 is positioned at the lower displacement end, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the arrangement of the central portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (e.g., the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643) is configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615, which serves as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation tip of the rotating member 620 from becoming unruly due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660, which are supported on the rotation tip side of the rotating member 620, and stabilizes the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

In addition, the lower half of the curved section 616b is configured to suitably impede displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower displacement end of the rotating member 620 in the direction of bouncing back (upper left direction) around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620. That is, the lower half of the curved section 616b has a short side direction that slopes upward and left, and since it is possible to suppress displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction, it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In other words, in this embodiment, the direction of displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in response to the displacement of the driving side of the supported member 640 is different from the direction of displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driving side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of its displacement.

If there was no guide, the former would be expected to displace downward and left along the displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 (the rotation direction of the rotating member 620); however, in this embodiment, by being guided by the long guide hole 616, it is slightly deflected left and right in the direction along the long guide hole 616 and displaces downward.

On the other hand, the latter is a circular orbit centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, so the displacement direction is not along the guide elongated hole 616 but along the short direction of the guide elongated hole 616. This makes it possible to suppress the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 and prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

The following describes the characteristics of the displacement of the pivoting member 620 in the rising direction. When the first operating unit 600 changes state from the extended state to the performance standby state, the pivoting member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 (i.e., the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) is mainly used to raise and displace the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660 arranged on the supported member 640, and to rotate the second decorative rotating member 660.

In other words, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660, the less load is required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

As shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, the angle θ proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is designed to be at a minimum value when the rotating member 620 starts to rotate from the extended state of the first operating unit 600. This makes it possible to reduce the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

At the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660, which is centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640, is positioned in a position that is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 (facing in the vertical direction).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as the inertial force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be generated as a load in which the rotating member 620 is twisted around the longitudinal axis, and the rotating member 620 can withstand this load with only slight localized elastic displacement by distributing it in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to when the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in a front view, it is easier to avoid a situation in which the rotating member 620 breaks. In addition, excessive elastic deformation of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front cover member 612, and the front cover member 612 can be configured to withstand loads that the rotating member 620 cannot withstand by elastically deforming, thereby preventing damage to the rotating member 620.

The displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b will be explained. The overhanging decorative part 652b is a member that rotates and displaces around the axis O1, and its rotation angle corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even if the change in position of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when changing from a performance standby state to an overhanging state, the overhanging decorative part 652b will rotate if the angle θ changes.

The change in angle θ from the performance standby state to the protruding state is approximately 135 degrees, and the protruding decorative part 652b rotates approximately 45 degrees. Here, when the protruding decorative part 652b rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise from the performance standby state, it feels like it will collide with the other operating units 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see Figure 28). However, in this embodiment, the supported member 640, which is the basis for the rotation of the protruding decorative part 652b, itself changes its posture in a manner that rotates clockwise, so it is possible to avoid collision with the other operating units 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members).

In other words, by configuring the protruding decorative portion 652b to be displaceable based on the supported member 640, the space required for the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, if the overhanging decorative part 652b is a part that is fixedly positioned based on the supported member 640 when the first operating unit 600 is in the overhanging state, when the supported member 640 changes from its overhanging state position to its performance standby state position, the overhanging decorative part 652b may overhang to the upper left of the supported member 640, potentially causing a negative effect on the performance, such as colliding with another operating unit 800 or partially obscuring the overhang display on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protruding decorative part 652b rotates and displaces in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the driving side of the supported member 640, based on the driven side of the supported member 640, so that when the supported member 640 protrudes toward the third pattern display device 81, it protrudes in tandem, and when the supported member 640 displaces to the side retreating from the third pattern display device 81, it retracts in tandem. Therefore, the position of the protruding decorative part 652b in the retracted state can be formed on the side away from the third pattern display device 81.

The rotation angle of the protruding decorative portion 652b relative to the supported member 640 from the player's point of view can be calculated from the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640. In other words, it is 45 degrees, which is the difference between the change in angle θ of approximately 135 degrees and the change in posture angle of the supported member 640 of approximately 90 degrees.

In this embodiment, the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be equal regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into angles a1, a2 below the horizontal line and angles b1, b2 above the horizontal line, the difference between the angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640 is calculated as ((a1+b1)-(a2+b2))-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the protruding decorative part 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when the rotating member 620 is rotated and displaced at a constant angular velocity, the angular velocity of rotation of the protruding decorative part 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is constant, even though the displacement speed of the supported member 640 is not constant.

This allows the player to visually perceive the protruding decorative portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 as if it were being driven at a constant angular velocity by a drive means other than the drive motor 631 that drives the rotating member 620.

By configuring it in this way, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b relative to the supported member 640 can be made to appear, from the player's point of view, as if there were sections of sliding movement and sections of rotational movement, and the displacement mode of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode, as if it were not mechanical.

This effect can be achieved by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 into separate sections where the posture change is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, and sections where the posture change is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. In other words, the protruding decorative portion 652b rotates relative to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and from the player's point of view, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b is influenced by the side that is dominant as the displacement of the supported member 640.

Therefore, in sections where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the protruding decorative part 652b can be visually perceived as undergoing a rotational displacement, and in sections where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the protruding decorative part 652b can be visually perceived as undergoing a sliding displacement.

As described above, the rotating member 620 can be rotated to form a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, and an extended state, and although a case has been described in which it is displaced from one displacement end point to the other displacement end point, the drive direction may be switched so that it is displaced in the opposite direction at a midpoint in the displacement range.

For example, after rotating the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state, the drive direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to control the rotation to return to the performance standby state. In this case, since the rotating member 620 needs to be stopped midway down, it may be necessary to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in order to ensure an accurate stopping position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) tends to increase near the intermediate performance state compared to the performance standby state. As described above, the magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660.

Therefore, near the intermediate performance state where the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, a larger portion of the driving force is allocated to the second decorative rotating member 660, and therefore the portion allocated to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 can be relatively reduced, automatically suppressing the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

In other words, as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, making it easier to stop the rotating member 620 near the intermediate performance state without having to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in advance.

Next, the second operating unit 700 will be described. The second operating unit 700 is an operating unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and its states are mainly switched between a performance standby state (see FIG. 28) in which it retreats below the opening 511a to ensure the field of view of the player looking at the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 28), a protruding state (see FIG. 30) in which it is positioned in front of the third pattern display device 81 and attracts attention, and an intermediate performance state (see FIG. 35) that is a state between the two.

Figure 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700, and Figure 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700. In Figures 50 and 51, the peripheral components of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are mainly shown in an exploded state, and the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is shown in a non-exploded state.

As shown in Figures 50 and 51, the second operating unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened to the lower right corner of the rear case 510, a pivoting arm member 720 disposed between the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510 and pivotable about the cylindrical protrusion 511b of the rear case 510, a drive transmission device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the pivoting arm member 720, and a lifting plate member 740 to which the tip of the pivoting arm member 720 is guidably connected and which is configured to be capable of being lifted and lowered. The lifting/lowering plate member 740 is provided with a left rear plate member 750 fastened to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the rear side thereof, a set of front support members 760 that are configured as a left-right pair and fastened to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750, a blind decorative member 768 that is fastened to the rear case 510 on the front side of the metal rod 702, and a lifting/lowering reversal performance device 770 that is configured to be displaceable in a manner that combines lifting/lowering displacement and forward/rearward displacement on the lifting/lowering plate member 740 and the front support member 760.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support part 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, a gap forming part 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge and forms a gap between the rear case 510, a plurality of detection sensors 713 (three in this embodiment) that are arranged to detect the position of the detection part 735 of the drive transmission device 730, a front upper inclined part 714 that is inclined in a manner that the further it goes upward at the front side of the left side and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder part 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a plurality of fastening parts 718 that form female threaded parts into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The detection sensors 713 are multiple photocoupler type sensors that are spaced apart so that the detection grooves are positioned at positions where the detectable parts 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 is arranged to match the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for performance, the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state, and the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch its output depending on whether the second operating unit 700 is in a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, or an extended state, and the audio lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operating unit 700 from the output result.

The pivot arm member 720 is supported by a cylindrical protrusion 511b that protrudes cylindrically from the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 to the front side, and is formed as a long plate in a L-shape when viewed from the front. The support tube 722 protrudes cylindrically backward from the bent part of the main body 721, and has an inner peripheral shape formed to a size that allows the cylindrical protrusion 511b to be inserted therethrough. The long hole 723 is formed in the long hole shape at the right end of the main body 721, and the left end of the main body 721 is formed in the long hole shape. It is provided with a cylindrical fastening portion 724 that protrudes cylindrically toward the front (in a direction parallel to the protruding direction of the cylindrical protrusion 711a) and has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, a cylindrical fastening portion 725 that protrudes cylindrically toward the rear at an intermediate position between the cylindrical fastening portion 724 and the support tube portion 722 and has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, and a torsion spring SP2 that is wrapped around the support tube portion 722 and applies a biasing force to the main body portion 721 in an upward direction (in a direction lifting the left side) between the rear case 510.

A step is formed on the left side of the main body 721 so that it is shifted toward the front side compared to the base end side of the support tube 722, and the support plate 701 is disposed in the gap formed on the rear side by the step.

The support plate 701 is a plate-like part that is fastened to the bottom wall part 511 of the rear case 510, and has an arc-shaped long hole part 701a that is drilled so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastening part 725. A fastening screw is inserted through the long hole part 701a with a ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched therebetween, and is screwed into the cylindrical fastening part 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is supported on the support plate 701 via the cylindrical fastening part 725 so as not to fall off.

The support plate 701 is fastened to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, so that the left side of the pivot arm member 720 is restricted from moving away from the rear case 510 toward the front side. This prevents the pivot arm member 720 from being displaced toward the front side due to a load applied to the left side of the pivot arm member 720, so that the displacement of the pivot arm member 720 can be stably supported.

The right side of the main body 721 is disposed in the gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712. In other words, the forward/rearward displacement of the right side of the main body 721 is restricted by the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The long hole portion 723 is formed in a shape in which a straight line passing through the center of the width and extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support tube portion 722. Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, the component of the load in the rotation direction of the pivot arm member 720 is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force through the long hole portion 723 of the pivot arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed from the front side to the right front plate member 710, a drive gear 732 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 731, a transmission gear 733 meshed with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshed with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are each supported by a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 711a that protrude cylindrically from the back side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusions 711a, and fastening screws that are inserted into the shaft holes of the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 can be screwed in. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are supported by the cylindrical protrusions 711a so that they cannot fall off.

The transmission support part 711 includes the cylindrical protrusion 711a described above and an arc-shaped hole 711b that is drilled in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical protrusion 711a that supports the gear cam member 734.

The gear cam member 734 includes a detectable portion 735 that protrudes toward the front side in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft portion and is formed so as to be insertable into the arc hole 711b, an extension portion 736 that extends to have a longer diameter than the gear portion, and a cylindrical protrusion portion 736a that protrudes cylindrically from the tip of the extension portion 736 toward the rear side.

The detected portion 735 is formed so that it can be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and is configured as a part that enables the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) to detect the position of the gear cam member 734 based on the output from the detection sensor 713.

The cylindrical protrusion 736a is formed so that it can be inserted into the long hole 723 of the pivot arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is transmitted to the pivot arm member 720 via the long hole 723.

A female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusion 736a, and a fastening screw that is inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed in. When this fastening screw is screwed in and fixed, the pivot arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical protrusion 736a in an undetachable manner.

The lift plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down in response to the rotation of the pivot arm member 720, and is equipped with a guided member 741 that is arranged on the left end side and guided in the up and down direction, and a horizontally elongated member 742 that is fastened and fixed to the lower end side of the guided member 741 and is long in the left and right directions.

The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal rod 702, which is fixed to the rear case 510 with its longitudinal direction aligned vertically, can be inserted therethrough, allowing for vertical displacement along the metal rod 702. The tips of the protrusions protruding from both the left and right sides of the guided member 741 toward the rear side come into contact with the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741 and stabilizing the position of the guided member 741.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontally elongated member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is also stabilized.

The horizontal member 742 includes a long hole 743 that is drilled in the shape of a long oval with a vertical width that allows the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the pivoting arm member 720 to be inserted, a cylindrical portion 744 that protrudes cylindrically toward the front side above the long hole 743, and a pair of guide portions 745 that are disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant to the left and right of the cylindrical portion 744.

The fastening screw, which is inserted through the long hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched therebetween, is screwed into the cylindrical fastening portion 724, so that the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720 via the cylindrical fastening portion 724 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion through which the insertion tube portion 773 of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is inserted, and which supports the lifting/reversing performance device 770 in a state in which the lifting/reversing performance device 770 can be displaced forward and backward. In other words, the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is not fixed to the lifting/reversing plate member 740, but is disposed on the front side of the lifting/reversing plate member 740 in a manner in which the lifting/reversing performance device 770 can be displaced forward and backward based on the lifting/reversing plate member 740.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wrap around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion tube portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction that pulls the lift plate member 740 and the lift reversal performance device 770 apart.

The guide portion 745 is made up of a pair of left and right guide portions, and includes a long plate portion 745a extending from front to back, and a rotating cylinder portion 745b rotatably supported on a pair of front and rear shaft portions that protrude outwardly to the left and right from the plate portion 745a.

The rotating cylinder section 745b rotates when the above-mentioned lifting/reversing performance device 770 moves forward and backward, and functions as a part that guides the forward and backward movement, but details will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750, like the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, has a front upper inclined portion 751 formed on the front side of the right side in a manner that the further upward it approaches the front side, and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a number of fastening portions 752 formed with female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The concealing decorative member 768 comprises a three-dimensional decorative portion 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate is disposed on the rear side of the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a to which an LED is fixed on the front side, so that the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated by the light emitted from the LED.

The front support members 760 each include a fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a receiving inclined portion 762 arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 and inclined toward the front side as the back surface of the plate moves upward.

The fixing plate 761 is a plate that is fastened to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by inserting a fastening screw that is inserted from the front side into the insertion hole and threaded into the corresponding female thread portion.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclination portion 762 is positioned in front of the front upper inclination portions 714, 751. That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclination portion 762 and the front upper inclination portions 714, 751, and the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is guided along this guide path, so that the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is configured to lift and lower while displacing in the front-to-rear direction. This lifting and lowering displacement is explained below.

Figure 52(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in Figure 28, and Figure 52(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIb-LIIb in Figure 28. Figures 52(a) and 52(b) show the second operation unit 700 in a standby state for performance.

Figure 53(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in Figure 33, and Figure 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in Figure 33. Figures 53(a) and 53(b) show intermediate performance states of the second operating unit 700.

Figure 54(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIVa-LIVa in Figure 30, and Figure 54(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIVb-LIVb in Figure 30. Figures 54(a) and 54(b) show the extended state of the second operating unit 700.

The lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 shown in Figures 52 to 54 occurs when the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of driving force during the lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be described. In this description, Figures 28, 30, and 33 will be referred to as appropriate.

When the drive force transmission starts from the performance standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is designed to be parallel to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, so that the displacement resistance that occurs when the gear cam member 734 starts to rotate can be suppressed. The same thing is also true in the extended state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 30), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, so that the displacement resistance that the gear cam member 734 receives in the rotational direction from the pivot arm member 720 is maximized, making it easier to stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in Figures 52 to 54, the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is arranged on the rear side below the center frame 86, and is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-to-rear direction as it is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is reduced by a configuration in which the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is guided by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, and by a configuration in which the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are guided by the rotating cylinder portion 745b of the lifting and reversing plate member 740.

In other words, the pair of rotating cylinder sections 774e are designed to be aligned parallel to the inclination angles of the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 (the front upper inclined portion 751 is located on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, see FIG. 56), which are arranged symmetrically. By the rotating cylinder section 774e rolling around the center of the cylindrical section 774d, the displacement resistance of the main body member 771, which displaces along the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, can be reduced.

Furthermore, by arranging the rotating cylinder parts 745b aligned in the front-rear direction, the front rotating cylinder part 745b is designed to be positioned slightly upward, which helps to suppress tilting displacement of the main body member 771, thereby preventing the rotating cylinder part 774e from applying excessive load to the receiving inclined part 762 and the front upper inclined parts 714, 751.

In other words, in this embodiment, the performance device 780 is designed so that its center of gravity (position of the axis of rotation) is located slightly forward of the front-to-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is constantly biased in a forward tilt direction by gravity. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are prone to displacement such that the front side drops and the rear side rises.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b that is disposed adjacent to the first horizontal plate 774b when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b descends is disposed slightly upward, and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b that is disposed adjacent to the second horizontal plate 774c when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c ascends is disposed slightly downward. Therefore, forward tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b can stably roll between the first horizontal plate 774b because there is a gap between the front rotating cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c, and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b can stably roll between the first horizontal plate 774b and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b because there is a gap between the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b. This allows the rotating cylinder portion 745b to roll normally, and reduces the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The displacement of the lift-up/down reversing device 770 toward the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the geometrical guidance described above. Therefore, the displacement resistance of the forward/backward displacement can be reduced during the upward displacement in which the lift-up/down reversing device 770 is displaced toward the front side compared to the downward displacement.

The up and down displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, which is divided into vertical displacement and front-to-rear displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of upward displacement is relatively large due to the need to counter gravity, but in this case, the forward-to-rear displacement can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the driving force required to lift the lifting and reversing performance device 770 from becoming excessive.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so that it is its natural length in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 53) of the second operating unit 700. In other words, when the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 is positioned lower than the position in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction that assists the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 caused by the driving force of the drive motor 731, whereas when the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 is positioned higher than the position in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770.

This makes it easier to maintain the position of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in the intermediate performance state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven from the performance standby state of the second operating unit 700 and then controlled to be stopped so as to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, even if the stopping timing is slightly earlier than ideal, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 can displace the second operating unit 700 so as to move it closer to the intermediate performance state.

For example, when the stop control is performed in a similar manner, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal, the second operating unit 700 will descend under its own weight, and this descent due to its own weight will be suppressed by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2, so that the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate performance state and maintained in its position.

In addition, for example, when the drive motor 731 is driven and controlled from the extended state of the second operating unit 700, and the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, if the lifting and reversing performance device 770 passes the intermediate performance state downward, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance, making it easier to prevent a large downward displacement beyond the intermediate performance state. And even after the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is applied, so that the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate performance state.

Here, we will explain the effect of the lift-and-reverse effect device 770, which is displaced forward and backward in response to lift-and-reverse displacement. As a premise, a movable device is known that can be switched between a state in which it attracts the player's attention by displacing in and out of a frame bounded by a center frame 86, and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of vision.

Most of these movable gadgets are designed with an emphasis on how they look when placed inside the center frame 86, and when they are retracted to the outside of the center frame 86, appearance is often not taken into consideration, under the assumption that they will not attract the player's attention.

However, recently, the distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 has been increased, and the line of sight reaches the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the rear position of the play area) at the edge of the field of vision when passing through the inside of the center frame 86 and looking at the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, if the appearance of the movable props retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 is poor, it may reduce the player's interest.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, decorative surfaces are formed not only on the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also on the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and top and bottom sides (first secondary decorative surface 787a2 and second secondary decorative surface 787b2 in FIG. 52), and the displacement direction of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is set to a line that starts from the player side (front side) as it approaches the back side (sloping downward as it approaches the rear), that is, along the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of vision, so that each decorative surface can easily fit within the player's field of vision.

This allows each decorative surface of the covering member 787 to be comfortably within the player's field of vision. Details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the decorations (figures, patterns, letters, pictures, etc.) formed on the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 or second main decorative surface 787b1, first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 54) that is visible to the player in the extended state (see FIG. 54) and the upper side (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2, first sub-decorative surface 787a2 in FIG. 52) that is visible to the player in the performance standby state (see FIG. 52) are formed as decorations that are related to each other.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first minor decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration that is related to each other, the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second minor decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration that is related to each other, and the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as decorations that are different from each other.

The decoration formed on the upper surface is positioned in the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 26) located behind it when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for a performance, so it is easily visible when the player moves their gaze to switch between paying attention to the ball flowing down the play area formed outside the center frame 86 (see Figure 2) and paying attention to the display performance unfolding on the third pattern display device 81.

Therefore, the content of the decoration (notification content, for example, "Chance" or "Big Win") that is visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state can be visible to the player through the upper surface of the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state.

This allows the third pattern display device 81 to be displaced to a standby state for easier viewing, while the covering member 787, which is positioned so as not to be conspicuous, can continue to attract the player's attention.

In addition, as described below, the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player, so that the content of the decorative surface visible to the player in the extended state can be different.

For example, if the lifting and reversing display device 770 is placed in a display standby state before the player can see the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (because the player misses it or the operating speed is too fast), and the content of the decorative surface can only be seen from the front side, most of the front side will be hidden by the game board 13 in the display standby state, and the player will be forced to focus on the liquid crystal display displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, reducing his or her ability to focus on the covering member 787.

On the other hand, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be seen from the top side, as in this embodiment, the player can visually check the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in the performance standby state and understand the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, "chance" or "jackpot") that were visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state.

As a result, for players who miss the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state, the content notified by the state of the covering member 787 can be continuously notified by the visible decorative surface of the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state. This makes it possible to maintain high attention to the covering member 787 regardless of the state, such as the performance standby state or the extended state.

In this embodiment, the forward/rearward displacement of the lifting/reversing effect device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is configured as a displacement from a state in which it is positioned on the rear side of the rear end surface of the play area to a position forward of the rear end surface of the play area.

As shown in FIG. 52, when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state, the front of the covering member 787 faces the back of the plate of the center frame 86, and the center frame 86 has a flow path forming portion 86a formed to protrude toward the covering member 787.

The flow path forming portion 86a is a portion that forms the rear portion of the guide flow path for guiding the ball that has flown down the lower rolling surface of the center frame 86 from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 after reaching the lower edge of the center frame 86, to the first winning opening 64 disposed in the play area by swinging the ball backward once and then forward again (see FIG. 9). In other words, the flow path forming portion 86a positions the rear end surface BE1 of the play area rearward of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2).

Because a ball that flows down the flow path forming portion 86a has a high probability of entering the first winning port 64, the flow path forming portion 86a attracts a lot of attention, and especially when the ball flies into the inside of the center frame 86, the flow path forming portion 86a is likely to attract the player's attention. In the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), the performance device 780 is disposed directly behind the flow path forming portion 86a, making it easy to configure a state in which the performance device 780 in the performance standby state comes into the player's field of vision.

When the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state, the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)), when the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53(a)), and when the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

In other words, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time is displaced toward the front so as to enter a front-to-rear position that is the same as the front-to-rear position of the play area. Therefore, it can be made to appear to the player that the covering member 787 has climbed onto the center frame 86 and is moving toward the front (approaching the player).

In addition, when the second operating unit 700 is raised and lowered, the performance device 780 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction, and the front-to-rear position of its front end face is configured to match (coincide) with the front-to-rear position of the second performance surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 in the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

As a result, the front-to-back positions of the second performance surface 661b (see Figure 29) of the first operating unit 600 and the performance device 780 (Figure 30) of the second operating unit 700, which are positioned close to each other when viewed from the front in the extended state, are aligned, making it easier to visually recognize them as a single unit.

On the other hand, the longitudinal position of the performance device 780 is lowered further back in the intermediate performance state and the performance standby state than in the extended state, so that the box-shaped member 661 of the first operating unit 600 and the performance device 780 can be easily viewed separately (independently) compared to the extended state.

The lifting and reversing performance device 770 includes a main body member 771 that is connected and supported by the lifting plate member 740, and a performance device 780 that is configured to be displaceable based on the main body member 771. Next, the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 55 and 56.

Figure 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the lift-and-reverse performance device 770, and Figure 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lift-and-reverse performance device 770. Note that Figures 50 and 51 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of Figures 55 and 56.

The main body member 771 includes a lower long portion 772 formed long in the left-right direction, a cylindrical insertion tube portion 773 that protrudes from the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 toward the back side, a pair of guide extension portions 774 that extend from both left and right ends of the lower long portion 772 to the back side, an upper long portion 775 that is formed integrally with the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 and formed long in the left-right direction by a connecting portion that extends up and down, a plurality of guide portions 776 that are arranged on both left and right sides of the upper long portion 775 toward the back side and are configured to be able to guide the linear plate member 784 of the performance device 780 in the left-right direction, a transmission device holding plate 777 that is fastened and fixed from the back side to the left-right center of the upper long portion 775 and can support the drive transmission device, and a light-emitting performance means 778 that is fastened and fixed to the front sides of the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775.

The insertion tube portion 773 is a portion that is inserted into the inner circumference of the cylindrical portion 744 of the lifting plate member 740, and is formed with a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide on the inner circumference of the cylindrical portion 744, and the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction by the sliding. In other words, by inserting the insertion tube portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-to-rear direction with respect to the lifting plate member 740.

The guide extension 774 includes a vertical plate 774a whose width faces the up-down direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a whose width faces the left-right direction, a second horizontal plate 774c connected to the vertical plate 774a below the first horizontal plate 774b whose width faces the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), a pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d protruding outward from the left and right outer surfaces of the vertical plate 774a, and a rotating cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported by the cylindrical portions 774d.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width so that it extends more inwardly to the left and right than the widthwise ends of the first horizontal plate 774b. This widthwise extension is vertically opposed to the lower bottom of the lifting plate member 740 in the assembled state, and the mutual abutment suppresses the tilting displacement in which the guide extension portion 774 falls forward. In other words, by ensuring a width such that the second horizontal plate 774c is vertically opposed to the lower bottom of the lifting plate member 740, it is possible to suppress the tilting displacement in which the main body member 771 falls forward based on the lifting plate member 740.

The pair of cylindrical portions 774d are not aligned vertically, but the upper cylindrical portion 774d is shifted forward compared to the lower cylindrical portion 774d. This shift is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d are parallel (see FIG. 52(a)). In other words, by arranging the pair of cylindrical portions 774d parallel to the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e can be simultaneously abutted against the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762. This allows the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e to roll stably, making it easier to avoid localized loads.

The guide portion 776 includes a plurality of cylindrical portions 776a arranged on both the left and right sides in a vertically aligned pair and having female threads formed on the inner circumference, and a plurality of anti-disengagement plate portions 776b fastened to connect the pair of left and right cylindrical portions 776a.

The fall prevention plate portion 776b has insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the multiple cylindrical portions 776a, and is fastened to the cylindrical portion 776a by inserting fastening screws into the insertion holes from the rear side and screwing them into the cylindrical portion 776a, and functions as a part for preventing the linear plate member 784 from falling off, but details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b drilled in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, a cylindrical protrusion portion 777c that protrudes cylindrically from the front side below the insertion hole 777b, a pair of insertion holes 777d drilled at both upper and lower end positions so that fastening screws can be inserted, and a wiring fastener member 777e that is fastened and fixed to the back side.

The cylindrical protrusion 777c has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, and when the fastening screw is screwed into it while it is inserted into the transmission gear 781b, it supports the up-down inversion member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The through hole 777d is designed to allow the insertion of a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion 775a formed in the corresponding portion of the upper long portion 775, and the transmission device holding plate 777 is fastened and fixed to the upper long portion 775 by the fastening screw.

The wiring retaining member 777e is a part that holds and secures the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between it and the transmission device retaining plate 777, but by forming it into a shape that follows the outer frame of the transmission device retaining plate 777, it is also possible to improve the overall rigidity of the transmission device retaining plate 777.

The light-emitting means 778 is equipped with two elongated plate-shaped electric lighting boards 778a, one above the other, on the left and right sides of which light-emitting elements such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and a light-diffusing member 778b, which is a plate member made of a light-transmitting resin material arranged on the front side of the electric lighting boards 778a and on which a light-diffusing process is performed.

The upper illumination board 778a is equipped with a pair of detection sensors 778d arranged on the back side, one above the other. The detection sensors 778d are photocoupler type detection devices, and are configured to be able to detect the position of the up-down inversion member 781 of the performance device 780 by arranging an arc-shaped protrusion 781d in the detection groove, as described in detail below.

The lower light diffusion member 778b has multiple fastening portions formed on the back side, and fastening screws are inserted from the back side into insertion holes drilled in the lower long portion 772 at corresponding positions to the fastening portions, thereby fastening and fixing the fastening screws so that they are not noticeable.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusion member 778b has through holes 778c on both the left and right sides for inserting fastening screws, and the fastening screws are inserted into the through holes 778c from the front side and screwed into the female threaded portion 775b of the upper long portion 775, thereby fastening and fixing the upper light diffusion member 778b.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, and may be noticeable without any countermeasures. However, in this embodiment, as described below, the covering member 787 is positioned to always cover the front side of the insertion hole 778c, so that the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

Therefore, even if the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and adversely affects the performance. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, it is possible to increase the design freedom of the insertion direction of the fastening screw.

The performance device 780 is a device in which an outer portion is arranged around the upper long portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and includes an up-down inversion member 781 pivotally supported on the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777, a drive motor 782 having a drive gear 782a fixed to a drive shaft that transmits a driving force to the transmission gear 781b of the up-down inversion member 781, a pair of intermediate arm members 783 whose one end is pivotally supported on each of the two longitudinal ends of the up-down inversion member 781, and a pair of intermediate arm members 783 whose other end is pivotally supported and whose displacement in the left-right direction is guided by the guide portion 776. It comprises a pair of linear motion plate members 784, a pair of axial rotation members 785 arranged between the linear motion plate members 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) on a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction, a pair of axial support members 786 that axially support the axial rotation members 785 together with the linear motion plate members 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed to the left and right outer tip portions of the axial rotation members 785 with the phase fixed so that they cannot fall off, and covering members 787 arranged in front of and behind the end plate members 785d and formed with left and right lengths that cover the left and right sides of the upper long portion 775.

The upside-down member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b that protrudes in a gear-like shape from the rear side of the center of the main body plate portion 781a, a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c that protrude cylindrically from both ends of the main body plate portion 781a in the long direction toward the rear side, and an arc-shaped protrusion 781d that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b and protrudes from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole in the center that extends in the front-rear direction, and the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into this circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side, so that the up-down inversion member 781 is axially supported on the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with it, thereby rotating the up-down inversion member 781. In other words, the up-down inversion member 781 can be rotated by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical protrusion 781c supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end of the intermediate arm member 783 where the one-side support hole 783a is formed displaces in accordance with the cylindrical protrusion 781c, which displaces as the up-down inversion member 781 rotates.

The arc-shaped protrusion 781d is formed so that it can be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light-emitting performance means 778. In other words, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d can be placed in either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the position of the upside-down member 781 can be determined between two positions in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a position in between (a position in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is not positioned in either of the detection grooves of the pair of detection sensors 778d).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long rod shape (narrow plate shape) and includes a one-side support hole 783a drilled at one end and supported by a cylindrical protrusion 781c, a cylindrical other-side cylindrical portion 783b formed with its inner periphery penetrating at the other end opposite the one-side support hole 783a, and a bevel tooth portion 783c formed as an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

A female screw is formed on the inner circumference of the cylindrical protrusion 781c, and a fastening screw is inserted into the female screw and passed through the one-side support hole 783a from the rear side. This allows the intermediate arm member 783 to be pivotally supported by the upside-down member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and includes a cylindrical protrusion portion 784a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, an arc-shaped plate portion 784b that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, a pair of long hole portions 784c that are drilled in an elliptical shape extending parallel to the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged in parallel in a pair above and below at a position between the long hole portions 784c and protrude on the back side, and a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged in parallel to each other in a pair above and below at a position between the long hole portions 784c and protrude on the back side, and a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged ... It is equipped with a pair of protruding portions 784e formed as protruding portions extending in the front-rear direction on the opposing sides, a pair of fastening portions 784f arranged in a cylindrical shape that opens on the rear side at the end of the support plate portion 784d and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference side, a placement hole 784g formed between the cylindrical protruding portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d, a ring holding half portion 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between the pivot member 786, and a magnet holding half portion 784i formed in a square box shape so as to be able to hold a magnet Mg between the pivot member 786.

The cylindrical protrusion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, has a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b, and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference. That is, a fastening screw inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b from the back side is screwed into the female thread of the cylindrical protrusion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 784a so that it cannot fall off.

The arc-shaped plate portion 784b is formed in an arc shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arc-shaped plate portion 784b is disposed close to the other-side cylindrical portion 783b so as to face each other radially in the assembled state, limiting the tilt displacement of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b relative to the rotation axis. This makes it possible to stabilize the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 around the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

The long hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and a fastening screw is inserted from the back side into the insertion hole of the fall prevention plate portion 776b and screwed into the female thread formed in the cylindrical portion 776a, so that the linear plate member 784 is supported on the main body member 771 so that it cannot fall off.

In this supported state (assembled state), the linear plate member 784 is slidably displaceable along the direction in which the long hole portion 784c is formed. In other words, the linear plate member 784 is configured to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotation member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the protrusion portion 784e functions as a protrusion for determining the left-right arrangement of the metal rod 785a, but details will be described later.

The placement hole 784g is an opening to avoid interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785, but details will be described later.

The shaft rotating member 785 is a member arranged in a pair on the left and right and supported by the linear plate member 784, and includes a metal rod 785a formed in an approximately cylindrical shape from a metal material, a recessed groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 785a, a bevel tooth member 785c arranged on the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, in which bevel teeth (bevel gears) that mesh with the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 are formed, an end plate member 785d arranged on the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, a ring-shaped metal member 785e arranged around the metal rod 785a of the end plate member 785d in a manner that it is raised from the end plate member 785d, and a rotational position stabilization portion 785f that is a portion protruding from the left and right inner parts of the end plate member 785d and in which a metal screw is screwed and fixed to a female screw portion formed inside.

The metal rod 785a is disposed between a pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear plate member 784, and the protrusion portion 784e is disposed to enter the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured with a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide with the protrusion portion 784e, and is configured with a dimensional relationship that restricts left-right displacement with respect to the protrusion portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be slightly longer than the left-right width of the protrusion portion 784e, the diameter of the deep part of the groove of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e, and the diameter of the part where the recessed groove portion 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e.

This allows the metal rod 785a to be supported on the back side of the linear plate member 784 in a manner that allows it to rotate about its axis and prevents it from displacing in the left-right direction.

The bevel tooth member 785c is positioned so that it enters the placement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. When the bevel tooth member 785c is partially inserted into the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 is assembled from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 so that the bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c.

In this assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the placement hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear plate member 784, it cannot fall off toward the front side, and its displacement toward the rear side is restricted by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner circumferential shape that corresponds to the non-circular shape (e.g., D-shaped cross section) of the tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner circumferential shape and the tip of the metal rod 785a are formed with a dimensional relationship that allows for an interference fit, thereby being fixed in place.

The method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, it may be a method of fastening using an adhesive or the like, or a method of fastening the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a by forming a female thread at the tip of the metal rod 785a and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d into the female thread, or other methods may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half 784h of the linear plate member 784. By holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e and configuring the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d supporting the metal rod 785a to be in sliding contact with the inner periphery of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, it is possible to make the center of rotation of the end plate member 785d coincide with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, and to reduce the load generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a.

The rotational position stabilization portion 785f functions as a part that attracts the metal screw to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and includes an insertion hole 786a drilled to allow the fastening screw to be screwed into the fastened portion 784f to be inserted therethrough, a ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e between the ring holding half 784h of the linear plate member 784, and a magnet holding half 786c formed in a rectangular box shape capable of holding a magnet Mg between the magnet holding half 784i of the linear plate member 784.

When the fastening screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole 786a is screwed into the fastened portion 784f to assemble the linear plate member 784 and the pivot member 786, the metal rod 785a is prevented from falling off the plate portion of the pivot member 786 to the back side, the ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The covering members 787 are a pair of left and right components formed in a box shape with openings on the inside left and right sides, fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the axial rotation member 785, and decorations consisting of figures, patterns, letters, pictures, etc. that can be interpreted in different ways are formed on the opposite sides.

That is, the covering member 787 comprises a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface visible to the player in the protruding state (see FIG. 54), a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the reverse side thereof, a first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 formed on the side visible to the player when the first main decorative surface 787a1 is positioned on the front side and is in a performance standby state (see FIG. 52), and a second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 formed on the reverse side thereof. Note that the second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 is formed on the side visible to the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is positioned on the front side and is in a performance standby state (see FIG. 52).

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed from two front and rear members fastened to the end plate member 785d, and formed in an approximately box-like shape with the left and right inner sides open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). It has multiple extension parts 787c extending toward each of the left and right members, and recessed parts 787d recessed between the extension parts 787c so as to retreat to the left and right outer sides.

The extensions 787c are formed so that their ends abut or are disposed close to each other when the covering members 787 are disposed close to each other (see FIG. 26). This allows the pair of left and right covering members 787 to be visually recognized as a single unit.

The recessed portion 787d is a portion for visibly opening up the circular portion located at the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light-emitting performance means 778 and the arc plate portion at the upper center of the left and right of the upper long portion 775 when the covering member 787 is in a close arrangement state (see Figure 26), and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

The covering member 787 is formed so that its state can be switched between a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see Figures 29 and 52), and a state in which the second main decorative surface 787b1 faces the front and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see Figure 30) in response to the operation of the performance device 780. First, the mechanism that constitutes the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785. In FIG. 57(a), the upside-down member 781 is shown in a vertical arrangement state (also called an upright vertical arrangement state) in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and in FIG. 57(b), the upside-down member 781 is shown in a state in which it has rotated about 24 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front about the cylindrical protrusions 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). Note that in FIG. 57(a) and FIG. 57(b), the end plate member 785d of the left axial rotation member 785 and the right axial rotation member 785 are omitted from the illustration in order to make it easier to understand.

In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in a state where it enters the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). In the inverted vertical arrangement state where the upside-down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in a state where it enters the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d.

In other words, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to switch depending on whether the upside-down member 781 is in an upright vertical position or an inverted vertical position, and the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of the performance device 780 from the output of the detection sensor 778d.

As shown in Figures 57(a) and 57(b), when the upside-down member 781 is rotated, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this posture change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the axial rotation member 785, and the amount of left-right displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b corresponds to the amount of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 and the axial rotation member 785.

Here, we will explain the order in which rotational displacement and left-right displacement (linear displacement) occur. These displacements do not occur simultaneously and to the same extent, and there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is greater.

First, to give an overview, the up-down inversion member 781, intermediate arm member 783, and linear plate member 784 are configured as a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the up-down inversion member 781 rotates around the cylindrical protrusion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, which is journaled on the cylindrical protrusion 781c of the up-down inversion member 781, moves in parallel along the movement axis HL1 that passes through the center of the cylindrical protrusion 777c when viewed from the front, so that the displacement direction of the linear plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is restricted. The pair of left and right linear plate members 784 simultaneously move in opposite directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 until it rotates approximately 24 degrees from the vertical position shown in FIG. 57(a). Length L1 is illustrated as half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 (the length between the left-right center and the left-right width ends).

In addition, due to the change in state from FIG. 57(a) to FIG. 57(b), the change in posture around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise when viewed from the front, which is less than half the 15 degrees that is the angle between adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Because the bevel tooth member 785c is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the transmission of load (meshing transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c occurs at opposing positions in the front-to-rear direction, i.e., on the movement axis HL1 when viewed from the front.

Figure 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in Figure 57(a), and Figure 58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(b).

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 (displaced upward in FIG. 58(b)). Note that in FIG. 58(b), for ease of understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are shown as overlapping, and this overlap width is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, causing the axial rotation member 785 to rotate and displace. While the up-down inversion member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 57(a), the right axial rotation member 785 rotates in the backward rotation direction, and the left axial rotation member 785 rotates in the forward rotation direction.

When the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other cylindrical portion 783b, and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 rotates 180 degrees accordingly. In other words, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is configured to be twice the rotation angle around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

The amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that may occur due to pressure caused by displacement from the state of FIG. 58(a) to the state of FIG. 58(b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear teeth, and is not enough to reliably rotate the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c. In other words, it is less than the amount of displacement until the abutting representative tooth rotates to the arrangement of the adjacent teeth (the amount of displacement required for a 30 degree rotation, since the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are arranged in 12 equal parts).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c, but in this embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are formed from a resin material, the displacement accompanied by the pressure is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, and the orientation of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 in the rotational direction is maintained from the state shown in FIG. 57(a) to the state shown in FIG. 57(b).

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and bevel tooth member 785c occurs when the driving force transmitted to the intermediate arm member 783 via the up-down inversion member 781 is opposed by the attractive force generated by the magnet Mg on the rotational position stabilization portion 785f (see FIG. 54) of the shaft rotation member 785.

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilization portion 785f so as to restrict the right-side shaft rotating member 785 from rotating backward, and the right-side shaft rotating member 785 receives a biasing force from the magnet Mg in the forward rotation direction. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the right-side shaft rotating member 785 to the rotational displacement.

For the left-side axial rotation member 785, the rotational position stabilization portion 785f is disposed in front of the end plate member 785d, as on the right side, while the magnet Mg is disposed on the upper side, the opposite of the right side (see FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilization portion 785f, and the left-side axial rotation member 785 receives a backward biasing force from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left-side axial rotation member 785.

In this embodiment, the attractive force of the magnet Mg is designed to generate a load that exceeds the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c until the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 from the state shown in FIG. 57(a).

As a result, elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c occurs so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). If the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c will rotate beyond the attractive force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg will be separated from the metal screw of the rotational position stabilization portion 785f, causing an extreme decrease in magnetic force. The intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, released from the attractive force of the magnet Mg, will undergo rotational displacement while elastically recovering.

As a result, when rotation starts, the elastic recovery increases the momentum of the axial rotation member 785 in the rotational direction, and the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This increase in rotation speed occurs not only in the axial rotation member 785, but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the axial rotation member 785.

This allows the movement of the covering member 787 to be adjusted without changing the drive speed of the drive motor 782, improving the performance effect of the covering member 787 while reducing the burden on the control design of the drive motor 782.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 occurs due to the attractive force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts to rotate.

The rotational position stabilization parts 785f that receive the attractive force of the magnet Mg are configured as a pair, one above the other; when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front, one of the rotational position stabilization parts 785f is positioned close to the magnet Mg and receives the attractive force (see FIG. 52(b)), and when the orientation is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front, the other (see FIG. 52(b), the upper) rotational position stabilization part 785f is positioned close to the magnet Mg and receives the attractive force.

In other words, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see Figures 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg effectively acts to limit the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785. Therefore, when displacing from the close arrangement state, the magnetic force can cause the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 to be delayed regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

In other words, between the state shown in FIG. 58(a) and the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is greater than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the up-down inversion member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in front view beyond FIG. 57(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction settles down, and rotational displacement occurs.

According to this embodiment, the slider crank mechanism is used as described above, and so the same action occurs. That is, near the vertical position, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction, so the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, the left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 is large and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up-down inversion member 781 is tilted closer to the left-right direction, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and larger in the up-down direction, so the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 becomes smaller and the amount of rotation becomes larger. Therefore, the left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 becomes smaller and the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 becomes larger.

Therefore, in the rotational movement of the upside-down member 781, which starts from a vertically disposed state and ends in a vertically disposed state, first the degree of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases, then the degree of rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 increases, and again the degree of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases.

By generating linear displacement and rotational displacement in this order, it is possible to prevent the extension portion 787c of the covering member 787 from colliding with the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Next, the change in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be described.

Figures 59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the performance device 780. Figures 59(a) to 59(c) show the inversion operation of the lift-and-lower inversion performance device 770 in chronological order. Figure 59(a) shows the performance device 780 in an upright vertical position with the upside-down member 781 in an upright position, Figure 59(b) shows the performance device 780 when the upside-down member 781 has been rotated 90 degrees from the vertical position, and Figure 59(c) shows the performance device 780 in an inverted vertical position with the upside-down member 781 in an inverted position.

The upside-down member 781 changes its state from the upright vertical position (see FIG. 57(a)) to the inverted vertical position by rotating 180 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front. In the inverted vertical position, the orientation of the covering member 787 is inverted 180 degrees based on the upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)). This switches the decorative surface visible to the player (see FIG. 59(c)).

The upside-down vertical position is returned to the upright vertical position (see FIG. 57(a)) by rotating the upside-down inversion member 781 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Therefore, the inversion operation can repeatedly switch between the state shown in FIG. 59(a) and the state shown in FIG. 59(c) each time the drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) is driven while reversing the direction so as to rotate the upside-down inversion member 781 180 degrees.

As described above, while the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 57(a), the axial rotation member 785 rotates 180 degrees by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 783c. Here, based on the rotation direction of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right axial rotation member 785 rotates in the backward direction, and the left axial rotation member 785 rotates in the forward direction. In other words, the pair of axial rotation members 785 arranged on the left and right and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d rotate in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the intermediate position, the right covering member 787 faces the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 toward the front, and the left covering member 787 faces the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 toward the front (see FIG. 59(b)).

This makes it possible to prevent the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the right covering member 787 from being viewed in unison during rotational displacement of the covering member 787.

Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be intentionally made to have misaligned content on the left and right, and the content of the decorative surface can be configured to be difficult for the player to recognize, so the amount of information provided to the player by the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be reduced.

This reduces the player's focus on the covering member 787 during rotational displacement. In addition, when the rotational displacement stops, the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1), which has the effect of making it easier for the player to maintain their line of sight on the covering member 787 until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops.

The rotational displacement is performed with the second operating unit 700 in the extended state (see Figure 54), but when this rotational displacement stops and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1), the performance device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 30), and in this state it is unlikely that attention will be drawn to the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2).

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operating unit 700, the view of the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) will be blocked by the third operating unit 800.

On the other hand, when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state for presentation (see FIG. 52) and the presentation device 780 is positioned below the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) becomes more easily visible to the player.

In this way, in the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being seen together during rotational displacement in the extended state, and prevented from facing the player, so that it does not draw attention to itself, but is formed as a side that can be noticed by the player in the performance standby state.

This allows the appearance of the second operation unit 700 to change depending on the placement, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the performance is excessively poor compared to the cost of placing the second operation unit 700 (occupying space, the burden of hiding it well).

After the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 are rotated and displaced, the rotational position stabilization portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the position of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

In this embodiment, the metal member that is attracted to the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, which reduces material costs and improves maintainability compared to designing a dedicated metal member.

As described above, the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by linear displacement in the left-right direction, so the arrangement of the performance device 780 capable of performing the rotational displacement is limited. That is, when the second operating unit 700 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) or the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), performing the rotational displacement causes the decorative members such as the right front plate member 710, the left rear plate member 750, and the front support member 760 arranged on the left and right, and the three-dimensional decorative part 768a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof, to collide with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state (see FIG. 30), space is secured in the left-right direction, making it possible to perform rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is controlled so as to be executable on the premise that it is determined from the output of the detection sensor 713 that the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state. This allows the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 to occur normally.

The extensions 787c are arranged close to each other when the upside-down member 781 is in the vertical position, and in this position, are arranged facing the front and rear of the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotated from this position about a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction, the extensions 787c collide with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, causing a malfunction.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extensions 787c are arranged close to each other creates the effect of allowing the pair of left and right covering members 787 to be viewed as one, and as this is a configuration necessary for the presentation, it is preferable that it can be maintained.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 in advance before rotational displacement (see FIG. 57). The linear displacement of length L1 allows the extension 787c to be retracted from the front-rear position of the connection portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, and the problem of collision between the extension 787c and the connection portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772 can be avoided.

In addition, by configuring the rotational displacement in this manner, no rotational displacement occurs (or is limited) in the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and rotational displacement occurs in the remaining length L2, so that the amount of left-right displacement of the covering member 787 during rotation can be kept small.

This makes it possible to keep the attention of the covering member 787 low and to make the rotational displacement less noticeable compared to when the position of the covering member 787 changes significantly during rotation, and therefore allows the decorative surfaces 787a1-787b2 to be designed without regard for appearance during rotational displacement, thereby improving design freedom.

The timing at which the covering member 787 starts to rotate can be set arbitrarily by designing the attractive force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, even if a design change occurs to increase the left-right width of the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the performance device 780 can be kept the same, but by changing the magnet Mg to a magnet with a stronger attractive force, it is possible to avoid collision between the connecting portion and the extension portion 787c, as in this embodiment.

As shown by the imaginary lines in Figure 59, the insertion hole 778c is positioned so that it is always hidden by the covering member 787. This prevents the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c from being visible to the player, and prevents the fastening screw from reducing the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the decorations (figures, patterns, designs, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787, so the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical to match the left and right decorations.

In other words, since the fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 778c, it becomes impossible to place an LED on the illumination board 787a at that position (see Figure 55). Also, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it is easy to see it as being dark during the lighting effect.

Therefore, it is desirable to position the insertion holes 778c in the decorations on the left and right, avoiding areas that need to be brightly lit and conspicuous, and as a result, the placement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical.

It is of course permissible to arrange the insertion holes 778c symmetrically. In particular, if the decorations of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are identical, there is no disadvantage to arranging the insertion holes 778c symmetrically, and the design of the illumination board 778a can be made easier.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is displaced linearly left and right during the inversion operation of the lift-down inversion performance device 770, and even when the vicinity of the center of the light diffusion member 778b is not surrounded by the extension portion 787c, the mechanical parts such as the up-down inversion member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear plate member 784 are hidden so as not to be visible.

In other words, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b located at the front, and the vertical width of the linear plate member 784 is designed to fit within the vertical width of the left and right long portions of the upper long portion 775 located at the front. In addition, the up-down inversion member 781 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 located at the front, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that its displacement trajectory fits within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b.

This allows the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the performance device 780 to be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, thereby preventing a reduction in the performance effect due to the appearance of the performance device 780 during the reversal operation.

Returning to FIG. 26 for further explanation, the third operating unit 800 is a unit that is positioned above the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the performance standby state, is supported at the tip of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510, and is configured to be capable of being lifted and lowered as the lifting arm members 801 are driven in the vertical direction.

Figure 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and Figure 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that Figures 60 and 61 show the portion that constitutes the displacement of the third operating unit 800, and omit the illustration of the decorative members 870, 880 that serve as decorative parts arranged on the outside.

60 and 61, the third operating unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by a lifting arm member 801, a fixed cylindrical member 820 having a cylindrical portion 821 fastened to the center of the held member 810, an inner rotating member 830 journaled on the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted into the inner periphery, an outer rotating member 840 journaled on the main body portion 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted into the inner periphery, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and a drive transmission device 860 having a plurality of gear members housed in the held member 810 and for transmitting a drive force for displacing the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

The held member 810 comprises a disk-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated cover member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 includes a tube fixing portion 812 recessed in the center to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, with insertion holes for inserting fastening screws for fixing and through holes for inserting electrical wiring, a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with its detection groove facing the side capable of receiving the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840, a motor holding portion 814 which holds the drive motor 861, a number of cylindrical protrusions 815 protruding from the front side as a cylindrical portion which axially supports the transmission gear 863 so that it cannot fall off, and a number of double cylindrical protrusions 816 protruding from the front side as a double cylindrical portion which axially supports the load response gear 865 so that it cannot fall off.

The perforated cover member 817 has a circular hole 818 drilled in the front-rear direction in the center. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 protrude inward from its inner peripheral edge when viewed from the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 comprises the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed on the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate-shaped illumination board 823 fastened to the circular plate portion 822 and having light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side, a light-transmitting decorative member 824 made of a light-transmitting resin material and shaped like an umbrella (or bowl) so as to be able to cover the illumination board 823 from the front side, and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 821 on the circular plate portion 822 side and configured to be able to slide with the cylindrical portion 821.

The cylindrical portion 821 has a female thread formed at the tip on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the tube fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female thread, thereby fastening and fixing the fixed cylindrical member 820 to the held member 810 so that it cannot rotate.

The cylindrical portion 821 is formed with an axial through hole on the inner circumference side, and the electrical wiring inserted into the through hole of the tube fixing portion 812 is routed through this through hole to the front side and connected to a connector arranged behind the illumination board 823.

The illumination board 823 is equipped with LEDs consisting of inner light-emitting parts 823a that are placed at the vertices of a pentagon and at a central position equidistant from those vertices, and outer light-emitting parts 823b that are placed at 15 equally spaced locations on the circumference. The inner light-emitting parts 823a are composed of LEDs whose optical axis faces the front (forward), and the outer light-emitting parts 823b are composed of LEDs whose optical axis faces radially outward (diameter direction).

The outer light-emitting unit 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As described below, the light emitted from the outer light-emitting unit 823b is irradiated onto the plated parts 871a of the first decorative members 870, which are arranged in close proximity to each other at equal intervals on the circumference, so that each first decorative member 870 is irradiated with light from three LEDs.

The outer light-emitting unit 823b is fixedly arranged on the illumination board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate around the center of the circle as an axis, but since the outer light-emitting unit 823b and the first decorative member 870 are arranged at equal intervals on the same axis of the circle, light from the same number of LEDs (three in this embodiment) can always be irradiated onto each first decorative member 870, regardless of the orientation of the first decorative member 870 in the rotational direction.

This makes it possible to suppress changes in the amount of light LD1 irradiated to the first decorative member 870 during the rotation operation.

The sliding member 825 is configured so that its inner diameter side can slide on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, while its outer diameter side can slide on the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830.

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side and a cylindrical portion that protrudes rearward from the inner diameter end of the flange-shaped portion, but the outer diameter of this cylindrical portion is formed slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, so that it is slidably fitted inside the inner rotating member 830.

By interposing the sliding member 825 between them, direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 that is configured to be rotatable around it is prevented. In addition, by disposing the sliding member 825 on the side that has the advantage in terms of strength, that is, the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and the circular flange portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 or the inner rotating member 830 will be damaged or deformed due to the load generated during sliding or when sliding is poor (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive).

The inner rotating member 830 comprises a cylindrical main body 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end, a plurality of metal rods 832 fastened to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a at five equal circumferential positions around the main body 831 with their long lengths aligned radially, a plurality of linear motion members 833 formed so that the metal rods 832 can be inserted therethrough and configured to be linearly displaceable while being guided by the metal rods 832, and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported at the radially outer portions of the linear motion members 833.

The main body 831 comprises the circular flange portion 831a described above, a number of sliding ridges 831b extending rearward in a ridge-like manner from the circular flange portion 831a as a base end at intermediate angular positions (five locations) between adjacent metal bars 832, and a number of recesses 831c formed at intervals in the circumferential direction at the end opposite the circular flange portion 831a.

The sliding protrusion 831b is configured to be slidable along the inner curved surface of the main body 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and the protruding tip is formed in a semicircular cross section to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and thus reduce contact friction.

As described above, the sliding ridge 831b is positioned at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent metal bars 832, or in other words, on the opposite side of the metal bar 832 (a position shifted by 180 degrees) with respect to the central axis of the outer rotating member 840.

As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 during the switching rotation operation described below and the outer rotating member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is journaled is subjected to a load that displaces it radially outward, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding protrusion portion 831b, so the contact area between the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotating member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner rotating member 830 can be maintained low.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central ring gear 864 is inserted. By arranging the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, the relative rotation between them is disabled, and the rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be made to match.

The linear motion member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b that are spaced apart from each other in the linear motion direction and that protrude cylindrically toward the rear, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c that is formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 based on the cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b and is inserted into the rotating member 834, and a recessed groove 833d that is recessed in the circumferential direction at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c.

The recessed groove 833d is located on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and functions as a displacement regulating groove that prevents the rotating member 834 from falling off in the radially outward direction by slidingly fitting the protruding portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 that are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 onto the outside, as will be described in detail later.

The rotating member 834 has a bevel gear-shaped bevel tooth portion 834a and a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 834b that protrude cylindrically parallel to the linear motion direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed around the entire circumference, but is formed over the 3/4 circumference (approximately 270 degrees) required for operation.

The cylindrical protrusion 834b has a female thread formed on the inner circumference, and functions to fasten the decorative members 870, 880 to the rotating member 834 by screwing in the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880, as will be described in detail below.

The outer rotating member 840 comprises a cylindrical main body 841, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) extension arms 842 extending radially outward at five equal circumferential positions around the main body 841, gear teeth 843 formed on the outer periphery along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and a detection target 844 extending radially outward from the main body 841 in a position that allows it to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

The extension arm 842 has a cylindrical portion 842a that extends parallel to the central axis of the main body 841, and a female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 842a. When a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread while the cylindrical portion 842a is inserted into the base end rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported on the extension arm 842 so that it cannot fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged to be able to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and function as a part that switches between the presence and absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, as will be described in detail later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a long member and includes a base end rod portion 851 whose one end is supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, a thickened portion 852 which is thickened toward the front side at the other end of the base end rod portion 851, a tip end rod portion 853 which extends parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base end rod portion 851 from the front end of the thickened portion 852, and a rotation transmission portion 854 which is formed with gear teeth at the end of the tip end rod portion 853.

The rotation transmission part 854 is a part that links with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a that is formed with a dimensional relationship that allows the cylindrical protrusion 833a to rotate with respect to each other when inserted therethrough, a guide hole 854b that is an elongated hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a and that guides the cylindrical protrusion 833b when inserted therethrough, and a bevel gear part 854c that is formed in a bevel gear shape with the supported hole 854a as the central axis and that forms a bevel gear by meshing with the bevel gear part 834a of the rotating member 834.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 fastened to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, a plurality of transmission gears 863 supported on the cylindrical protrusion portion 815 so as not to fall off and meshed to be able to transmit a driving force via the drive gear 862, a central ring gear 864 meshed with the transmission gear 863, a pair of load response gears 865 positioned forward of the central ring gear 864 and supported on the double cylindrical protrusion portion 816 so as not to fall off, and a torque limiter 866 supported on the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion portion 816 on the back side of the load response gear 865 and whose resistance is variable according to the load in the rotational direction applied to the load response gear 865.

The central ring gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, and is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted into its inner periphery. The central ring gear 864 is provided with a transmission protrusion 864a that protrudes from the bottom plate portion to the front side in a position and shape that corresponds to the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830 so that the central ring gear 864 can be inserted into the recessed portion 831c, and a support ring portion 864b that protrudes from the bottom plate portion to the front side in a coaxial double ring shape that is disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission protrusion 864a.

In the assembled state, with the transmission projection 864a inserted into the recess 831c, the rear end of the body 831 of the inner rotating member 830 is fitted into the gap between the support annular portions 864b with a dimensional relationship of intermediate fit or a dimensional relationship of interference fit. This allows the central annular gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 to rotate integrally.

The arrangement of the recessed portions 831c and the transmission protrusions 864a is not limited in any way. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or they may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are spaced equally, they can be assembled by matching the arrangement of the transmission projections 864a and the recesses 831c without having to consider the posture of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, which allows for quick assembly. In the present embodiment, where the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (the same at 72 degree intervals), it is considered that there is little impact from the posture of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 shifting during assembly, so it is effective to have them spaced equally.

If the intervals are unequal, the assembly process requires an additional step of aligning the central annular gear 864 with the inner rotating member 830 before assembly; however, the positioning of the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c can be used to align the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864.

The load response gear 865 is arranged so that it can mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840. A torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, so that the load response gear 865 can be switched between a state in which rotation is permitted and a state in which rotation is restricted (limited) depending on the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, and the outer rotating member 840.

In other words, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and release the transmission of the driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In this embodiment, a device that transmits driving force in one direction (one-way torque limiter) is configured as a pair with the transmission direction reversed, and the torque limiter 866 is configured to switch the driving force transmission in both directions with good responsiveness.

Figure 62 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third action unit 800, and Figure 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third action unit 800. Note that Figures 62 and 63 show decorative parts of the third action unit 800, and omit the illustration of parts that configure the displacement.

As shown in Figures 62 and 63, the third operating unit 800 comprises the inner rotating member 830 described above, a first decorative member 870 that is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b of the inner rotating member 830 and covers one side of the cylindrical protrusion 834b, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b and covers the cylindrical protrusion 834b from the opposite side of the first decorative member 870.

The first decorative member 870 comprises a first skeletal portion 871 that is formed so as to be fastened to the cylindrical protrusion portion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 that is formed so as to cover one side of the first skeletal portion 871.

The first skeletal portion 871 is entirely plated and is configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covered portion 875 is made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and its surface is decorated with figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc."), and when the surface is facing forward, the designs, etc. are visible to the player.

In this embodiment, each of the multiple (five) first covered portions 875 has an independent pattern or the like drawn on it. Therefore, by changing the first covered portion 875 that emits strong light through the light emission control of the illumination board 823, or by changing the arrangement of the first covered portions 875, it is possible to vary the pattern or the like that attracts the player's attention.

For example, if the third pattern display device 81 is controlled to perform a display presentation that draws the player's attention to which first covered portion 875 will stop on the third pattern display device 81 side, and at the same time the inner rotating member 830 is controlled to rotate, the first covered portion 875 on the third pattern display device 81 side can be continuously changed in accordance with the rotation, so that the player's gaze can be focused on the first covered portion 875 for the period until the rotation stops.

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeletal portion 881 that is formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protrusion portion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 that is formed to cover the other side of the second skeletal portion 881.

The second skeleton portion 881 has a retaining piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering portion 885 so that it cannot fall off.

A metal screw is screwed into the second covering part 885 at a position (close position) where the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering part 885 acts, and the magnet Mg2 is attracted to this metal screw, thereby ensuring the integrity of the second covering part 885 in the combined state (particularly the combined state, see Figure 32).

The second covered portion 885 has a figure, pattern, or character design (hereinafter also referred to as "design, etc.") drawn on its surface, and when the surface is facing forward, the design, etc. is visible to the player.

In this embodiment, the patterns etc. drawn on the multiple (in this embodiment, five) second covering portions 885 are configured so that the multiple (at least two and up to five) second covering portions 885 are grouped together, and each second covering portion 885 is decorated to form part of a circular body so that when the five second covering portions 885 are combined, they are visually recognized as a "circular body" when viewed from the front.

The pattern drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, the pattern is designed so that the content that can be grasped from the second covering portion 885 in a united state does not change significantly even if the arrangement of the second decorative member 880 in the rotation direction is different. In other words, the pattern does not have clear top, bottom, left, or right, and is designed to have an inconspicuous change in external shape even when rotated (in this embodiment, a circular shape).

Therefore, if the second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other, the presentation performance can be improved when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player. In this respect, in this embodiment, the second covering portions 885 are firmly integrated by the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, so that the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portions 885 are positioned on the front side can be improved.

In addition, in each second covering portion 885, a magnet Mg2 is disposed on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the opposite side. When the orientation of the second covering portion 885 is reversed front to back by the switching rotation operation described below, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in the front view is also reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screw that each magnet Mg2 attracts is simply replaced with a metal screw that is screwed into the adjacent second covering portion 885 on the opposite side, and since the five second covering portions 885 are arranged in a circular ring shape, there is no change in the degree of attraction when integrated.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet. This makes the strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side slightly weaker, but this is done to avoid any deterioration in the presentation performance.

In other words, because the first covering portions 875 are each painted with an independent pattern, the degree of integration in the combined state is weak, and even if the positioning of the first decorative member 870 shifts slightly, there is no possibility that the player will not be able to recognize the pattern. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the performance of the effects that utilize the patterns painted on the first covering portions 875.

Furthermore, because the strength of the integration on the first covering part 875 side is weakened, the arrangement of the combined first covering parts 875 can be shifted due to vibrations that occur with the lifting and lowering displacement (and then stopping) and vibrations that occur with the rotational displacement (and then stopping) as an integral rotation operation or a switching rotation operation. This makes it possible to displace the first covering part 875 in a displacement manner that was not possible with conventional machines in which the first covering part 875 is not a divided body but is composed of a single circular member, thereby improving the presentation effect of the presentation provided by the first covering part 875.

In view of the above, in the combined state in which multiple decorative members 870, 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces forward is also referred to as the individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the state in which the second decorative member 880 faces forward is also referred to as the united state (see FIG. 32). Next, the operation for switching between the individual combined state and the united state will be described.

Figures 64(a), 64(b), 65(a) and 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figures 66(a), 66(b), 67(a) and 67(b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

Figures 64 to 67 show in chronological order the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 caused by the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see Figure 60) being transmitted and the inner rotating member 830 rotating relative to the outer rotating member 840.

That is, the diagrams are illustrated in chronological order from rear and front views, showing how the inner rotating member 830 rotates 45 degrees at a time from the individual combined state (Figures 64(a) and 66(a)).

In addition, in Figures 64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is depicted as a virtual position line 832F, and the change in the angle of the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. In addition, the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individual combined state (Figures 64 (a) and 66 (a)) is illustrated as angle θ31.

As shown in Figures 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise from the individual combined state when viewed from the front (see Figure 66) (this rotational movement is also referred to below as the "switching rotational movement"), the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is permitted, and therefore the inner rotating member 830 is permitted to rotate relative to the outer rotating member 840. In this embodiment, the position of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see Figure 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

Therefore, in Figures 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 rotates and displaces around the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

From the configuration between the above-mentioned components, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and since the cylindrical protrusion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a, a change in the position of the supported hole 854a corresponds to a change in the position of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in Figures 64 and 65, the rotation transmission part 854 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and is displaced in the circumferential direction at the same time, so the rotating member 834 supported by the rotation transmission part 854 is also displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and is displaced in the circumferential direction at the same time. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear moving member 833 is displaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes circumferential displacement, the arrangement of the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870, 880 fastened thereto are not fixed even at the radial end position, and the circumferential displacement can be maintained. Therefore, compared to a case where the displacement is completed only by radial linear displacement (for example, the reversal operation described above with the second operating unit 700), the presentation effect during the switching rotation operation can be maintained at a high level.

In contrast, in the above-mentioned reversal operation of the second operating unit 700, a rotational operation with high acceleration is generated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58), thereby weakening the impression that the position of the covering member 787 at the outer displacement end in the linear direction (see FIG. 59(b)) is fixed.

In other words, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased, and even in a situation where a period in which the change in left-right position is small continues at the end of the left-right outward displacement (a period near the dead point of the slider crank), the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased to maintain a high dramatic effect due to the operation of the covering member 787.

Since the switching rotation operation includes radial displacement, it is possible that radial loads will be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, causing the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 to shift. However, in this embodiment, the radial loads on the intermediate arm member 850 are generated equally at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) around the rotation axis, so that the loads cancel each other out. This makes it possible to suppress deviations in the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, making it easier to perform the switching rotation operation normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (expansion/contraction displacement) in the rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 occurs while being accompanied by a circumferential rotation. Therefore, in order to avoid collisions with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 is controlled so that it can be executed when the output of the detection sensor that determines the posture of the lifting arm member 801 indicates that the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

In addition, with the above-mentioned displacement of the rotation transmission part 854, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 fastened to the rotating member 834 are also displaced radially around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and, at the same time, displaced circumferentially.

When the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the bevel teeth portion 854c (see Figures 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel teeth portion 834a (see Figure 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 rotate around the metal rod 832 as an axis.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32, which is the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 based on the imaginary position line 832F. In addition, the direction of rotation is set to the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the radially outer side of the imaginary position line 832F, since the angle θ32 increases as it moves away from the imaginary position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the rotating member 834 is positioned on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60).

When rotating together, the rotating member 834 is in a position where either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, so that when the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 becomes the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in this embodiment) as the maximum value of the angle θ31 due to the rotation of the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment), the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 rotates half a circle (180 degrees).

In other words, the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates around the metal rod 832 is configured to be twice the angle of rotation around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of the magnet Mg of the second operating unit 700 described above, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) does not produce an action that retards the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832.

In other words, the magnet Mg2 generates an adhesive force between itself and the adjacent second decorative member 880, and as the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 with the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, a gap is generated between the adjacent second decorative members 880, and the adhesive force can be lost.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement around the metal rod 832 begins, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and there is no effect of slowing down the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832.

This makes it possible to reduce the driving force required to rotate and displace the decorative members 870 and 880. In other words, the driving force required of the drive motor 861 can be reduced, making it possible to miniaturize the drive motor 861.

Furthermore, the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 can be started quickly and ended early, so that the player's attention to the rotational displacement around the metal rod 832 can be reduced.

The rapidity at the start of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 relative to the rotational angle of the inner rotating member 830 so that it is not constant.

For example, in the process of rotating the intermediate arm member 850, if the rotation angle of the imaginary position line 832F (the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is in a contracted position and can rotate together is 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and if the imaginary position line 832F rotates a further 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 27 degrees (see FIG. 67(a)).

In other words, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate from a state in which the two can rotate together than during the rotation. This makes it possible to suppress the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 is used to rotate the inner rotating member 830, turn the intermediate arm member 850, and rotate the decorative members 870, 880. However, due to the above-described configuration, the driving force required to rotate the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate from a state in which they can rotate together, so that it is possible to avoid placing an excessively large burden on the drive motor 861 when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate.

In addition, the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832 occurs while shifting in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, so the visibility of the decorative members 870, 880 during the rotational displacement can be kept low. This reduces the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880 (for example, the connecting surface between the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) are visible, and improves the design freedom of the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880.

When performing the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps with the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 when viewed from the front. It also overlaps with the extension arm portion 842 adjacent to the extension arm portion 842 on which the cylindrical portion 842a on which it is supported is disposed. Therefore, without measures, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 will collide with the surrounding parts.

In contrast, in this embodiment, collisions are avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. That is, by positioning the tip side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 rearward of the base side rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the base side rod portion 851 and the tip side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be made to overlap front to back, thereby avoiding collisions during the switching rotation operation.

In addition, by arranging the base end rod portion 851 in front of the extended arm portion 842 and the tip end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 in rear of the extended arm portion 842, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged in front of and behind the extended arm portion 842 during the switching rotation operation, and collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67 show a case where the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 relative to the outer rotating member 840 is a direction that allows the intermediate arm member 850 to rotate (counterclockwise as viewed from the front in the individual combined state, see FIG. 66). In this case, the gear teeth 843 engage with the load response gear 865, which generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, and resistance is received, limiting the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840.

On the other hand, if the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the reverse direction described above (clockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individual combined state), or if the rotation in the direction that allows the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individual combined state) continues even after the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which its rotation is restricted (for example, it reaches a combined state from an individual combined state), a load that exceeds the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that restricts the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, the position maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously.

In other words, regardless of the direction of rotation, when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, if the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in a direction that continues to restrict the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 rotate together while maintaining their combined state (this rotational movement is also referred to below as the "integral rotational movement").

The integral rotation occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in this embodiment, occurs when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are combined and positioned close to each other.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation action in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the radial expansion direction, there is no need to consider collisions with surrounding decorative members, so the integral rotation action can be performed in the performance standby state of the third operation unit 800. Therefore, in this embodiment, the integral rotation action is controlled so that it can be performed regardless of the position of the third operation unit 800.

In this embodiment, as described above, the driving force of a single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) can perform a switching rotation operation accompanied by radially expanding displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880, and a unitary rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 without radially expanding displacement. Either operation can be performed in either drive direction, but the operations have priority, and any operation cannot be instantly performed in any rotation direction.

For example, from the state shown in FIG. 64(a) and FIG. 66(a), a switching rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and an integral rotation operation can be performed by continuing the rotation in this state. Also, an integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front, but an integral rotation operation cannot be performed immediately by rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

In addition, for example, if the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front from the state shown in Figures 64(a) and 66(a) and the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which its rotation is restricted, and then the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (reverse) as viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation is performed again, and it is not possible to immediately perform the integral rotation operation in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front.

In this manner, the operating mode of the third operating unit 800 in this embodiment changes the relative displacement of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 depending on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted in the rotation direction of the drive motor 861.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled so as to be able to determine whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861, and based on the determination result, it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 is described below.

Figure 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving state of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in a chronological order. As shown in Figure 68, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) controls the third operation unit 800 to alternate between normal and reversed performances.

When performing a flip performance, an action that includes a switching rotation action is performed, and when performing a normal performance, an action that does not include a switching rotation action is performed. This is to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from colliding with the surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation action.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power outage or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the third operating unit 800 is extended and then the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed, and after the state of the moving parts is determined from the output of the detection sensor 813, the control for normal performance is executed. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870, 880 collide with surrounding decorative members, even if the state of the moving parts cannot be determined from the output of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on.

The drive directions of the drive motor 861 are shown as forward rotation and reverse rotation. Forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which a united rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a))), and reverse rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which a switching rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state).

First, we will explain the drive control during normal performance before the reversal performance. During this normal performance, the third operating unit 800 is in an individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotational motion of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always a united rotational motion.

Since no switching rotational movement occurs, no collisions with surrounding decorative members occur, and the position of the third operating unit 800 can be switched to a performance standby state or an extended state at any time. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is being raised and lowered by the up and down movement of the lifting arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be controlled to rotate together at the same time as the lifting and lowering movement.

Naturally, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together when the position of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the lifting arm member 801 may be raised and lowered when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 stop rotating together.

Since the drive motor 861 has a forward rotation direction only, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detectable portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. By determining this output switch, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the position of the outer rotating member 840 as the initial position, and by setting multiple types of drive time from this initial position, the outer rotating member 840 can be controlled to stop in any position.

Next, the drive control during the reversal performance will be described. First, during the reversal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating forward until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched to determine that the detected part 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. By driving in reverse rotation, the third operating unit 800 executes a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

If the drive motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotation direction, a united state is reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 begin to rotate together. After the start of the united rotation, the outer rotating member 840 also begins to rotate in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so that the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have begun to rotate together due to the switch in the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation has begun, the drive motor 861 stops or only reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always an integral rotation operation. Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the position of the third operating unit 800 can be switched to a performance standby state or an extended state at any time.

Since the drive motor 861 can only drive in reverse, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the position of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from a reverse performance to a normal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operating unit 800 is put into an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in the reverse direction until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched to determine that the detected part 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in the forward direction. When the drive is in the forward direction, the third operating unit 800 executes a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

Next, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate together. After the start of the rotational movement, the outer rotating member 840 starts to rotate, causing the detected portion 844 to move away from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 to be switched. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have started to rotate together due to the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation starts, the performance transitions back to normal. The restrictions on drive control during this normal performance are the same as those described for the normal performance that preceded the above-mentioned reverse performance.

In this way, according to this embodiment, a single detection sensor 813 can be used to determine the switching of the rotation mode of the third operating unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the reference rotation angle of the outer rotating member 840. Therefore, the number of detection sensors 813 required can be reduced compared to when individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by switching the drive direction of the drive motor 861 to the opposite direction from a state in which the integral rotation operation continues or a state in which the rotation is stopped. In other words, regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the united combined state.

Therefore, when controlling the action presentation to switch to a united state at the timing of a jackpot announcement, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot has been announced based on the position of the first decorative member 870.

Furthermore, as described above, the decoration in the united state is designed so that what is perceived by the player does not vary significantly depending on the arrangement of the rotational direction of the second decorative member 880. In other words, even if the arrangement of the rotational direction of the decorative members 870, 880 is different at the start of the switching rotation operation, the content that is perceived by the player as the united state at the end of the switching rotation operation can be the same.

Therefore, unlike when the patterns in the united state differ depending on the arrangement in the rotation direction, the integral rotation action for adjusting the position after reaching the united state can be omitted, so the drive control until the jackpot announcement can be the same regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state.

In this way, in this embodiment, both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized in both the forward and reverse rotation directions of the drive motor 861. Therefore, compared to a case where the operation mode is fixed between forward and reverse rotation, a wide variety of performance modes can be realized with a single drive motor 861.

Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 28. As shown in Figure 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end, where the tube fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is located, to the front end, where the illumination board 823 is located, and electrical wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, with terminals connected to a connector disposed on the illumination board 823. Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, allowing the LEDs disposed on the illumination board 823 to be controlled to emit light.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light-emitting portion 823a of the illumination board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges toward the front side at the center side of the translucent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a part that is visible to the player at the center of the circle on which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged when the decorative members 870, 880 are combined.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b of the illumination board 823 is irradiated to the inside of the decorative members 870, 880 (first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged in the front, and acts to illuminate the decorative members 870, 880 from the inside.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual combined state (see FIG. 69) in which the decorative member 870 is positioned at the front, and a combined state (see FIG. 32) in which the decorative member 880 is positioned at the front, so that the light LD1 can be switched between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880.

In the individual combined state (see FIG. 69), the light LD1 is reflected toward the front side by the plated portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871, and the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side. This allows most of the light LD1 to be emitted toward the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 when the light LD1 is emitted can be improved.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 823 is fixedly positioned, and the decorative members 870, 880 are configured to rotate around it, so the relationship between the irradiation direction of the light LD1 and the arrangement of the decorative members 870, 880 can change with the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880. For example, if the light LD1 is irradiated to the center of the plated portion 871a during rotation, the light LD1 irradiated from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. Therefore, without measures, the degree of brightness of the first covering portion 875 by the light LD1 is likely to change with the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880, and it may be difficult to perform a performance in which the decorative members 870, 880 rotate together while emitting light at a constant brightness.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the shape of the plated portion 871a, which is configured to be able to reflect the light LD1, is concave, the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illumination substrate 823, and the center of the concave shape is designed to be located near the center of the first covering portion 875 when viewed from the front.

The light LD1 is positioned so that its optical axis faces the outer diameter direction of the circle on which the outer light-emitting portion 823b is positioned. As a result, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plated portion 871a and travels toward the center of the radius of curvature, illuminating the vicinity of the center of each of the first covering portions 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the plating portion 871a based on the outer light emitting portion 823b, the multiple lights LD1 can be reflected to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering portion 875. This allows light to be irradiated stably near the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875, so that the first covering portion 875 can be viewed with uniform brightness even during integral rotation.

Furthermore, the first framework portion 871 is a portion that is plated in the same manner as the plating process on the plating portion 871a, and has an outer plating portion 871b that is disposed outside the first covering portion 875 in a front view. The light LD1 is also reflected by the outer plating portion 871b in the same manner as the plating portion 871a, but since the outer plating portion 871b is disposed further back than the plating portion 871a, the degree of light intensity of the outer plating portion 871b can be weakened.

This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the light perceived outside the first covering portion 875 is too strong, causing the player to feel dazzled and reducing visibility inside the frame of the first covering portion 875.

The illuminated board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joints are not completely blocked, so not all of the light from the outer light-emitting part 823b is irradiated to the inside.

First, a gap VA1 is formed between the member edge 875a of the first covering portion 875 and the member edge 885a of the second covering portion 885, which is disposed opposite the member edge 875a, such that the internal structure can be seen in FIG. 69. The outer plating portion 871b protrudes through this gap VA1 to the outside of the frame of the first covering portion 875, so that the light LD1 that passes through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

In addition, a large gap VA2 is formed between the outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875, which is arranged opposite the metal rod 832, and the outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885, the gap exceeding the area required to avoid interference with the metal rod 832.

The gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of, first, avoiding collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, thereby ensuring that the length of the metal rod 832 is sufficient, and ensuring that the metal rod 832 can guide the linear displacement of the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834.

Secondly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring an assembly path for the fastening screw that is inserted into the skeletal parts 871, 881 and screwed into the cylindrical protrusion 834b of the rotating member 834 to fasten and fix the decorative members 870, 880 to the rotating member 834.

Thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a light path for the light that passes through the transparent parts of the framework 871, 881. Because the decorative members 870, 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light that passes through the gap VA and travels outward is visually recognized as light that passes through equal intervals on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle.

Therefore, by performing the integral rotational operation of the decorative members 870, 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can be rotated in the same manner. This makes it possible to perform a light-emitting effect in which the light radiating radially from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800 is visible in a rotating light-emitting state, without the need to control the lighting state of the light from the outer light-emitting portion 823b (for example, by keeping all the lights on).

In the combined state (see FIG. 32), the entire second skeletal portion 881 is made of a translucent resin material, which suppresses the reflection of light LD1 by the second skeletal portion 881.

As a result, only the light (weak light) of the light LD1 that is far from the optical axis is irradiated within the frame of the second covering portion 885, so the intensity of the light emitted by the second covering portion 885 can be weakened. On the other hand, the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, so the intensity of the light radiating out radially from the center of rotation of the third operating unit 800 can be improved.

A light diffusion decorative portion 885c is formed from a colored (in this embodiment, the color of the circular body is set to an arbitrary color) light-transmitting resin material and is arranged around the circumference of the frame of the second covering portion 885, with light diffusion processing formed on the inside. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light that is incident on the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is refracted, and acts to cause the entire light diffusion decorative portion 885c to emit surface light.

This surface emission makes it possible to homogenize the light that is viewed through the light-diffusing decorative parts 885c arranged in the circumferential direction, creating the effect that each of the light-diffusing decorative parts 885c of the five second decorative members 880 is viewed as a single unit by the player.

As mentioned above, the more firmly the second covering portions 885 can be integrated together, the better the presentation performance when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player. This integration can be achieved by making the light-diffusing decorative portion 885c visually appear as if it is continuously connected in the circumferential direction. This therefore improves the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portions 885 are positioned on the front side.

The outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end face 885b1 that is adjacent to (contacts) the outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875 protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 based on the plane on which the metal rod 832 is disposed.

As a result, when the third operating unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the united state (see FIG. 32), the degree to which the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 located on the rear side comes into the player's field of vision can be reduced, thereby reducing the impact on the presentation.

This makes it easier to prevent the color of the first covering part 875 from coming into view when the frame of the first covering part 875 and the frame of the second covering part 885 are colored in different colors and the second covering part 885 is positioned in front.

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state by itself in a combined state (see FIG. 32), there are more gaps around the third operating unit 800 than when the other operating units 600, 700 are both in an extended state (see FIG. 33, F9), making it easier for the line of sight to pass through when viewing the third operating unit 800 from an oblique direction. Therefore, without any measures, the side of the third operating unit 800 is visible, which can easily reduce the presentation effect.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, in the united state, the end face 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is positioned rearward from the center of the front-to-rear width of the side surface, so that even if the side surface of the third operating unit 800 is visible when viewed from an oblique direction, most of the side surface can be seen as part of the second covering portion 885, and the degree to which the first covering portion 875 is visible can be reduced. As a result, in the united state, the second covering portion 885 can be made easier to see than the first covering portion 875, improving the presentation effect.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual combined state and the combined state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830, causing the inner rotating member 830 to rotate, while the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is stopped by the load from the torque limiter 866.

Although the sliding ridge 831b is used to reduce the contact area, if the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 will be large, and the allowable load transmission value of the torque limiter 866 will have to be increased, which tends to hinder miniaturization of the torque limiter 866.

For this reason, it is preferable to suppress the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830. To this end, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the only support points between the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 are the front end that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central ring gear 864, and a gap is provided in other areas. This makes it possible to reduce the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830, making it easier to reduce the displacement resistance.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened to the central ring gear 864, a stopper is considered necessary to suppress forward displacement based on the central ring gear 864, and the sliding member 825 performs the function of this stopper. In other words, the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in a direction pushing it forward, but the front surface of the sliding member 825 abuts against the short diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 at the front and rear.

The short diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as a circular protrusion whose outer diameter is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and the protrusion portion 822b is formed in a circular shape at its outermost diameter portion, protruding from the back side with a semicircular cross section.

This protrusion 822b abuts against the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, so the contact area can be reduced compared to when the entire back surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. This reduces the displacement resistance in the rotational direction of the inner rotating member 830.

In addition, since no fastening screws are used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864, it is possible to reduce the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that would be expected if the weight of the fastening screws were to increase.

The following describes how the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are fixed to the rotating member 834. When explaining this fixing, refer to Figures 62 and 63 as appropriate.

The first decorative member 870 can be fixed to the rotating member 834 by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeletal member 871 into the female thread of the fastened portion 876 formed at the rear of the frame of the first covering portion 875 to fasten and fix the first covering portion 875 to the first skeletal member 871, and then inserting the protruding portion 873 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the first skeletal member 871 into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside), and screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

The second decorative member 880 can be fixed to the rotating member 834 by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeletal member 881 into the female thread of the fastened portion 886 formed at the rear of the frame of the second covering portion 885 to fasten the second covering portion 885 to the second skeletal member 881, and then inserting the protruding portion 883 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the second skeletal member 881 into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside), and screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be configured to undergo linear or rotational displacement in response to linear or rotational displacement of the rotating member 834.

During the fixing process, the projections 873, 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the linear motion member 833, thereby defining the arrangement of the skeletal parts 871, 881 on the linear motion member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832), and preventing the skeletal parts 871, 881 from falling off the linear motion member 833.

The skeletal parts 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, so that the position of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 (the position of the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction) is similarly defined, and it is possible to prevent the rotating member 834 from falling off the linear moving member 833.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when assembling the rotating member 834 to the linear moving member 833, the portion that determines the position of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 is formed on the skeletal portions 871, 881 that are fixed to the rotating member 834, and therefore, unlike when the portion that determines the position on the linear moving member 833 is formed on the rotating member 834 itself, the labor hours for assembly and disassembly can be reduced.

In other words, for example, when disassembling, by removing the fastening screws fastening the skeletal parts 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, not only can the restrictions on the arrangement of the skeletal parts 871 and 881 on the linear moving member 833 be released, but also the restrictions on the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 can be released. This can improve work efficiency.

The combined operations of the operational units 600 to 800 will be described with reference to Figs. 70 and 71. Figs. 70(a) to 70(d) and Figs. 71(a) to 71(d) are schematic front views of the operational unit 500 that chronologically explain examples of combined operations of the operational units 600 to 800. In the explanation of Figs. 70 and 71, Figs. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

In Figures 70 and 71, the decorations on each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operating unit 600, each of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operating unit 700, and each of the covering portions 875, 885 of the third operating unit 800 are illustrated in a schematic manner so as to be identifiable using letters or the like.

That is, the word "Normal" is displayed vertically on the first presentation surface 661a, the word "Activate" is displayed horizontally on the second presentation surface 661b, and the symbol "!" is displayed along the longitudinal direction on the third presentation surface 661c.

The first main decorative surface 787a1 is illustrated with the words "Start of war," the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 with the words "A crisis is an opportunity," the second main decorative surface 787b1 with the words "Attack," and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 with the words "Patience!?".

In addition, different alphanumeric characters ("I" to "V") corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covered portion 875, and five "circle" symbols are illustrated together in the second covered portion 885.

In Figure 70(a), each of the operating units 600 to 800 is placed in a standby state for performance (see Figure 28). Note that above the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

In addition, in FIG. 70(b), the first operating unit 600 is in an intermediate performance state, the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate performance state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

By executing the integral rotational motion of the third operating unit 800, the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged adjacent to the second operating unit 700 can be replaced one after another. In addition, by placing the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate performance state while the integral rotational motion continues or after it has stopped, the third performance surface 661c can be protruded inside the center frame 86, making the movements of the operating units 600 to 800 more lively.

For example, when the third presentation surface 661c is visible, the presentation can be controlled to increase the likelihood of winning the lottery, thereby increasing the interest of the player who sees the operation of the first operation unit 600.

When the integral rotational movement is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operating unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 arranged in close proximity to the second operating unit 700 can be viewed as an integrated unit.

This can increase the attention to the first decorative member 870 that is placed close to the second operation unit 700, and by starting a display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 on the third pattern display device 81 while returning the third operation unit 800 to a standby state for effect, the player's gaze can be smoothly guided to the third pattern display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 to be drawn to is not limited to the first decorative member 870 arranged in close proximity to the second operating unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light-emitting unit 823b (see FIG. 60) arranged to be able to irradiate light to the first decorative member 870, it is possible to draw attention to any first decorative member 870 by turning on the LED that irradiates light LD1 toward the first decorative member 870 to be drawn to and turning off the other LEDs.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870.

When switching the LED lighting pattern in accordance with the integral rotational movement of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit may be switched sequentially in the rotational direction, allowing the player to visually recognize that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotating and displacing along a coaxial circle. Alternatively, the LEDs to be lit may be fixed, and the first decorative member 870 to be irradiated with light may be switched by utilizing the fact that each first decorative member 870 reaches the position where the light is irradiated from that LED in sequence by the integral rotational movement of the first decorative member 870.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operating unit 600 both have vertically elongated decorations, allowing them to be viewed as a single unit. In particular, the front side of the decorative fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similar to the first performance surface 661a in the performance standby state, enhancing the effect of being viewed as a single unit.

On the other hand, when the state shown in Figure 71 (a) is reached, in addition to the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 being displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 during the intermediate process shown in Figure 70 (b), the second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operating unit 600 has a horizontally elongated decoration, so that the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and now it can be visually recognized as being integrated with the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700, which also has a horizontally elongated decoration.

Figure 35 shows the intermediate performance state of the second operating unit 700, but if the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state as shown in Figure 71 (a), the vertical distance between the covering member 787 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can be further reduced, enhancing the effect of them being visually perceived as a single unit.

At this time, the protruding decorative portion 652b protrudes to a visible position, and the above-mentioned effect of making the right edge of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be expanding further to the right than the right end RE1 of the area prevents the player from feeling cramped even if the second presentation surface 661b is positioned closer to the right edge.

This also allows the player to see that the second performance surface 661b is positioned toward the center of the third pattern display device 81, similar to the second main decorative surface 787b1, thereby enhancing the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second performance surface 661b being viewed as a single unit.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the protruding decorative portion 652b with content related to the decoration of the second performance surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second performance surface 661b and the protruding decorative portion 652b being visually perceived as a single unit can be enhanced.

In Figures 70(c) and 70(d), the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state. The reversal operation of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in Figure 70(d), but since the second decorative rotating member 660 is not positioned on the left or right outside of the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700 when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the reversal operation of the covering member 787 (see Figure 59) can be performed even when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state.

As mentioned above, when the covering member 787 is flipped over, the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 on the left and right are faced forward, making them non-distinguishable. However, as shown in Figure 70(d), the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 may be combined to make the content discernible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 70(d), the player can discern the meaning of "Pinch!?", and by stopping the driving of the second action unit 700 in this state, the player can focus his/her attention on the subsequent movement of the second action unit 700, thereby focusing the player's gaze on the second action unit 700.

For example, when it is desired to notify that the lottery result is a loss, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to return to FIG. 70(c), and when it is desired to notify that the lottery result is still not to be notified or that the lottery result is a big win, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to continue to be inverted to the state shown in FIG. 71(a), thereby drawing the player's attention to the second operating unit 700.

In FIG. 71(a), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an extended state, and the third operating unit 800 is in a standby state for performance. Note that above the second operating unit 700, the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second performance surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are positioned close to each other, and the characters written on each are both written horizontally, making it easy for the player to see them as one. Furthermore, the content has a series of meanings, including "attack activated," making it even easier for the player to see them as one.

When the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first performance surface 661a and the decorative fixing member 670 are positioned close to each other, and the characters written on each are both written vertically, making it easy for the player to see them as one. Furthermore, the content of the characters is related to "normal time," making it even easier for the player to see them as one.

In this way, in this embodiment, each presentation surface 661a, 661b of the first operating unit 600 is configured to be viewed as one with the side surface of a different member (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). This can improve the presentation effect.

In Figures 71(b) to 71(d), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in a standby state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. The state shown in Figure 71(b) and the state shown in Figure 71(c) differ in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 due to the third operating unit 800 performing a unitary rotation action. On the other hand, no matter which state the switching rotation action is performed from, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same united state (see Figure 71(d)).

In other words, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front, the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870. As a result, when the operation control of the third operation unit 800 is set to notify the player of a jackpot by executing a switching rotation operation at the end of the display performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the patterns are changing, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot will be notified from the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display performance (whether it is in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), the player's sense of anticipation as to whether or not they will win the jackpot can be maintained in the same way. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operating unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As described above, each of the operation units 600-800 can be formed so that the decoration is either visible alone or in combination with other units. Therefore, the decoration formed on each of the operation units 600-800 is not complete for each operation unit 600-800 alone, but is designed as a decoration that is related to each of the operation units 600-800.

Whether or not the drive control of each of the operational units 600-800 can be performed is affected by the positioning of the other units. In other words, if the drive of each of the operational units 600-800 is performed at an inappropriate time, the component operations may collide and cause a malfunction, so drive control is performed only after determining the positioning of the components of the other units.

For example, the first operating unit 600 is controlled to change to the extended state when the second operating unit 700 is in any state and the third operating unit 800 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

The change of the first operation unit 600 to the intermediate performance state is controlled so that the state of the second operation unit 700 can be any, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be any, and the rotation operation is executed when it is determined that a switching rotation operation is not occurring.

The second operating unit 700 is controlled to change to the extended state when the first operating unit 600 is in any state and the third operating unit 800 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

The change of the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate performance state is controlled so that the state of the first operation unit 600 can be any, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be any, and the rotation operation is executed when it is determined that a switching rotation operation is not occurring.

The control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and rotation is not performed or only a unitary rotational movement occurs is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state.

The control by which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in a performance standby state and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

As mentioned above, the drive control of each operating unit 600 to 800 is not possible at any time, but is controlled so that it is executed after determining the arrangement of the components of the other units.

Next, the details of the sorting device 300 in the first embodiment will be described. In describing the details of the sorting device 300, reference will be made as appropriate to Figures 1 to 25. First, an example of the decoration applied to the front design member 162 will be described.

Figure 72 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 300. The difference between Figure 72 and Figure 5 above is that the front design member 162 has a light-transmitting window 162d.

As shown in FIG. 72, the front design component 162 arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300 has a front panel formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and a window portion 162d is formed in the central area of the front panel as an area with higher light transmittance than the peripheral area.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting seal member SL1, the central area of which is cut out to match the shape of the window portion 162d, is attached to the front plate of the front design member 162. With this configuration, the front-to-rear thickness of the window portion 162d is thinner than the front-to-rear thickness of the area around it where the seal member SL1 is attached, and since it is possible to vary the degree to which light transmits through the front design member 162, it is possible to increase the light transmittance of the window portion 162d.

The window portion 162d is formed with the primary objective of improving the visibility of the sorting device 300, taking into consideration that when a player looks at the sorting device 300, his or her line of sight passes through the plate portion of the front design member 162, and the secondary objective is to eliminate the dissatisfaction expressed by players that they are unable to grasp the flow pattern of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300. In other words, the window portion 162d is formed with a shape and size that takes into consideration the shape of the sorting device 300.

The means for forming the window portion 162d as a portion having higher light transmittance than the surrounding area is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, a light guide plate may be placed on the plate portion of the front design member 162, or multiple groove patterns may be formed to perform the same function as a light guide plate, so that the appearance of the front design member 162 changes for each light emission pattern of the light emitting means such as LEDs, or a pattern or design may be drawn directly on the front design member 162, or the area corresponding to the window portion 162d of the front design member 162 may be formed as an opening.

The shape of the window portion 162d is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 72, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a band shape extending left and right with the same vertical width, or it may be a shape that omits the part extending outward left and right so that the horizontal width is equal to the horizontal width of the range that protrudes upward (a pentagonal shape like home base), or it may be a shape that follows the shape of the front plate edge of the front design member 162.

Although the window portion 162d is formed as a single area, this is not limiting and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the highly light-transmitting area may be formed by a combination of multiple locations separated by lattice-like or ladder-like sections, the area may be partitioned by multiple aligned small windows, or the area may be partitioned by a disorderly arrangement of window portions. The shape of the window portion may also be variable.

The surface shape of the sealing member SL1 is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a surface shape formed with many projections and recesses, such as a surface shape formed by embossing, or the surface may have many grooves or protrusions, or it may be formed as a smooth surface.

The surface shape of the window portion 162d is preferably formed as a smooth surface, but any shape that ensures higher light transmittance than the surrounding area (corresponding to the formation area of the sealing member SL1) may be used, and various shapes may be adopted in addition to shapes similar to the surface shape of the sealing member SL1 described above.

Figure 73 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. The difference between Figure 73 and the content shown in Figure 21 above is that a light-transmitting window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in FIG. 73, the window portion 162d is formed in a symmetrical shape and includes a main window portion 162d1 that is short vertically and long horizontally, and a sub-window portion 162d2 that is formed above the central portion horizontally of the main window portion 162d1.

In this embodiment, the main window portion 162d1 and the sub-window portion 162d2 are formed from a colorless and transparent resin material and are maintained in a state of high light transmittance. The shape of each portion is described in detail below.

The main window portion 162d1 is designed so that the outer edge shape in a front view is sufficient to ensure visibility of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed with a vertical width equivalent to the vertical width of the spherical passages of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, and is formed into a V-shape that slopes upward toward the left and right outside in accordance with the inclination of the second flow path component 335.

This allows the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 to be contained inside the main window portion 162d1 when viewed from the front, thereby improving the visibility of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

The left and right ends of the main window portion 162d1 are set near the center of the left and right width of the first flow path forming portion 334 (see FIG. 17), which is formed at the same left and right positions as the ball passage hole 163b. In other words, the entire outer wall of the first flow path forming portion 334 is not visible through the main window portion 162d1, and in particular, the visibility of the side wall portion 334a is reduced.

This allows for greater freedom in designing the shape of the side wall 334a compared to when a design is required that will be visible to players, such as when an attractive shape is required.

The outer edge shape of the secondary window portion 162d2 in a front view is designed to be sufficient to ensure visibility of the sealing member 313 illuminated by the light from the light emitting means 351. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed in a rectangular shape that covers the sealing member 313.

This not only improves the visibility of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, but also makes it easy for the player to grasp the state of the sealing member 313 illuminated by the light-emitting means 351, whose lighting timing is controlled based on the manner in which the ball flows down, providing the player with a comfortable gameplay experience.

Figure 74 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in Figure 16, and Figure 75 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along the line LXXV-LXXV in Figure 73. Figures 74 and 75 differ from the contents shown in Figures 23 and 18 above in that a light-transmitting window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in FIG. 74, when the sorting device 300 is viewed from above (at an angle), a portion of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 located at the front position is visible below the opening/closing plate 65b.

In contrast, when the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear position, the upper protrusion 376 is hidden behind the opening and closing plate 65b when viewed from the direction shown in FIG. 74. Therefore, as long as the upper protrusion 376 is visible, the player can easily predict whether the ball that has flowed down the third flow path component 336 will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

The field of view toward the upper protrusion 376 is also well ensured by the fact that the inner surface 314b1 of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes outward to the left and right as it approaches the front side.

In other words, the second upper surface portion 314b functions as a ceiling surface that prevents balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 from bouncing up, while the inner surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface to avoid unnecessary obstruction of the view to the upper protrusion portion 376.

The fact that the inner surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface compensates for the disadvantage of the upper surface 314 being configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward as it approaches the front. When the upper surface 314 is configured as an inclined surface as described above, the projected area of the upper surface 314 when viewed from above (angled direction) as shown in FIG. 74 can be increased, which has the advantage of making it easier to improve the presentation effect of the presentation in which light is visible through the light diffusion processed surface 314c of the upper surface 314. However, there is a disadvantage in that the larger projected area of the upper surface 314 may increase the area over which balls flowing below it are hidden from the player's view.

In other words, while the upper surface 314 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward as it approaches the front, this is advantageous for the light effects, but may be detrimental to the visibility of the balls as they flow down.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the inner surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes outward to the left and right, thereby reducing the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 at the point where the ball enters the third flow path portion 336 from the second flow path portion 335, thereby improving the visibility of the ball flowing down under the upper surface portion 314.

As shown in FIG. 74, when the sorting device 300 is viewed from below (at an angle), the sealing member 313 cannot be seen from inside the secondary window 162d2. Therefore, without any measures, the player will be forced to adjust the position of their eyes or the angle of their line of sight so that the sealing member 313 is visible in order to visually check its condition, which may hinder a comfortable gameplay experience.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the straight line LL1, which serves as the optical axis of the light-emitting means 351 that directs light toward the sealing member 313, passes through the sealing member 313 and the sub-window portion 162d2, and therefore a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 after passing through the sealing member 313. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the light-emitting means 351 on the straight line LL1 is lit or not by looking at the sub-window portion 162d2.

Since the sealing member 313 is not light-diffusing, it has a weak effect of stopping the progression of light from the light-emitting means 351, allowing the light to reach the sub-window 162d2 sufficiently. As a result, when the light-emitting means 351 is turned on, the red light of the sealing member 313 reaches the sub-window 162d2, causing the sub-window 162d2 to glow red.

This makes it easier to see the difference from the colorless and transparent state of the secondary window 162d2 before the light reaches it, making it easier for the player to know whether the light emitting means 351 is lit or not. The sealing member 313 (or the wall portion on which the sealing member 313 is arranged) may be provided with a light diffusion treatment. In this case, it is easier to make the sealing member 313 emit light evenly.

As shown in FIG. 75, the straight line LL1 is positioned (at a height position) so as not to overlap with the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration part 336. In other words, the straight line LL1 is positioned above the range in which the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration part 336 can be positioned.

In addition, the straight line LL1 is positioned so as not to overlap with the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a. In other words, the straight line LL1 is positioned below the lower surface portion 163a on which the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a rests.

Furthermore, as described above, between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, the flow of the ball is hindered by the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7), so the flow range of the ball is shifted to the left and right outside the left and right width of the front design member 141. Therefore, the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 is also prevented from overlapping with the straight line LL1.

Therefore, by arranging balls flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 (e.g., the play area), balls that have entered the specific winning port 65a, and balls flowing down the sorting device 300 (e.g., the third flow path component 336) on the straight line LL1, it is possible to avoid a situation in which light is reflected and refracted by the balls. This allows the light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 to stably reach the secondary window portion 162d2 regardless of the manner in which the balls flow down.

The placement of the sealing member 313 in this embodiment may be to the player's advantage if the sealing member 313 remains difficult to see unless the player changes his or her line of sight.

For example, in a configuration where the sealing member 313 is always within the field of view, light enters the player's eyes every time the light emitting means 351 emits light, which may be dazzling to some players. However, by positioning the light emitting means 351 so that it is difficult to see, as in this embodiment, the glare felt by the player can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the case where the light from the light emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the range where it intersects with the straight line LL1, the fixed member 161 may be provided with a light diffusion treatment to prevent the light from reaching the sub-window portion 162d2.

In this case, it can be configured so that it is difficult to know whether the light emitting means 351 is lit toward the seal member 313 unless the line of sight is changed from the state shown in FIG. 74 to look directly at the seal member 313. Therefore, even if the player does not want to know whether the ball has entered the probability change detection sensor SE11 as a gaming preference, the purpose can be achieved by maintaining the line of sight shown in FIG. 74, and the gaming burden on such a player can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the sub-window portion 162d2 is formed from a smooth surface shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sub-window portion 162d2 may be formed so that at least one of the front and back surfaces is subjected to light diffusion processing, or a bubble portion is provided inside to facilitate light diffusion.

In this case, the light that reaches the sub-window 162d2 is diffused, so that the area of the light that is visible through the sub-window 162d2 can be increased. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the sub-window 162d2 is illuminated.

So far, we have explained the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the light-emitting means 351 that direct light toward the sealing member 313, that is, the LEDs arranged on the straight line LL1. Next, we will explain the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the light-emitting means 351 that are arranged in four locations on the left and right at the bottom row.

Figure 76 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, slide displacement member 370, lower member 380, and detection sensor SE1 of the sorting device 300 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in Figure 75. In Figure 76, the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 is shown by imaginary lines.

In the following explanation, the LEDs arranged on the inner left and right sides of the bottom row of the light-emitting means 351 will be referred to as inner light-emitting means 351c, and the LEDs arranged on the outer left and right sides of the bottom row will be referred to as outer light-emitting means 351d.

First, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the inner light-emitting means 351c is positioned inside the light diffusion surface 332e. Therefore, when light is emitted from the inner light-emitting means 351c, a light-emitting effect is produced in which the light diffusion surface 332e formed over a range extending to the left and right is illuminated.

This light emission effect is performed on the rear side of the branch point BP1 (see Figure 75, a long space that runs continuously from the rear end of the third flow path component 336) where the flow of balls branches off between the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

Therefore, when the inner light-emitting means 351c is lit and the ball flows through the branch point BP1, the location where the ball is positioned in front of the light-diffusing surface 332e, which emits light in a range from left to right, is visible as a shadow, and the player can easily understand how the ball has flowed by visually checking the displacement of the shadow.

The optical axis of the inner light-emitting means 351c passes through the long front-rear protrusion 317 (see FIG. 75). The optical axis does not pass through the left and right inner protrusions 318, but the arrangement allows light near the optical axis to pass through, and the protruding ends of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are curved when viewed in the front-rear and up-down directions.

As a result, a portion of the light emitted from the inner light-emitting means 351 is refracted by the curved shape of the front-to-rear long protrusion 317 and the left-to-right inner protrusion 318, and travels diagonally downward toward the front, and this light can reach the light-diffusing surface 340 (see Figure 75).

Since the light diffusion surface 340 is formed over the entire area of the lower side of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 14), the visibility of the space below the lower bottom surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be reduced by allowing light to reach the light diffusion surface 340. This makes it easier to distinguish between a sphere flowing down the inside of the third flow path forming portion 336 and an out sphere that passes through the outlet 71 (see FIG. 75) and flows down the underside of the third flow path forming portion 336.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the outer light-emitting means 351d is located outside (above) the light diffusion surface 332e and inside the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b. Therefore, when light is irradiated from the outer light-emitting means 351d, a light-emitting effect is produced in which the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated.

This light emission effect is performed above and in front of the branch point BP1 (see Figure 75, a long space that runs continuously from the rear end of the third flow path component 336) where the flow of balls branches off between the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

Therefore, when the outer light-emitting means 351d is lit and a ball passes through the branch point BP1, the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b above and in front of the ball will emit light, and the ball passing through the branch point BP1 will be hidden by the light diffusion surface 333b (see Figure 17), making it difficult for the player to understand how the ball passed through the branch point BP1.

In addition, the light diffusion surface 333b is formed from top to bottom, and the light diffusion surface 314c of the upper surface portion 314 is disposed above it (see FIG. 73). Therefore, in addition to making the branch point BP1 difficult to see when viewed from the front to back, the light emitted by the light diffusion surface 314c can also make the branch point BP1 difficult to see when viewed from above at an angle looking into the light diffusion surface 333b (see FIG. 74).

The light diffusion surface 333b is formed from top to bottom, and light diffusion surface 340 is disposed below it, and this light diffusion surface 340 is formed on the lower back surface of the second flow path component 335 (see FIG. 14). Therefore, apart from the effect of making it difficult to see the branch point BP1 when viewed from the front to back, the lower surface of the second flow path component 335 is illuminated, and as the ball flows down the second flow path component 335, a shadow is created by the ball blocking the light (light diffused by light diffusion surface 340), making it easier for the player to understand that the ball is flowing down.

Here, the light diffusion surface 333b is disposed in front of the branch point BP1 (see Figures 17 and 75). Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion surface 333b, a situation may occur in which the light is obscured by the sphere. However, in this embodiment, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-to-rear direction) of the outer light emitting means 351d is disposed outside (above) the range in which the sphere flows down the branch point BP1 (see Figure 76), so it is possible to avoid a situation in which the light is obscured by the sphere disposed at the branch point BP1.

Therefore, regardless of the flow pattern of the balls inside the sorting device 300, the light diffusion surface 333b can be brightly illuminated by illuminating the outer light emitting means 351d. When the light diffusion surface 333b is illuminated, the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 (see FIG. 17) located in front of it block the light, creating a shadow, making it easier for the player to grasp the flow pattern of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335.

In this embodiment, a structure is used to smooth the flow of the balls downward as a measure to prevent the light from being blocked by the balls placed at the branch point BP1. This structure will be explained.

When the ball reaches the branch point BP1 and flows down, if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position (see FIG. 20), it flows straight down and passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11, and if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position (see FIG. 18), it flows down to the left and right sides along the inclination of the ball guide portion 371b and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

When the ball flows down with the sliding displacement member 370 positioned in the front position, the through-hole edge 382a of the plate-shaped part 382 supporting the left and right outer ends of the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged to connect the left and right outer edges of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the left and right inner edges of the normal detection sensor SE12, and the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outside. Therefore, the ball that reaches the upper surface of the through-hole edge 382a is configured to easily flow down to the left and right outside.

This makes it easier to prevent the ball, which starts to flow down the inclination of the ball guide portion 371b to the left and right, from flowing back to the left and right inward or bouncing after being bridged to the through-hole edge portion 382a, and allows the ball to flow down smoothly.

The light diffusion surface 319a is disposed inside the front-to-rear width of the branch point BP1. Therefore, a situation in which a sphere is placed on the rear side of the light diffusion surface 319a cannot occur, so the situation in which the light is obscured by the sphere is unlikely to occur regardless of the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion surface 319a.

In this way, the inner light-emitting means 351c and the outer light-emitting means 351d are not simply arranged offset to the left and right, but are designed with an intentional difference in the positional relationship between the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b arranged in different front-to-back positions in front of them and the optical axes of the light-emitting means 351c, 351d. By making the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b that the light from the light-emitting means 351c, 351d reaches different positions, the front-to-back positions at which the light reaches, is diffused, and is visible can be made different.

In the above explanation, the case where the inner light-emitting means 351c is illuminated and the case where the outer light-emitting means 351d is illuminated are explained separately, and the explanation was given on the assumption that the light-emitting means 351c, 351d on the opposite side are turned off. However, in actuality, the light emission control of each of the light-emitting means 351c, 351d is not performed one by one, and control modes such as both being turned on or both being turned off may also occur. Below, the light emission control patterns and how the internal flow path of the sorting device 300 appears at that time are explained.

Figures 77(a) to 77(d) are front perspective views of the inner member 330 of the sorting device 300. In Figures 77(a) to 77(d), in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the lines of the light diffusing surface is omitted, and different combinations of the light emitting means 351c and 351d being turned on and off are illustrated, and the areas that are brightly lit by the light from the light emitting means 351c and 351d are illustrated with a crosshatched pattern.

That is, FIG. 77(a) illustrates a state in which both light-emitting means 351c and 351d are turned off, FIG. 77(b) illustrates an inner light-emitting state in which the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned on and the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned off, FIG. 77(c) illustrates an outer light-emitting state in which the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned off and the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned on, and FIG. 77(d) illustrates a state in which both light-emitting means 351c and 351d are turned on.

As shown in Figure 77(a), when both lights are off, the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are not illuminated, and although visibility is ensured on the rear side, the player is given a dull impression. In particular, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the balls flowing above the third flow path component 336 and the out balls flowing down the rear (lower) side of the third flow path component 336.

When the inside is lit, as shown in FIG. 77(b), the light diffusion surface 340 on the lower side of the third flow path component 336 is illuminated, thereby maintaining high visibility of the balls flowing above the third flow path component 336 and reducing visibility of the out balls flowing down the back side (lower side) of the third flow path component 336.

Furthermore, because the light diffusion surface 332e is illuminated on the rear side of the branch point BP1, the visibility of the flow of the balls at the branch point BP1 can be improved. Moreover, the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b arranged in front of the light diffusion surface 332e are kept in an unilluminated state, so that the branch point BP1 can be prevented from being blinded by light.

In other words, when the inside is lit, the area from the third flow path configuration portion 336 to the branch point BP1 is illuminated with light, and the line of sight to see the branch point BP1 also passes through the front frame portion 333, making it easier for the player to grasp the flow pattern of the balls at the branch point BP1. Also, because the light is lit on the points that require attention in grasping the flow pattern of the balls, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will miss the points of interest, and it is possible to reduce the stress of the player while playing the game.

A light-diffusing surface 333b is formed over the entire inner surface of the front frame portion 333 (see Figure 13), making it difficult for the player to see through the front frame portion 333 to see behind them.

When looking through the front frame portion 333 to see behind, when looking in the front-to-back direction, you see through two side surfaces of the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 that are arranged opposite each other at the front and rear, so since there are many plates that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to see the back side.

The same can be said for a player who tries to see through to the back of the front frame portion 333 with a line of sight that is inclined from the inside left and right to the outside left and right (a line of sight that is inclined from the center position on the front left and right toward the normal detection sensor SE12).

In other words, in this embodiment, the light diffusion surface 333b is formed along the inside of the rectangular tube shape, and the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 and the left and right inner side surfaces (the side surfaces facing the partition plate portion 338) are located on this inclined line of sight. Therefore, since there are many plates through which it is necessary to see through, it is even more difficult to see the rear side.

In this way, the front frame portion 333 makes it difficult to see through to the rear side of the front frame portion 333 not only when viewed from the front-to-rear direction, but also when viewed from an oblique direction.

When the outside light is on, as shown in FIG. 77(c), the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated, so the balls that flow outward to the left and right at the branch point BP1 are hidden by the light, reducing the visibility of the flowing balls.

On the other hand, the light diffusion surface 340 formed on the rear (lower) side of the second flow path component 335 is illuminated, improving the visibility of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335. In other words, when the external lighting is on, improving the visibility of the balls flowing on the front side has the effect of increasing the player's attention, but the visibility of the branch point BP1 itself is reduced.

In both lighting states, as shown in FIG. 77(d), the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are illuminated over a wide area. The situation in which light is lit is a combination of the inside lighting state and the outside lighting state, and the effects of both can be produced, but they do not always complement each other with advantageous effects.

For example, because the light diffusion surface 333b is illuminated, the feature that the spheres flowing to the left and right outside the branch point BP1 are hidden by light is inherited from the external lighting state. Therefore, in order to increase the visibility of the branch point BP1, it is optimal to maintain the internal lighting state.

Various control modes for turning on and off the light emitting means 351c, 351d are exemplified. For example, in a round game where there is a possibility that a ball will enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 76) during a jackpot game, control may be performed to configure an inner lighting state so that the player can easily notice the branch point BP1, and in other round games, control may be performed to configure an outer lighting state or both lighting states to make the overall light brighter.

Also, for example, the control may be such that both lights are switched on and both lights are switched off, regardless of the type of round of play.

The timing of lighting the light emitting means 351c, 351d is not limited to round play, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the light emitting means 351c, 351d may be controlled to light up after the reach is upright during the pattern change, or the light emitting means 351c, 351d may be controlled to light up when it is detected that a ball has entered the winning hole 63, 64, 140, 65a or the through gate 67.

Returning to Figure 75 from Figure 73, the configuration for optimizing the flow of balls near the specific winning opening 65a will be described in detail again. As shown in Figure 73, the upper surface of the extension portion 162b located on the left and right outer sides of the opening and closing plate 65b is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outer sides.

Therefore, regardless of whether the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open or closed state, balls that have deviated to the left or right outside of the opening/closing plate 65b and landed on the upper surface of the extension part 162b can be diverted to the left or right outside (the side opposite the side where the opening/closing plate 65b is located), so it is possible to prevent balls on the extension part 162b from flowing down past the front side of the specific winning opening 65a.

As a result, the majority of the balls flowing down to the outlet 71 can be made to roll on the inner rail 61, which makes it possible to prevent the balls from bouncing up (bouncing high) near the outlet 71. This makes it possible to prevent the main window portion 162d1 and the third flow path component 336 located behind it from being obscured by the bouncing up balls, thereby reducing visibility.

As shown in FIG. 74, the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b in the open/closed state is formed as a flat surface extending in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second flow path component 335 is inclined downward toward the left-right center (the partition plate portion 338 side).

Therefore, the closer to the left-right center, the longer the vertical distance between the opening/closing plate 65b and the second flow path component 335, making it easier to distinguish between a ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b and a ball flowing from the second flow path component 335 toward the third flow path component 336.

As shown in Figure 74, the opening and closing plate 65b is shaped to funnel all balls placed on the upper surface into the specific winning opening 65a without any leakage, but various design features have been implemented to prevent the flow of balls from being delayed.

For example, first, the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is a plate-shaped portion that comes into contact with the ball flowing rearward from the upper side surfaces of the left and right ends of the opening and closing plate 65b, and guides the ball inward to the left and right. The guide plate portion 163a2 is not a plate-shaped portion that extends horizontally, but is formed as a plate-shaped portion that extends in a direction that slopes downward to the left and right inward in accordance with the vertical displacement of the ball flowing from the opening and closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163.

In other words, the front end of the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed as an inclined surface that is positioned further back as it moves inward on the left and right, and extends in a slanted direction so that the left and right inner parts where the ball that is handed over to the receiving member 163, which has a lower floor than the opening and closing plate 65b, comes into contact are positioned lower than the left and right outer ends where the ball resting on the opening and closing plate 65b comes into contact.

This makes it possible to stabilize the contact position of the ball that contacts the guide plate portion 163a2 (contact height over the entire length of the ball), and to guide the ball smoothly. In this embodiment, the position of the guide plate portion 163a2 is designed in relation to the opening/closing plate 65b and the floor surface of the receiving member 163 so that the ball can contact the guide plate portion 163a2 at the center height over the entire length of the ball.

For example, secondly, the height relationship between the rear end of the upper side of the opening/closing plate 65b (the base end side of the rotation) and the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163 is configured to be reversed midway. That is, at the center position in the left-right direction where the height position of the lower surface 163a is the highest, the height position of the opening/closing plate 65b is lower, but the lower surface 163a slopes downward toward the left and right, and is configured to be reversed up and down at a pair of switching positions EP1 on the outside in the left-right width direction.

In this embodiment, the switching position EP1 has the property of being a position that switches the flow pattern of the balls between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163, and is designed to be a position on the same plane as the left and right inner surfaces of the front frame portion 333 (the side surfaces facing the partition plate portion 338) (directly above the front frame portion 333 in Figure 74).

In the left and right inner range of the switching position EP1 (the range between the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), the ball's rolling from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 is suppressed due to the relationship between the upper and lower positions of the ball's rolling surface, while the ball can roll from the receiving member 163 to the opening/closing plate 65b with little resistance.

For example, even if a ball bounces backward near the center position of the opening/closing plate 65b, collides with the receiving member 163 (on its inner rear surface) and bounces forward again, the ball can be prevented from climbing up from the opening/closing plate 65b onto the receiving member 163 after the ball stops bouncing and begins to roll.

The ball that rolls from the opening/closing plate 65b towards the receiving member 163 does not ride up onto the receiving member 163, but when the ball starts to come into contact with the lower surface 163a, the ball is swept outward to the left and right along the left and right inclination of the lower surface 163a.

The ball is unlikely to fall near the center of the left and right sides of the opening and closing plate 65b because the front design member 141 (see Figure 7) prevents the ball from falling, so it can be said that the ball is also unlikely to bounce. However, balls may bounce due to collisions between balls.

In the left and right outer range of switching position EP1 (the range outside the pair of left and right switching positions EP1 to the left and right (the side where ball passage hole 163b is located)), the ball is restricted from rolling from the receiving member 163 to the opening and closing plate 65b due to the relationship between the vertical positions of the ball rolling surface, while the ball can roll from the opening and closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 with little resistance. For example, even if a ball rolling on the lower surface 163a is accelerated forward due to a collision with another ball or vibration of the gaming machine, the ball can be prevented from flowing back toward the opening and closing plate 65b.

To summarize the description of the switching position EP1, the range in which the ball can roll forward from the receiving member 163 side is limited to the range between a pair of switching positions EP1, which prevents the ball from flowing back near the ball passage hole 163b and allows the ball to flow smoothly downward, thereby preventing the ball from becoming stuck.

In addition, the ball's backward rolling from the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 does not begin to flow backward and then switch to a left-right flow, but rather rolls along a diagonal straight line connecting the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 and the ball passage hole 163b.

In other words, instead of flowing along paths that intersect at right angles, such as in the front-to-back and left-to-right directions, the balls can flow along the hypotenuse that connects the ends of a front-to-back line and a left-to-right line, one end of which is located in the same position, thereby shortening the path along which the balls roll (this is equivalent to the length of the hypotenuse being shorter than the sum of the lengths of the other two sides of a right triangle).

Furthermore, compared to when balls tend to flow backwards between the left and right positions of the opening and closing plate 65b, this embodiment is configured so that balls tend to flow forwards in the range between a pair of switching positions EP1, making it easier to avoid the flow of balls becoming stagnant even when multiple balls enter the receiving member 163 at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 75, the receiving member 163 is not formed in the ranges on the left and right outside of the pair of switching positions EP1 (see FIG. 16), but has an upper surface portion 163f formed in a plate shape that slopes upward to leave a space in front of the range on the left and right center side of the pair of switching positions EP1.

The upper surface portion 163f is a device designed to lower the possibility of balls becoming stuck in the area between the pair of switching positions EP1 by raising the position of the lower surface portion 163a, and the upper surface portion 163f ensures that the vertical width of the space in which the balls are placed is sufficient.

This makes it possible to prevent ball jamming in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, and to avoid the ball becoming caught between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 when the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to close with a ball on it.

The symmetrical protrusion 161f extends left and right in a direction that follows the inclination angle of the second flow path component 335 (a direction inclined 5 degrees from the horizontal), and is disposed at a position that abuts the ball at the center height position of the entire length of the ball rolling on the second flow path component 335 (a position 5.5 mm higher than the floor bottom of the second flow path component 335).

As a result, when the thickness of the symmetrical protrusion 161f is minimized to ensure the visibility of the branch point BP1, the ball abuts against the symmetrical protrusion 161f at a position that is off the center height of the ball, allowing the ball to roll more smoothly compared to when a load in the direction of lifting the ball or pressing the ball against the floor is applied to the ball from the symmetrical protrusion 161f.

If reduced visibility of branch point BP1 is acceptable, the thickness of symmetrical protrusion 161f can be made approximately the full length of the sphere to prevent the symmetrical protrusion 161f from contacting the sphere at a position that is off center height.

Next, the sliding displacement member 370 and its surrounding structure will be described in detail. Figure 78 is a top view of the middle member 330, state switching device 360, sliding displacement member 370, and lower member 380. In Figure 78, to facilitate understanding, the middle member 330 is shown as transparent with imaginary lines, and the sliding displacement member 370 disposed below the middle member 330 can be seen through.

The sliding displacement member 370 is a member that slides and displaces in the forward and backward directions at the branch point BP1, but its front end does not come into contact with the side of the discharge hole 337 that it faces even in the front position (see Figure 78), and a gap is maintained. The gap is formed to be short enough to prevent the ball from entering the probability change detection sensor SE11.

This achieves the goal of preventing the ball from entering the chance change detection sensor SE11 while avoiding the front end of the slide displacement member 370 being scraped or deformed by contact with the side of the discharge hole 337.

In addition, the front end of the sliding displacement member 370, i.e., the front end of the thin plate portion 371, is inclined so that the position shifts rearward as it moves outward to the left and right. This makes it easier to prevent the ball from being pinched and stuck between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side of the discharge hole 337.

In other words, even if a ball is caught between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side of the discharge hole 337, the front end of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface, so the load acting on the ball has a directional component toward the left and right outside, and the ball can be pushed outward to the left and right. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from clogging.

Next, referring to Figure 79, we will explain the innovations in guiding the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370. Because the player's profits can change depending on the positioning of the sliding displacement member 370, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 must be reproducible (stable) and smooth.

Figure 79(a) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in Figure 78, Figure 79(b) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in Figure 78, and Figure 79(c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in Figure 78. In the explanation of Figure 79, Figures 13 and 14 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 on the front side of the upper protrusion portion 376 is formed as an inclined surface that is positioned lower toward the left and right outer sides, and the balls can flow along this inclination. In this embodiment, in order to stabilize the flow of the balls rolling along this inclined surface, the slide displacement member 370 is configured to suppress changes in its posture that would change the inclination of the inclined surface.

That is, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370 is supported not only at both the left and right ends, but also at the lower protrusion portion 373 against the plate-like portion 382 of the lower member 380. This allows each of the pair of ball guide portions 371b, which are divided into left and right portions by the recessed portion 372, to be supported from below on both the left and right sides (supported by both ends), thereby suppressing changes in the posture of the sliding displacement member 370.

In other words, even if the load applied by the balls to the pair of left and right ball guide sections 371b is different (even if an unbalanced number of balls are placed on the balls), each ball guide section 371b is supported at both the left and right ends, so that tilting to the left and right of the ball guide sections 371b and the sliding displacement member 370 (displacement in the rotational direction around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction) can be suppressed.

In addition, the partition plate 338 is disposed on the upper side of the edge of the recessed portion 372, so that the upward displacement is restricted. In other words, the lifting movement of the sliding displacement member 370 and the tilt displacement in the backward tilt direction can be suppressed.

This makes it easier to maintain the proper posture of the sliding displacement member 370, suppresses the resistance to displacement in the forward and backward directions, and prevents malfunction of the sliding displacement member 370.

The ball guide portion 371b is a plate-like portion formed on the protruding base end side of the upper protruding portion 376, and the upper surface on which the ball can roll is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outside.

The contact between the ball guide portion 371b and the protrusion portion 383 is configured to be point contact. That is, in this embodiment, a pair of semi-spherical protrusions 372a protrude from the recessed portion 372 toward the protrusion portion 383, and when the gap is filled, the semi-spherical protrusions 372a and the protrusion portion 383 are configured to be in point contact.

As described above, the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, on which the ball can roll, is formed as an inclined surface that slopes in the left-right direction, so that the load applied to the ball guide portion 371b by the weight of the ball is resolved into an up-down component and a left-right component, and the left-right component can displace the sliding displacement member 370 in the left-right direction (a direction that intersects with the front-rear direction, which is the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370).

At this time, while it is preferable to reduce the left-right gap between the recessed portion 372 of the sliding displacement member 370 and the protruding portion 383, as this makes it easier to stabilize the left-right position of the ball guide portion 371b, it also makes it easier for contact friction to occur, which may result in functional problems.

For example, when the sliding displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward/backward direction while the ball is resting on the ball guide portion 371b, excessively large contact friction may result in poor forward/backward displacement (e.g., no displacement may occur).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the semispherical protrusion 372a and the ridge 383 are configured to make point contact, so the area over which frictional force occurs can be reduced, and contact friction can be kept small. This allows the sliding displacement member 370 to be smoothly displaced in the forward and backward directions even when the ball is resting on the ball guide portion 371b.

In particular, the forward/backward displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 when a ball is placed on the ball guide portion 371b is a displacement operation that switches the state from one in which the ball cannot enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 to one in which the ball can enter the probability change detection sensor SE11, so by executing this displacement operation well, it is possible to avoid the player suffering any disadvantages.

Furthermore, by setting the displacement speed of this displacement operation to a high speed, it is possible to produce an effect of changing the rotation of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward and backward directions.

Figures 80(a) and 80(b) are side views of the slide displacement member 370 and a ball resting on the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b. Figure 80(a) illustrates a state in which the ball is resting on the slide displacement member 370 in the front position, and Figure 80(b) illustrates a state in which the slide displacement member 370 has been displaced to the rear position. In Figures 80(a) and 80(b), an example of the rotation direction of the ball is illustrated by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the ball rolls backward and reaches the slide displacement member 370 with the ball rotating in a forward direction. When the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) is driven so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced forward or backward to the rear position while the ball is resting on the slide displacement member 370, the load applied to the ball from the slide displacement member 370 acts to reverse the ball's rotation direction (guiding direction) (backward direction).

This makes it possible to suppress the rotation of the ball, so that the ball can be easily subjected to the action of gravity, making it easier for the ball to fall straight down. Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is driven with a ball resting on it, the ball can be easily made to flow down to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

The long front-rear projection 317 has the function of guiding the ball that has reached the branch point BP1 toward the slide displacement member 370. In other words, the long front-rear projection 317 does not only have the function of guiding the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11, but is configured as a shape that can appropriately guide the ball regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370 that is placed upstream of the probability change detection sensor SE11.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the rear position, the ball that abuts against the long front-rear protrusion 317 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 due to the path configuration. At this time, the curve at the end of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is made into an approximately arc shape with a front-rear width longer than the up-down width (see Figure 18), so the abutting ball is subjected to a load whose downward component is greater than the forward component. This makes it possible to prevent the ball that abuts against the long front-rear protrusion 317 from bouncing back in the front-rear direction and flowing backward through the third flow path configuration section 336.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the front position, the direction in which the ball flows down is left to the shape of the slide displacement member 370. In this embodiment, the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 forms a curved surface that curves outward to the left and right, so the ball is guided outward to the left and right along this curve.

When the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the forward position, if a ball moving forward and backward collides with the sliding displacement member 370 with its momentum, the sliding displacement member 370 may be pushed backwards by the load of the collision, and the state may switch to one in which the ball can pass to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the ball abuts against the front-rear long protrusion 317 before colliding with the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370, correcting the ball's speed direction downward. Therefore, the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 due to the load from the ball is mainly downward, making it easier to avoid the sliding displacement member 370 being pushed backward.

In addition, because the load applied by the ball in the direction of displacing the slide displacement member 370 rearward is reduced, the biasing force (the biasing force of the return spring of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13)) for maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the front position can be reduced, and the electromagnetic force that drives the plunger against that biasing force can be reduced. As a result, the design freedom of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be improved.

Even if the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position while a ball is placed at the branch point BP1, it is easy to prevent the ball from flowing back.

The left and right inner protrusions 318 come into contact with the ball forward of the front displacement end position of the upper protrusion 376, and the momentum of the ball is directed downward outward to the left and right. Furthermore, the momentum of the ball is directed downward by the front-to-rear long protrusions 317. This reduces the forward and rearward speed of the ball, stabilizing the position due to inertia caused by its own weight, and making it difficult for the ball to flow back under the load applied by the sliding displacement member 370.

Furthermore, the ball comes into contact with the upper protrusion 376 when it is lower than the height position at which it comes into contact with the front-rear long protrusion 317. However, when the ball is lowered enough to come into contact with the upper protrusion 376 (see FIG. 80(a)), the point at which the ball comes into contact is the ball guide 371b, which is located at a lower position than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336. As a result, even if the ball is displaced forward due to a load in the front-rear direction from the upper protrusion 376, a considerable amount of energy is required to get from the upper side of the ball guide 371b to the lower bottom surface 336a, so the degree of backflow of the ball can be reduced.

The front end of the upper protrusion 376 on the partition plate 338 side is formed at an acute angle, so the flat surface does not collide head-on with the ball in the front-to-rear direction (see FIG. 78). In other words, the load applied to the ball from the upper protrusion 376 is large in the left-to-right direction and small in the front-to-rear direction.

This allows the ball that comes into contact with the upper protrusion 376 to flow smoothly outward to the left and right, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball gets caught between the upper protrusion 376 and the front side of the discharge hole 337, causing malfunction, when the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace from the rear position to the front position with a ball placed at the branch point BP1.

Referring back to Figures 78, 79(b), and 79(c), the explanation will be given below. Since the slide displacement member 370 is configured to protrude toward the branch point BP1 (front side), there is a possibility that the slide displacement member 370 may be displaced in a forward tilt direction due to the weight of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the portion formed rearward of the upper protrusion 376, i.e., the portion formed on both the left and right sides with the upper and lower protrusions 374 extending from front to rear, has a sufficient front-to-rear width and is configured to be able to abut against the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 over that front-to-rear width. This makes it possible to prevent the sliding displacement member 370 from tilting forward.

In addition, because the upper and lower protrusions 374 are long in the front-to-rear direction, when a load is applied to tilt the sliding displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction, the load applied to the rear frame portion 332 can be prevented from concentrating at one point. This makes it possible to suppress deformation of the sliding displacement member 370 (increasing rigidity).

In addition, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at a front position where the ball can rest on the ball guide portion 371b, the front side of the protrusion portion (hereinafter also referred to as protrusion portion 378a) in which the recessed portion 378 is formed abuts against the rear side of the partition plate portion 338.

In other words, the front position of the slide displacement member 370 is set as a position where the front side of the protrusion 378a abuts against the rear side of the partition plate 338. For this purpose, the rear side of the partition plate 338 does not have a light diffusion surface, and the surfaces that are arranged opposite the protrusion 378a at the front and rear and can abut against each other are formed as flat surfaces. This makes it possible to stabilize the position of the slide displacement member 370 in the front position.

The lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is disposed inside the recessed portion 378, so that the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 transmitted via the lower cylindrical portion 363c is applied to the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 via the front flesh portion of the protruding portion 378a.

In this way, since the driving force is transmitted to the left-right center of the sliding displacement member 370, the driving force can be transmitted to the sliding displacement member 370 in a well-balanced manner. In other words, it is easy to prevent the sliding displacement member 370 from shifting in the rotational direction about the vertical axis when displacing in the forward/backward direction.

Furthermore, the front side of the protrusion 378a is pressed against the rear side of the partition plate 338, making it easier to correct the position of the slide displacement member 370 in the rotational direction around the vertical axis.

Here, when maintaining or returning the position of the sliding displacement member 370 by abutting the partition plate portion 338 with the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a, the contact area between the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a is small, so the load is applied locally, which may deteriorate the durability of the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, even if the slide displacement member 370 has a rotational positional deviation about the vertical axis before the front surface of the protrusion 378a is pressed against the rear surface of the partition plate 338, the transmission of the driving force can eliminate the positional deviation of the slide displacement member 370 as the front surface of the protrusion 378a comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the partition plate 338, and the slide displacement member 370 can be corrected to the correct position.

The partition plate portion 338 against the protrusion portion 378a serves the purpose of aligning the sliding displacement member 370 by abutting against it when it is displaced in the forward and backward directions, and also functions as a portion that bears the load applied to the sliding displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction.

In other words, when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position, if a load is generated in a direction that changes the posture of the sliding displacement member 370 in a forward tilt direction due to the weight of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b, when the protruding portion 378a begins to displace (displace in a forward tilt direction) within the allowable gap of the sliding displacement member 370, the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

In this case, resistance is applied in the opposite direction from the rear side of the partition plate portion 338 to the protruding portion 378a, suppressing the displacement of the protruding portion 378a, thereby suppressing the change in the posture of the sliding displacement member 370.

Next, we will explain the details of each operating unit 600, 700, and 800 that were not explained in detail. First, we will explain the rotating member 620 as a detailed explanation of the first operating unit 600.

Figure 81(a) is a front view of the rotating member 620, Figure 81(b) is a rear view of the rotating member 620, and Figure 81(c) is a side view of the rotating member 620 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIc in Figure 81(a).

Furthermore, FIG. 82 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 83 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. In FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which displaces along the guide elongated hole 616, is shown positioned at the right end of the displacement range.

As shown in Figures 81(a) to 81(c), the rotating member 620 is designed to have an asymmetric shape in relation to the load applied to the rotating member 620 when performing an operation. Details of the rotating member 620 and the action on the rotating member 620 are described below.

The main body 621 of the rotating member 620 has a first side 621a, a second side 621b, and a third side 621c as flat sides that receive a load when stopped. The first side 621a, the second side 621b, and the third side 621c are formed in order from closest to the cylindrical portion 622.

The first side surface 621a is a side surface formed on the tilting displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that can abut on the base end protrusion 617a that protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the front side with a U-shaped cross section (the shape is designed in relation to the base end protrusion 617a). The displacement of the first side surface 621a is restricted by the base end protrusion 617a, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 45 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range).

The second side surface 621b is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that can abut on the tip side protrusion 617b that protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the front side with a U-shaped cross section (the shape is designed in relation to the tip side protrusion 617b). The displacement of the second side surface 621b is restricted by the tip side protrusion 617b, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range).

The third side surface 621c is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that allows it to come into contact with the rectangular box portion 618, which is formed in a roughly rectangular box shape on the front side of the front cover member 612 (its shape is designed in relation to the rectangular box portion 618). The displacement of the third side surface 621c is restricted by the rectangular box portion 618, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of its displaceable range).

In this way, at the displacement end of the rotating member 620, each side surface 621a to 621c of the rotating member 620 abuts against a corresponding portion of the front cover member 612, restricting the displacement. In particular, multiple abutment points are formed at the displacement end of the rising side of the rotating member 620.

The purpose of forming multiple contact points in this way is to distribute the rotational load received at the time of contact among multiple points, and to suppress deformation of the rotating member 620 in the front-to-rear direction by distributing the front-to-rear load that may occur on the rotating member 620 among multiple points.

Examples of loads in the forward and backward directions that may occur on the rotating member 620 include a load in the forward direction caused by the weight of the second decorative rotating member 660, and a torsional load caused by inertia when the second decorative rotating member 660 stops rotating (a load in the rotational direction around the longitudinal axis of the rotating member 620).

In particular, since the load in the forward falling direction is a load in the forward tilt direction with the tubular portion 622 as the fulcrum, by taking the force moment into consideration, the load generated at the abutment position where the load is received becomes smaller as the abutment position is farther away from the tubular portion 622. With the aim of reducing the load generated at the abutment position, the second side surface 621b and the third side surface 621c are formed at positions away from the tubular portion 622.

The main body 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a recessed portion 621d formed in a direction retracting from the driving motor 631 to avoid interference with the driving motor 631, and a thickened portion 621e formed by increasing the thickness to include the range that includes the recessed portion 621d and that abuts against the base end protrusion 617a as a rotating portion centered on the cylindrical portion 622.

The base end of the rotating member 620 is narrowed by the recess 621d, so there is a possibility that it may break due to impact load without any countermeasures. However, the thickened portion 621e offsets the effect of the recess 621d on strength. This makes it easier to avoid breakage of the rotating member 620.

Furthermore, the thickened portion 621e is formed in a range that includes a portion that can come into contact with the base end protrusion 617a, thereby improving the durability of the rotating member 620 against impact loads that may occur between the rotating member 620 and the base end protrusion 617a.

Figure 84 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 85 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. Figures 84 and 85 show the state in which the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1.

The extension portion 634b is formed with a width (circumferential length) that is three or more times longer than the width of the detection sensor KS1 when viewed from the rear. Here, making the width of the extension portion 634b sufficiently long has a structural purpose in addition to the purpose of using it for detection.

In other words, in this embodiment, the supported member 640 is connected to the front side of the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged in front of the supported member 640. Therefore, a load can be applied to the rotating member 620 in the forward falling direction. If no countermeasure is taken, the rotating member 620 may bend and deform in the front-to-rear direction, which may cause malfunction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the extension 634b, which is disposed opposite the back surface of the fixed means 610, is formed in a wide shape behind the cylindrical portion 634a connected to the rotating member 620. This allows the load applied from the extension 634b to the fixed means 610 via the cylindrical portion 634a in the forward tilt direction of the rotating member 620 to be received over a wide angle range of the arc-shaped hole 613d (a large area over which the load is generated can be ensured). This reduces the load received per unit area, making it possible to prevent damage to the extension 634b while suppressing the forward tilt displacement of the rotating member 620.

In this embodiment, while a structural advantage can be achieved by ensuring a long width of the extension portion 634b, the structure is designed so that even in a control mode in which the drive of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction is stopped when the end of the extension portion 634b is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 84), the rotating member 620 reaches the terminal position on the initial position side (see FIG. 40) due to a load such as inertia.

For example, first, the inertial force of each component is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to a terminal position on the initial position side. Not only the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 itself, but also the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 rotated clockwise around the axis O1 as viewed from behind is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to a terminal position on the initial position side (a direction that rotates the rotating member 620 counterclockwise as viewed from behind).

For example, secondly, the center of gravity of the front rotating member 652 (which in this embodiment is the same as the center of the protruding decorative portion 652b) that is arranged to operate integrally with the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a that constitute the gear mechanism via the intermediate gear 644 is positioned at a position away from the vertical position of the axis O1 that serves as the rotation axis of the gear teeth 654a to the left and right.

Therefore, the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in a direction that rotates the gear teeth 654a. In this embodiment, the gear teeth 654a are subjected to a load in a direction that rotates counterclockwise when viewed from behind due to the weight of the front rotating member 652.

This load is transmitted in sequence to the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth portion 625, and a load in the direction of rotation counterclockwise in rear view is applied to the rotating member 620 via the gear teeth portion 625. In other words, as a load different from the inertia of the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, a load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to the terminal position on the initial position side.

In this way, due to the inertial load acting on the rotating member 620 and the load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652, a load that rotates the rotating member 620 is generated even after the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85, even if the drive motor 631 is controlled to be de-energized when the extension portion 634b is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 and the rotating member 620 has not yet reached the displacement end position, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 continues due to the above-mentioned load, and the rotating member 620 can be caused to reach the displacement end position on the initial position side (see FIG. 40).

Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b) and 88 are rear views of the guide slot 616, the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the detection sensor KS1 and the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634.

Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b) and 88 show in chronological order the rotational movement of the transmission gear cam 634 starting from the performance standby state of the first operating unit 600.

Note that Figure 86(a) corresponds to the performance standby state of the first operating unit 600, Figure 86(b) corresponds to the state shown in Figure 85, Figure 87(a) corresponds to the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600, Figure 87(b) corresponds to the state shown in Figure 83, and Figure 88 corresponds to the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

The arrangement of the electrical wiring passing through the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will now be described. The electrical wiring 618d, the end of which is fixed to a connector 618c arranged on a board housed in the rectangular box portion 618, is arranged to pass through the opening C2a and enter the second decorative rotating member 660.

The electrical wiring 618d is arranged to bypass the underside of the partition 619 that protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the base member 611 (see FIG. 39) and enter the opening C2a. The electrical wiring 618b is configured with a length that takes into account the movement trajectory of the dish-shaped cover portion C2 that has the opening C2a, and is arranged between the connector 618c and the opening C2a so that it bends under its own weight.

The partition 619 has pillars 619a formed at both the top and bottom ends, and a plate-like portion 619b that protrudes in a long plate shape to connect the pillars 619a. The pillars 619a and the plate portion 619b abut against the front side of the base member 611.

A female screw is formed on the inside of the columnar portion 619a, and a fastening screw is screwed through an opening drilled in the base member 611 in an arrangement corresponding to the columnar portion 619a, thereby fastening and fixing the base member 611 and the front cover member 612. In other words, the partition portion 619 not only serves to restrict the position of the electrical wiring 618d, but also ensures the rigidity of the base member 611 and the front cover member 612.

Next, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d will be described, with particular attention paid to the movement of the opening C2a. First, the description will focus on the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which begins in Figure 86(a). The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is downwardly displaced in the time sequence of Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88.

When moving from the performance standby state (see FIG. 86(a)) to the state where the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 86(b)), the vertical arrangement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 does not change significantly, but the arrangement of the opening C2a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from behind.

This allows the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a to be moved away from the partition 619 before the dish-shaped lid portion C2 begins to move downward in earnest, thereby preventing the electrical wiring 618d from becoming pinched between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition 619 during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In particular, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 are closest to each other (see FIG. 87(b)), the opening C2a is oriented so as to face the side (downward) where the electrical wiring 618d is retracted from the partition portion 619.

This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being pinched between the partition 619, so even if the dish-shaped lid C2 is designed to be positioned close to the partition 619, it is possible to avoid problems such as the electrical wiring 618d being broken.

As shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the orientation of the opening C2a is continuously rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. At the lower displacement end of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the opening C2a faces the opposite side (lower side) of the connector 618c, and is intentionally configured so that downward slack occurs in the electrical wiring 618d. This makes it possible to ensure the length of the electrical wiring 618d itself while avoiding unnecessary slack in the electrical wiring at the displacement end position (for example, flapping due to slack in the front-to-rear direction).

Furthermore, the length of the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be long enough so that it does not come into contact with the extension portion 634b during operation of the first operating unit 600. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring 618d comes into contact with the extension portion 634b and receives a load, even without providing a partition between the extension portion 634b and the electrical wiring 618d.

In this embodiment, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is closest to the transmission gear cam 634 (see Figure 88), the extension portion 634b is positioned away from the connector 618c (positioned on the opposite side of the connector 618c with respect to the rotation axis of the transmission gear cam 634 as the reference), so a large area can be secured for positioning the electrical wiring 618d while avoiding contact with the extension portion 634b, thereby improving the design freedom of the length of the electrical wiring 618d.

Next, the following description focuses on the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which begins in Figure 88. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is upwardly displaced in the time sequence of Figure 88, Figure 87(b), Figure 87(a), Figure 86(b), and Figure 86(a).

When the dish-shaped lid C2 is displaced upward, the opening C2a does not face the partition 619 from the lower end position (see FIG. 88) until the dish-shaped lid C2 is closest to the partition 619, but faces downward. This allows the dish-shaped lid C2 to be displaced upward while ensuring downward slack in the electrical wiring 618d.

Even after the dish-shaped lid portion C2 passes the lower end of the partition portion 619, the opening C2a rotates gradually while still maintaining its downward facing state (the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a is aligned along the longitudinal direction of the partition portion 619) (see FIG. 87(a)).

Then, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is sufficiently separated from the partition portion 619, the opening C2a is rotated to a position facing the partition portion 619 (see Figures 86(a) and 86(b)), and the electrical wiring 618d is positioned so as to enter (be housed) between the partition portion 619 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being broken by sandwiching it between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619, and also reduces the load on the electrical wiring 618d caused by the vertical displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In other words, the position of the opening C2a is changed in accordance with the relative position of the partition 619 and the dish-shaped lid C2, thereby restricting the position of the electrical wiring 618d and preventing the electrical wiring 618d from being positioned between the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619 when the gap between the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619 becomes narrow, thereby suppressing the load on the electrical wiring 618d.

As a result, compared to when the electrical wiring 618d is arranged at an arbitrary position, the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be designed to be arranged close to each other, improving the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In addition, the restriction on the placement of the electrical wiring 618d is achieved not by using a separate member such as a cable tie, but by the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. As described above, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is a member used to fasten and fix the first decorative rotating member 650 to the main body member 651, but it is also used to restrict the placement of the electrical wiring 618d.

This eliminates the need for a dedicated member such as a cable tie to bundle the electrical wiring 618d. Furthermore, unlike cable ties, the orientation of the opening C2a can be changed so that the electrical wiring 618d can be placed on the appropriate side corresponding to the placement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, making it easier to avoid situations where the electrical wiring 618d becomes taut or bent.

In this embodiment, the opening C2a is formed as a sector-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 110. Because the opening C2a is formed as a wide opening, the degree of freedom in the shape adopted for the portion (connection terminal, etc.) of the electrical wiring 618d that passes through the opening C2a can be improved.

Next, we will explain the arrangement structure of the electrical wiring 618d, which is arranged on the front side of the opening C2a. Figure 89 is a front perspective view of the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660.

In Figure 89, only the parts necessary for explanation are shown, and the other parts are omitted. That is, the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the electric decoration board 662 and the wiring retaining plate 663 of the second decorative rotating member 660 are shown with solid lines, and to facilitate understanding, the box-shaped member 661 is shown with imaginary lines so that the inside can be seen.

In addition, Fig. 89 shows an example of the arrangement of electrical wiring 618d, and shows the dish-shaped lid portion C2 having an opening C2a through which the electrical wiring 618d is inserted. The electrical wiring 618d is shown branching between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 into a wiring connected to a terminal of the illumination board 653 (see Fig. 41) and a wiring connected to a terminal of the illumination board 662.

As shown in FIG. 89, the wiring retaining plate 663 is a disk-shaped member with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and includes a wiring insertion slot 663a that is drilled in the shape of a long hole through which the electrical wiring 618d can be inserted, and a pair of insertion holes 663b that are drilled on both sides of the insertion slot 663a as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, so that the wiring retaining plate 663 can prevent the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 (see FIG. 39) from falling off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is screwed into the female threads formed on the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This causes the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a to be fixed together.

In this way, the wiring retaining plate 663 has both the function of preventing the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 from falling off and the function of fixing the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a together. In addition, the wiring retaining plate 663 has the function of temporarily retaining the electrical wiring 618d.

As shown in FIG. 89, the electrical wiring 618d passes through the inside of the long wiring insertion hole 663a of the wiring retaining plate 663, and is temporarily held in a manner that suppresses displacement by being clamped. In this embodiment, the rotational movement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not an operation of one or more rotations, but an operation of less than half a rotation (a rotational movement of about 135 degrees) performed in a reciprocating direction, so that the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to rotate multiple times and not cause a situation in which the electrical wiring 618d is twisted off.

The load (torsional load) applied to the electrical wiring 618d when the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates is thought to be large near the wiring insertion slot 663a where twisting is likely to occur, but in this embodiment, the wiring insertion slot 663a is formed in a long hole shape, and the electrical wiring 618d is temporarily held by being clamped in the wiring insertion slot 663a, so displacement of the electrical wiring 618d within the long hole shape is permitted.

Therefore, even if an overload in the torsional direction occurs in the electrical wiring 618d, the load can be released by displacing the electrical wiring 618d within the long wiring insertion hole 663a. This improves the durability of the electrical wiring 618d.

The relationship between the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the direction of the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be described. Since the main body member 651 rotates integrally with the rotational movement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 is twisted in the rotational direction of the main body member 651. In other words, a counterclockwise twist occurs when viewed from behind as the rotating member 620 rotates and displaces in the tilting direction.

As the pivoting member 620 is pivoted in the tilting direction, the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is also pivoted counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, thereby reducing the load on the electrical wiring 618d caused by twisting (improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d).

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 rotates while being displaced vertically along the guide slot 616. Here, in the time series from Figure 86(a) to Figure 88, the electrical wiring 618d changes from a state in which there is a large amount of slack between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 to a state in which there is a small amount of slack.

Correspondingly, the rotation of the illumination board 662 is configured as an operation that changes the state of the electrical wiring 618d from a state in which the terminal on the illumination board 662 side of the electrical wiring 618d is located on the rear side (main body member 651 side) (see FIG. 89) to a state in which the terminal is located on the front side (wire receiving member 655 side). Therefore, the state of the electrical wiring 618d can be changed in a manner that pulls it toward the front side.

That is, in the time sequence from Figure 86 (a) to Figure 88, the state of the electrical wiring 618d inside the main body member 651 changes from a state in which the electrical wiring 618d is largely loose (a state in which the terminal on the side of the electrical wiring board 662 is located on the rear side) to a state in which the electrical wiring 618d is little loose (a state in which the terminal on the side of the electrical wiring board 662 is located on the front side).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the relationship between the amount of slack is reversed (balanced) between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the relationship inside the main body member 651. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d as the first operating unit 600 operates.

The relationship between the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d in the portion disposed inside the main body member 651 and the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d in the portion disposed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 will be explained.

In the time sequence of operations shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 twists counterclockwise when viewed from behind, while the portion of the electrical wiring 618d arranged between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 twists in the rotational direction of the illumination board 662 (counterclockwise when viewed from below in Figure 89 (viewed from the direction looking at the insertion hole 663b from the illumination board 662 side)). In other words, they twist in opposite directions.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be twisted to a minimum when the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state, and twisted to a maximum when the electrical wiring 618d is in an extended state.

As a result, in a state where a large amount of slack in the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a is unlikely to cause problems (standby state, see FIG. 86(a)), the electrical wiring 618d is deliberately left slack to reduce the load on the electrical wiring 618d, while in a state where it is preferable to reduce the slack in the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a (extended state, see FIG. 88), the twisting caused by the rotational movement of the main body member 651, the wiring receiving member 655, and the illumination board 662 is maximized to suppress slack in the electrical wiring 618d (suppress the displacement of the electrical wiring 618d).

In this way, as a means of improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d, it is configured to switch between a state in which twisting is minimized and sufficient slack is generated, and a state in which twisting reduces slack and avoids contact between the surrounding components (e.g., extension portion 634b) and the electrical wiring 618d.

As another embodiment, in the time series of operations shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the rotation direction of the illumination board 662 may be configured in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from below in Figure 89 (viewed from the direction looking at the insertion hole 663b from the illumination board 662 side)). In this case, the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d due to the rotational operation of the illumination board 662 are the same, so the twisting deformation of the electrical wiring 618d can be offset.

Next, the characteristics of the protruding decorative portion 652b in the operation of the first operating unit 600 will be described. Figures 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b) and 92 are schematic front views showing the guide slot 616, the rectangular box portion 618 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

In Figures 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b) and 92, the outer shapes of the guide slot 616 and rectangular box section 618 are illustrated diagrammatically, and the displacement of the protruding decorative section 652b from the standby state of the first operating unit 600 is illustrated in chronological order, with the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 omitted for ease of understanding.

Figure 90(a) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the standby state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 40), Figure 90(b) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the state in which the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see Figure 84), Figure 91(a) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the intermediate operating state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 43), Figure 91(b) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 displaced along the guide elongated hole 616 is positioned at the right end of the displacement range (see Figure 82), and Figure 92 illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 45).

In the performance standby state (see FIG. 90(a)), the overhanging decorative portion 652b is positioned to the right so that it overlaps with the rectangular box portion 618 when viewed from above. This allows the overhanging decorative portion 652b to be positioned outside the player's field of vision (see FIG. 28). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is positioned behind the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2) in the performance standby state, which reduces the visibility of the overhanging decorative portion 652b since the line of sight is easily blocked by the outer edge member 73.

On the other hand, if the overhang decorative portion 652b is displaced downward while being positioned to the right so as to overlap with the rectangular box portion 618 when viewed from above, the overhang decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 will collide, causing a malfunction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the posture of the overhanging decorative part 652b is changed prior to or in conjunction with the downward displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b (see Figures 90(b) and 91(a)). This posture change occurs as a rotational movement in a direction away from the rectangular box part 618 (diagonally upward and left when viewed from the front, a rotational direction about the axis O1), making it easier to avoid collision between the overhanging decorative part 652b and the rectangular box part 618.

In this embodiment, this change in posture causes the protruding decorative portion 652b to retreat from the upper position of the rectangular box portion 618 (see Figure 91 (a)), after which the full downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the protruding decorative portion 652b begins.

The downward displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b occurs in conjunction with the downward displacement of the axis O1. During the downward displacement, the axis O1 is displaced in a direction (to the right) approaching the rectangular box part 618 along the shape of the guide long hole 616 (see Figure 91 (b)), and therefore there is a possibility that the protruding decorative part 652b may collide with the rectangular box part 618.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rectangular box portion 618 has a recessed portion 618a formed on the left side surface that is recessed along the shape of the guide elongated hole 616. In particular, the recessed portion 618a is formed at the location where the guide elongated hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are closest to each other, that is, at a position to the right of the right end portion of the guide elongated hole 616. In this way, the design of the shape of the rectangular box portion 618 is considered with one objective in mind, which is to avoid collision between the front rotating member 652 and the rectangular box portion 618.

Furthermore, as the axis O1 is displaced downward, the posture of the overhanging decorative part 652b continues to change, so that the overhanging decorative part 652b can be displaced in a direction retracting from the rectangular box part 618. In this embodiment, when displacing from FIG. 91(a) to FIG. 91(b), the overhanging decorative part 652b is designed so that its leftward displacement dimension XL1 (retraction distance) is equal to or greater than the rightward displacement dimension XR1 of the axis O1. This makes it possible to avoid collision between the overhanging decorative part 652b and the rectangular box part 618.

In the state shown in Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the left-right displacement of axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by the change in posture of the protruding decorative part 652b are in opposite directions and cancel each other out, so the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b is kept small.

In contrast, in the states shown in Figures 91(b) to 92, the left-right displacement of axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by the change in posture of the protruding decorative part 652b are in the same direction on the left and right, so that the displacements are superimposed, resulting in a larger amount of left-right displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b.

As a result, even though the posture change of the protruding decorative part 652b always involves a rotational movement around the axis O1, it appears to the player that the protruding decorative part 652b is being guided to displace up and down with a small left-right displacement (narrow displacement trajectory) from Figure 90(a) to Figure 91(b), and to make a large left-right displacement from Figure 91(b) to Figure 92.

Therefore, it is possible to create a difference between the structure (component shape) that guides the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the structure that is expected from the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b as seen by the player. This makes it possible to create a surprising effect.

In other words, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be made to appear to the player as if the overhanging decorative portion 652b were popping out from the right side of the rectangular box portion 618 to the left. Therefore, in an area that is narrow and where left-right displacement would be insufficient, such as the left and right sides of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 30), the player can be made to see an unexpected displacement popping out to the left and right, thereby increasing the attention to the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

For convenience, the left-right displacement of axis O1 is compared with the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, axis O1 is a rotation axis that is part of the configuration of the first operating unit 600, so the left-right displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which is configured to be rotatable around this rotation axis, has the same meaning as the left-right displacement of axis O1. Therefore, the above explanation may be understood as a comparison between the left-right displacement of dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b.

Figure 93 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit 600 taken along line XCIII-XCIII in Figure 85. Figure 93 shows a cross-sectional view in a plane passing through axis O1 and the rotation axis of the intermediate gear 644. As shown in Figure 93, the rear rotating member 654 is disposed in the bottomed cylindrical portion 645 from the front side, while the intermediate gear 644 is disposed in the main body portion 641 from the rear side, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 mesh at the location where the opening 645a is formed and communicates.

As shown in FIG. 93, the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and the inner diameter of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is smaller than the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663, so that the axial displacement of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 can be restricted by the wiring retaining plate 663.

In this embodiment, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is disposed with a small gap between the step formed in the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a at the axial base end side (upper side in FIG. 93) and the wire retaining plate 663. This prevents the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 from falling off and stabilizes the positioning of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 in the central axial direction of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a.

The fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is screwed into the female threads formed on the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This causes the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a to be fixed together.

As shown in Figure 93, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned rearward compared to the second decorative rotating member 660, and is therefore positioned closer to the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) in the front-to-rear direction compared to the second decorative rotating member 660. In other words, it is positioned closer to the opening 511a (see Figure 26) in which the third pattern display device 81 is positioned in the front-to-rear direction.

As a result, compared to when the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b are positioned at a distance, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned so as to overlap the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 29), making it easier to create the illusion that the display area is being expanded to the right to the player.

In particular, when the protruding decorative portion 652b and the second decorative rotating member 660 are viewed simultaneously (see, for example, FIG. 29), the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned away from the third pattern display device 81 toward the front and is easily viewed independently of the display of the third pattern display device. This, in turn, accentuates the effect of making the protruding decorative portion 652b, which is positioned close to the third pattern display device 81 from the front side, appear to the player as part of the display (creating the illusion).

In other words, by providing one particularly conspicuous object (corresponding to the second decorative rotating member 660), the degree of distinction of the other components (corresponding to the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b) is reduced. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

The protruding decorative portion 652b is made from hard resin and its shape cannot be changed during construction. However, the appearance (color, brightness, etc.) of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be changed by controlling the light emission mode (color, brightness, etc.) of the light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board 653.

Therefore, by changing the light emission mode of the light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board 653 to match the video displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the protruding decorative part 652b is positioned so as to overlap with the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 29), making it easier to create the illusion that the display area is being expanded to the right for the player.

Next, the second operating unit 700 will be described in detail. Figure 94 is a front view of the second operating unit 700 in the extended state, and Figure 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along line XCV-XCV in Figure 94.

As described above, the second operating unit 700 is configured so that the vertical displacement and the forward/backward displacement occur synchronously during the sliding displacement (sliding displacement in the forward/backward direction at an angle), and is designed so that the displacement occurs smoothly so that the forward/backward displacement is not overly noticeable.

For example, in the sliding displacement of the second operating unit 700, the obliquely tilted displacement in the forward and backward directions is not composed of a single displacement, but is composed of a combination of a displacement in the up-down direction and a displacement in the forward and backward directions.

That is, first, the lifting plate member 740 connected to the pivot arm member 720 is guided by the metal bar 702 at the left end so as to move up and down in the longitudinal direction (up and down direction) of the metal bar 702. At the left end, the left side rear plate member 750 and the blind decorative member 768 are also arranged in front and behind the lifting plate member 740, preventing the lifting plate member 740 from freely moving in the front and back direction. This makes it possible to restrict the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 740 to the up and down direction.

The right side of the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the pivot arm member 720. The right end of the lifting plate member 740 is not supported by a fixed member (a member fixed to the rear case 510), but is indirectly supported by a fixed member (upper front inclined portions 714, 751 and receiving inclined portion 762) via the performance device 780 (see FIG. 54). This prevents the right end of the lifting plate member 740 from freely displacing in the front-to-rear direction, and limits the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 740 to the up-down direction.

The performance device 780 supported by the lifting plate member 740 is guided by the cylindrical portion 744 (see FIG. 50) so as to be displaced in the front-to-rear direction. In this way, to achieve a diagonally inclined sliding displacement in the front-to-rear direction, the guidance of the displacement of the lifting plate member 740 and performance device 780 as components is configured separately for the direction of gravity and the horizontal direction.

This makes it easier to configure the system to maintain low displacement resistance compared to a configuration that guides the system in the forward and backward directions at an angle.

The extension state of the second operating unit 700 illustrated in Figures 94 and 95 is a state in which it is possible to control the second operating unit 700 to perform a displacement (see Figure 57) that switches the state of the covering member 787. That is, in this embodiment, in other extension states (for example, the performance standby state of the second operating unit 700 (see Figure 28) or the intermediate performance state of the second operating unit 700 (see Figure 33)), the second operating unit 700 is controlled so as not to perform a displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787.

By controlling in this manner, even if the right side front plate member 710 and the left side rear plate member 750 are configured to be disposed at positions that overlap with the left and right positions reached by the left and right ends of the covering member 787 when a displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is performed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the covering member 787 collides with the right side front plate member 710 or the left side rear plate member 750. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the placement of the right side front plate member 710 and the left side rear plate member 750.

The following describes the ingenuity of the configuration of the performance device 780 in relation to the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787. First, the drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) that generates the driving force for the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is located at the left-right center position of the performance device 780 (a position where the center is located directly above the center of the insertion tube portion 773 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 744).

This not only prevents the attitude of the performance device 780 from tilting left or right due to the weight of the drive motor 782, but also stabilizes the left-right balance of the driving force generated by the drive motor 782.

Furthermore, in the extended state (see FIG. 95) of the second operating unit 700 capable of performing a displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787, the left-right position of the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the pivoting arm member 720 supporting the lifting plate member 740 is set to be equal to the left-right center position of the performance device 780 or to the right side.

In this way, while the support for the right side of the lifting plate member 740 is provided only by the pivoting arm member 720, which allows the cylindrical fastened portion 724 as a support position to be displaced in the left-right direction, when it is expected that the position or posture of the performance device 780 is likely to change, that is, when a displacement is made to switch the state of the covering member 787, the position of the cylindrical fastened portion 724 is set to be equal to the left-right center position of the performance device 780 or to a position to the right, thereby stabilizing the position or posture of the performance device 780.

Note that the control to execute the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is performed only when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, but after the state of the covering member 787 has been switched, it is possible to control the state of the second operating unit 700 to change to a performance standby state or an intermediate performance state.

That is, for example, in order to switch the state of the covering member 787 from the standby state of the second operating unit 700 and to place the second operating unit 700 in an intermediate performance state, the second operating unit 700 is first placed in an extended state, a displacement is performed to switch the state of the covering member 787, and then the second operating unit 700 is controlled to be displaced downward to change to the intermediate performance state.

As shown in FIG. 95, the light diffusion member 778b is formed long in the left-right direction so that it overlaps with the inner ends of a set of front support members 760 when viewed in the front-to-rear direction. This makes it possible to hide the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) supported by the front support members 760 from being seen by the player, thereby preventing the player from understanding that the presentation device 780 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction by understanding the position and shape of the rotating cylinder portion 774e.

Furthermore, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, the light diffusion member 778b is seen overlapping in a left-right line with the fixedly positioned three-dimensional decorative portion 768a when viewed from the front (see FIG. 94). In this state, the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a are arranged along the lower edge of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front, across the left-right length of the lower edge.

A board with an LED fixed to the front side is disposed on the back side of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, and the light emitted from the corresponding LED can be used to create a light-emitting effect of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a. This light-emitting effect can make the bottom edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be separated by light, or make the bottom edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be brightened by light.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, the light diffusion member 778b can be configured to function both as a member that hides the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) and as a member that performs a light-emitting effect in conjunction with the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a.

As shown in FIG. 95, the horizontal member 742 is provided with a covering cover 742a that is provided behind the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a and covers the area (left side area) away from the rear of the light diffusion member 778b with a space on the front side.

The covering cover 742a is a member for concealment formed across the vertical width of the horizontal member 742, and is arranged so that electrical wiring can be passed through the gap between the covering cover 742a and the horizontal member 742. That is, the electrical wiring for supplying electricity to the performance device 780 is guided from the rear of the concealing decorative member 768 through the gap between the covering cover 742a and the horizontal member 742 to the performance device 780 side, and is connected to the drive motor 782, the illumination board 778a, the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56), etc.

At this time, in front of the electrical wiring, not only the covering cover 742a but also the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative part 768a are arranged overlapping each other, which is a configuration that easily blocks the player's line of sight and makes it easier to prevent the electrical wiring from being visible to the player.

In other words, by placing the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, which are originally arranged for light production, in front of the path of the electrical wiring to function as a screen for the electrical wiring, the size of the covering cover 742a required to screen the electrical wiring can be kept to a minimum.

In addition, since the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a is fixed in position, it does not overlap the horizontal member 742 in the front-to-back direction when in the standby state (see FIG. 31) or in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), and therefore cannot be used to conceal electrical wiring.

Taking this into consideration, in this embodiment, the formation range of the horizontal member 742 is set to the range outside the light diffusion member 778b when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to conceal the electrical wiring with the horizontal member 742 and the light diffusion member 778, so that the electrical wiring can be prevented from being seen by the player regardless of the state of the second operating unit 700 (standby state, intermediate state, extended state).

96 and 97 are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inversion member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785. FIG. 96 illustrates the up-down inversion member 781 in a horizontal arrangement state in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same straight line extending in the left-right direction, and FIG. 97 illustrates the up-down inversion member 781 in an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(c)).

The pair of intermediate arm members 783 are not formed in the same shape, but have curved portions 783d that are curved upward from the lower surface when the inverted member 781 is horizontally disposed. The curved portions 783d are curved so as to protrude in a direction retracting from the drive gear 782a in order to avoid collision between the intermediate arm members 783 and the drive gear 782a when the inverted member 781 is vertically disposed.

Figure 98 is a front perspective view of the lift-and-reverse performance device 770. In Figure 98, the outer shape of the covering member 787 is shown in imaginary lines so that the inside can be seen through the covering member.

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnet Mg is placed near both the left and right ends of the pair of covering members 787, rather than on the side where the pair of covering members 787 are placed close to each other. Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg does not act to directly combine the covering members 787 together, but acts independently on each of the pair of covering members 787.

This makes it possible to prevent, for example, a malfunction of one covering member 787 from causing the other covering member 787 to malfunction as well.

In addition, for example, when the pair of covering members 787 start to move apart in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent magnetic force from acting in the opposite direction to the left-right displacement. In other words, when the up-down inversion member 781 starts to rotate from the upright vertical position, it is possible to delay the timing at which the magnetic force acts.

This makes it possible to suppress the change in the load applied to the covering members 787 by the magnets Mg when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction, so that it is easier to avoid situations in which the covering members 787 vibrate due to a sudden change in magnetic force or the displacement becomes unstable, causing malfunctions, when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction, compared to when it is necessary to remove the magnet's adhesion when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction.

As shown in Figure 98, the magnets Mg are arranged on opposite sides in the left and right directions, and the effect of this will be explained below. The rotational position stabilization parts 785f, to which the metal screws that come into contact with the magnets Mg and are loaded with magnetic force are fixed, are arranged on the same side in the front-to-back direction (the front side when the up-down inversion member 781 is in the upright vertical position, see Figure 55). Therefore, the direction of the load generated by the magnets Mg in relation to the metal screws is the same in the front-to-back direction on both the left and right sides.

In more detail, for example, when the upside-down member 781 changes from an upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)) to an inverted vertical position (see FIG. 59(c)), the covering member 787 on the left side as viewed from the front rotates in the forward direction, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side) is displaced forward, resulting in a forward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force, while the covering member 787 on the right side as viewed from the front rotates in the backward direction, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) is displaced forward, resulting in a forward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force.

For example, when the upside-down member 781 changes from an inverted vertical position (see FIG. 59(c)) to an upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)), the covering member 787 on the left side as viewed from the front rotates backwards, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side) is displaced backwards, resulting in a rearward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force, while the covering member 787 on the right side as viewed from the front rotates forwards, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) is displaced backwards, resulting in a rearward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force.

In this way, the direction of the load generated by the magnet Mg between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 and linear plate member 784 that support the covering member 787 while maintaining its posture is configured to be the same on both the left and right sides.

Here, when a load is generated in the opposite front-to-back direction on both the left and right sides (for example, when the magnet Mg on the left side is placed in a lower position, so that the magnets Mg on both the left and right sides are placed in a lower position, and the design is changed so that the rotational position stabilization portion 785f of the left axial rotation member 785 is placed on the rear side of the magnet Mg in the upright vertical position), the mode of displacement given to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled away from their adhering state becomes a mode in which the lifting and reversing performance device 770 rotates on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

In this case, the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is likely to vibrate in the rotational direction on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction. In particular, in a configuration like this embodiment, in which the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 96) elastically deforms in the process of removing the magnet Mg from its attraction, and the covering member 787 is vigorously rotated using the elastic recovery of the bevel tooth member 785c after the magnet Mg is removed from its attraction, it is expected that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is likely to vibrate in the rotational direction on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, it may become difficult to release the load from the lifting/reversing performance device 770, which may result in damage to the lifting/reversing performance device 770 or a decrease in the durability of the lifting/reversing performance device 770. Therefore, measures are considered necessary to stabilize the displacement of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 over the long term.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from their adsorbed state, the direction of the load generated between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 and linear plate member 784 that support the covering member 787 while maintaining their posture is configured to be the same in the front-to-back direction on both the left and right sides, so that the mode of displacement given to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from their adsorbed state can be a mode in which the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is displaced in the front-to-back direction.

This can be easily offset by the displacement of the lifting and reversing device 770 (displacement having a forward and backward component), and damage to the lifting and reversing device 770 caused by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled away from their adhering state can be avoided.

In the second operating unit 700, the direction of the sliding displacement of the performance device 780 (a direction having a vertical component and a front-to-rear component, i.e., a direction in a plane perpendicular to the left-to-right direction) is perpendicular to the direction in which the displacement starts (left-to-right direction) from a state in which the covering members 787 are arranged close to each other (a vertical arrangement state of the upside-down members 781).

This makes it easier to avoid one displacement occurring due to the inertia of the other displacement. For example, when a sliding displacement of the performance device 780 is performed, it makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the covering members 787 unintentionally start to displace from a state in which they are positioned close to each other (displacement in a direction away from each other).

Next, the details of the third operating unit 800 will be described again. First, the details of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described. Figure 99(a) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850, and Figure 99(b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850.

As shown in Figures 99(a) and 99(b), the intermediate arm member 850 has a characteristic shape in which the axial position of the long rod portion changes at the thickened portion 852.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the thickened portion 852 is disposed opposite the tip rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating member 850, and includes a base end reinforcing portion 852a disposed opposite the tip rod portion 853, and a recessed portion 852b formed by hollowing out the front side along the axial direction.

The base end reinforcement portion 852a is hollowed out in the same way as the recessed portion 852b, but the relative hollowing amount is small, and it is designed to have a large deformation resistance. This makes it possible to avoid excessive deformation even if it comes into contact with the tip rod portion 853, which is formed on the rotating tip side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force during rotation is likely to be large.

The recessed portion 852b acts to weaken the deformation resistance of the elastic deformation of the thickened portion 852. This ensures the flexibility of the thickened portion 852 and improves the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

A curved portion 852c is formed on both short side surfaces of the thickened portion 852. The curved portion 852c is formed from a shape that can smoothly receive the curved portion 854d formed on the rotation base end side of the rotation transmission portion 854 formed on the end of the tip side rod portion 853 of the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in the combined state.

In this embodiment, the rotation direction of the intermediate arm members 850 when adjacent intermediate arm members 850 rotate to be positioned close to each other is reversed between the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a)) and the combined state, so which of the short side surfaces of the intermediate arm members 850 is positioned close to the curved portion 854d depends on which combined state is configured.

On this premise, since the curved portion 852c is formed on both sides, it can smoothly accept the curved portion 854d in any combined state. This allows for a smooth transition to the combined state.

In addition, by designing the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d so that they can come into surface contact with each other, it is possible to prevent excessive load from being locally generated between the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d in the combined state, thereby improving the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

The third operating unit 800 is configured to be movable up and down by the lifting arm member 801, but the direction of the lifting and lowering displacement is not necessarily perpendicular to the direction in which the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834 start to move from the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the imaginary position line 832F recognized as the displacement start direction of the rotating member 834 is set in a different direction at 72 degree intervals, so that the displacement start direction of all the rotating members 834 cannot be perpendicular to the direction of the upward and downward displacement.

Therefore, due to the load and inertia that occur when the third operating unit 800 is raised and lowered, there is a possibility that an unintended rotational motion (integral rotational motion or switching rotational motion) may occur. We will explain the measures taken to prevent this malfunction.

Figure 100 is a schematic diagram of the third operating unit 800, which shows the displacement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850.

In FIG. 100, the imaginary position line 832F of the metal rod 832 is shown to include the imaginary position line 832F that extends downward in the individual combined state, and the imaginary position line 832F that has rotated counterclockwise in front view until the angle between the imaginary position line 832F and the longitudinal direction of the intermediate arm member 850 changes by 0.5 degrees.

In other words, in Figure 100, the angle θ51 is shown as 45 degrees, and the angle θ52 is shown as 44.5 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 100, the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to allow the rotating member 834 to slide along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 while suppressing the rotational movement of the rotating member 834 at the start of the switching rotation movement.

The change in angles θ51 and θ52 in FIG. 100 refers to the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 relative to the metal rod 832, and corresponds to the angle at which meshing rotation of the bevel tooth portions 834a and 854c (see FIG. 61) occurs.

Here, backlash (gap) is essential to keep the gear teeth meshing upright, and the rotational responsiveness changes depending on how large or small this gap is set. There are various options for setting the backlash, but in this embodiment, the backlash is set to 0.5 degrees.

In other words, before the angle θ51 in the combined state changes to angle θ52, the backlash (gap) is filled and meshing rotation does not begin. Meanwhile, the rotating tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 slides radially outward of the third operating unit 800 along the virtual position line 832F.

In other words, when the switching rotation operation from the combined state (individually combined state) begins, the rotational movement of the rotating member 834 is suppressed, and mainly sliding movement occurs along the metal rod 832.

Figure 101 is a schematic front view of the third operating unit 800. In explaining Figure 101, Figure 100 is referred to as appropriate. Figure 101 illustrates the third operating unit 800 in an integrated state, and illustrates the torque limiter 866 and magnet Mg2 that generate a resistance force against the displacement of the third operating unit 800.

Here, the rotating member 834 is configured not to rotate even if the inner rotating member 830 rotates slightly relative to the outer rotating member 840 (for example, a rotation of about 5 degrees (see FIG. 100)).

As a result, even in a configuration in which magnet Mg2 is used to maintain the combined state of multiple first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 as in this embodiment, and an attractive force is generated in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 from the combined state can be limited to linear displacement, making it easier to maintain the combination due to the magnetic force of magnet Mg2.

In other words, when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate around the metal rod 832 at the start of displacement from the combined state, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic force, and therefore the magnetic force is likely to disappear. In contrast, in this embodiment, the displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 at the start of displacement from the combined state is only along the plane on which the five magnets Mg2 are arranged (displacement in the sliding direction along the metal rod 832), and therefore the combined state due to the magnetic force is easily maintained.

This makes it easier to maintain the combined state of the multiple first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 even if the inner rotating member 830 unintentionally rotates slightly (e.g., rotates about 5 degrees) due to the influence of an unintended load or the like.

As shown in FIG. 101, the torque limiter 866 is configured such that when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied, the connection is cut and a switching rotation DR1 occurs to reduce resistance (spin), and when the torque limiter 866 is configured such that when the torque limiter 866 is configured in the reverse direction, an idling rotation AR1 occurs to reduce resistance (spin). The torque limiter 866 is configured with a pair of opposite forward and reverse rotations.

In more detail, in this embodiment, the left torque limiter 866 is configured to generate a switching rotation DR1 in which resistance is generated until the applied load reaches an allowable value when the allowable value is exceeded, and to generate an idling rotation AR1 in which the load is idling when the left torque limiter 866 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front.

The right-side torque limiter 866 is configured to generate an idling rotation AR1 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, while it generates resistance in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front until the applied load reaches an allowable value, and generates a switching rotation DR1 in the idling direction when the allowable value is exceeded.

In this way, a set of torque limiters 866 function as safety clutches in different rotation directions, making it possible to perform switch rotation operations in both directions as described above.

Furthermore, when no load in the rotational direction that exceeds the allowable value is applied, resistance in both forward and reverse directions is applied to the outer rotating member 840 via the load response gear 865 (see FIG. 61) attached to the torque limiter 866, so that the rotational movement of the outer rotating member 840 that may occur due to unintended loads (the inertial force of vertical displacement or the impact force when the door is opened or closed) can be suppressed. Therefore, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be maintained by a set of torque limiters 866.

As shown in FIG. 101, the magnet Mg2 is fixed to one side of the second covering portion 885 in the width direction, and is arranged concentrically when the five second covering portions 885 are combined into a ring shape. The magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force between itself and the metal screw Nj2 fixed to the adjacent second covering portion 885 arranged in close proximity.

By configuring in this manner, compared to when magnets Mg2 are disposed on both sides of a specific second covering portion 885 in the width direction (i.e., when both second covering portions 885 disposed adjacent to a specific second covering portion 885 on both sides receive a biasing force from magnets Mg2 in a direction toward the specific second covering portion 885), it is possible to prevent the gaps between the second covering portions 885 in the combined state from becoming larger at positions away from the specific second covering portion 885, and to make the gaps between all adjacent second covering portions 885 uniform.

As described above, the displacement of the second decorative member 880 from the combined state is configured as a sliding movement radially outward, and by the time the rotational movement around the metal rod 832 begins, the two members have moved apart to such an extent that the combination caused by the magnetic force is released (see FIG. 100). Since the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 acts in a direction that shortens the circumference of the concentric circle in which the second decorative member 880 is aligned (in a direction toward the center of the concentric circle), it becomes a resistance force to the sliding movement radially outward of the second decorative member 880.

In addition, because this resistance force is generated with equal magnitude from each direction dividing 360 degrees into five equal parts, the load that the third operating unit 800 receives from the magnet Mg2 can be balanced. In other words, it is easier to stabilize the positioning of the third operating unit 800 compared to when the magnetic force Mg2 acts non-uniformly.

The shape of all five second decorative members 880 is the same, and the arrangement of the magnets Mg2 is also the same, so the front-to-back positions of each magnet Mg2 are the same. This makes it possible to prevent the magnetic force of the magnets Mg2 from applying a load having a front-to-back component to the second decorative members 880, making it easier to avoid a situation in which a magnetic force is generated in the front-to-back direction when starting to move from the combined state or just before reaching the combined state, causing the second decorative members 880 to vibrate in the front-to-back direction.

Figure 102 is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. In Figure 102, the arrangement state corresponding to the individual combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 is illustrated, and for ease of understanding, the intermediate arm member 850 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and the outer rotating member 840 arranged on the rear side can be seen.

As shown in FIG. 102, in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to have at least one portion that restricts rotation in one direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 102), and in most cases, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted in two portions. The configuration for restricting the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described below.

First, there is the abutment protrusion 845 that protrudes radially outward from the outer circumferential surface of the main body 841 of the outer rotating member 840. The abutment protrusion 845 is formed in a shape that tapers radially outward at the intermediate angular position between the adjacent extension arms 842, and the inside is hollowed out in a direction parallel to the axial direction of the main body 841.

This abutment protrusion 845 is positioned opposite the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotational direction of the intermediate arm member 850 and is positioned so as to be able to abut against the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850, thereby preventing over-rotation of the intermediate arm member 850.

The thickened portion 852 has a reduced deformation resistance to elastic deformation due to the recessed portion 852b (see FIG. 99(a)). Similarly, the abutting protrusion 845 is hollowed out. As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced at high speed and the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 collides with the abutting protrusion 845, the load generated at that time can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the abutting protrusion 845 and the thickened portion 852, so that damage to the abutting protrusion 845 and the thickened portion 852 can be avoided.

The abutment protrusion 845 is not disposed at all intermediate angular positions of the extension arm 842, but is omitted at the angular positions where the detectable portion 844 is formed. This shifts the positions of the abutment protrusion 845 and the detectable portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction, and the removal direction of the molding die for the outer rotating member 840 can be set to the axial direction of the main body 841. This simplifies the design of the molding die.

Thus, in this embodiment, the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted in exchange for simplification of the design of the molding die, but in this embodiment, a base end side reinforcement portion 852a is formed in the thickened portion 852 as a second configuration for restricting the rotation of the rotating arm member 850.

The base end reinforcement portion 852a is arranged opposite the tip end rod portion 853 (see FIG. 99(a)) in the rotational direction of the adjacent pivot member 850 and is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the tip end rod portion 853 when it over-rotates, thereby preventing over-rotation of the intermediate arm member 850.

The base end reinforcement portion 852a is hollowed out in the same way as the recessed portion 852b, but the relative hollowing amount is small and designed to increase deformation resistance. This makes it possible to avoid excessive deformation even if it comes into contact with the rotating tip side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force during rotation is likely to be large.

The curved portion 852c is designed to be able to come into surface contact with the curved portion 854d, which can prevent excessive load from being locally generated between the curved portions 852c and 854d in the combined state, thereby improving the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

In this way, when the abutment protrusions 845 are arranged opposite each other, the displacement of the pivot arm member 850 is restricted from over-rotating by a configuration that allows the curved shaped portion 852c of adjacent pivot arm members 850 to abut against the curved shaped portion 854d and the base end reinforcement portion 852a of adjacent pivot arm members 850 to abut against the tip end rod portion 853 in addition to abutting against the abutment protrusions 845.

On the other hand, even if the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted, the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d of adjacent rotating arm members 850 can be abutted against each other, or the base end reinforcement portion 852a and the tip end rod portion 853 of adjacent rotating arm members 850 can be abutted against each other, thereby preventing over-rotation of the rotating arm member 850.

These abutment configurations are configured so that the five rotating arm members 850 are related to each other (arranged in a circular manner). Therefore, at first glance, it may seem as if the load at the time of abutment is concentrated because the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 in one location is omitted and there is little configuration that restricts rotation only for the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to that omitted location, but in reality, the interaction of the five rotating arm members 850 allows the load at the time of abutment to be distributed.

This makes it possible to prevent the durability of a single pivot arm member 850 (the pivot arm member 850 corresponding to the portion where the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted) from decreasing drastically.

Furthermore, the formation of the annular plate portion 846, which extends in an annular plate shape from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 on a single plane along the rear end of the abutting protrusion portion 845, is omitted in the area that overlaps with the detected portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction, similar to the abutting protrusion portion 845.

The omission of the annular plate portion 846 can be explained as a trade-off for making the design of the molding die easier, as with the omission of the abutment protrusion portion 845 described above, but the effect of the annular plate portion 846 is realized by the adjacent pivot arm member 850 (the structure supporting it) even in the area where the annular plate portion 846 is omitted.

That is, the effect of the annular plate portion 846 can be explained as the correction of the misalignment of the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850. That is, even if the position of the tip of the rotating arm member 850 is unintentionally misaligned front-rear when the rotating arm member 850 is displaced radially outward (see FIG. 65(a)) from the combined state (see FIG. 64(a)) and returns to the combined state, the rear side surface of the base end rod portion 851 (see FIG. 99(b)) is arranged opposite the annular plate portion 846 and is capable of abutting against it, so that the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by the abutment.

This effect cannot be achieved if the annular plate portion 846 is omitted, since there is no contact with the annular plate portion 846. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rear side surface of the tip rod portion 853 of the rotating arm member 850 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842. Therefore, even if the position of the tip of the rotating arm member 850 is shifted forward or backward, the rear side surface of the tip rod portion 853 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842 and can abut against it, so that the forward or backward position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by this abutment.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the extension arm portion 842 is configured to produce the same effect as the annular plate portion 846. This allows the effect of correcting the front-to-rear arrangement of the rotating arm member 850 to be produced for all of the rotating arm members 850, even while omitting the formation of part of the annular plate portion 846.

Figure 103(a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figure 103(b) is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. Figures 103(a) and 103(b) show the relative positions of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 in a combined state.

The state shown in FIG. 103(a) corresponds to a state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 65(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (a state in which the switching rotation operation is completed), and the state shown in FIG. 103(b) corresponds to a state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 67(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (a state in which the switching rotation operation is completed).

When comparing the combined state with the individual combined state (see Fig. 64(a) and Fig. 66(a)), there are differences such as the short side of the intermediate arm member 850 close to the outer rotating member 840 being reversed, so that the curved portion 852c that abuts against the abutment protrusion 845 is on the opposite side, and the curved portion 852c that abuts against the curved portion 854d is reversed.

To accommodate this difference, the abutment protrusion 845 is linearly symmetrical in front view with respect to the radial direction of the main body 841, and the pair of curved portions 852c and 854d are linearly symmetrical in front view with respect to the longitudinal line of the intermediate arm member 850 (the straight line connecting the pivot base end and the supported hole 854a).

Furthermore, the curved shape of the abutment protrusion 845 and the curved shape of the curved shape portion 854d are designed to be similarly curved to match the shape of the curved shape portion 852c. This allows the combination state to be configured with the same engagement relationship whether in the individual combined state or in the combined state.

In addition, in the combined state, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 is configured in a positional relationship in which it is sandwiched from both sides between the abutting protrusion 845 and the curved portion 854d. This makes it possible to prevent the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 from being displaced in either rotation direction, making it easier to maintain the state of the intermediate arm member 850 and easier to maintain the combined state.

Figures 104 and 105 are front views of the third operating unit 800. Figure 104 illustrates a state in which the decorative members 870, 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position (a state intermediate between the individual combined state and the united state), and Figure 105 illustrates the united state.

Figure 106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line CVI-CVI in Figure 105, and Figure 107 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line CVII-CVII in Figure 104. As a configuration of the third operating unit 800, the front-to-rear arrangement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be set arbitrarily.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is positioned on the front side of the metal bar 832, the player will be able to see the metal bar 832 through the intermediate arm member 850, which reduces the visibility of the metal bar 832. In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 106 and 107, the metal bar 832 is positioned on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850.

With this arrangement, the metal bar 832 as a support member functions as a shielding member that partially hides the intermediate arm member 850. This makes it possible to prevent the intermediate arm member 850, which is a functional member rather than a decorative member, from standing out, and improves the appearance of the third operating unit 800.

When exposed (see FIG. 104), the metal rod 832 also functions as a performance member that reflects light due to the gloss of its surface, improving the performance effect of the light emitted from the outer light-emitting part 823b (see FIG. 107). In other words, the metal rod 832 can be used as a reflective member for light performance.

If the intermediate arm member 850 were placed on the front side of the metal bar 832, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 would block the light entering the player's eyes. However, in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is placed on the back side of the metal bar 832, so it is possible to avoid the intermediate arm member 850 blocking the light and causing an unsightly appearance.

In this way, in this embodiment, the range in which the light effects are performed can be expanded by configuring the metal rod 832 to reflect light in the mid-switching rotation operation in which the metal rod 832 is exposed (see Figures 104 and 107). That is, the reflected light can be made visible to the player not only in the range behind the translucent decorative member 824 where the illumination board 823 (see Figure 60) is arranged, but also in the range ER1 (see Figure 104) where the metal rod 832, which is arranged to protrude radially outward from the translucent decorative member 824 when viewed from the front, is exposed and visible.

As a light receiving portion, the bulge 824a has a light diffusion shape portion 824b (see Figures 106 and 107) on its inner circumferential surface, in which a light diffusion shape is formed in a circular ring shape. The light irradiated from the inner light emitting portion 823a can be irradiated onto the light diffusion shape portion 824b, and the light diffusion shape portion 824b that receives the light shines brightly in a circular ring shape.

As a result, the light diffusion shape portion 824b is visible as a bright ring not only when the decorative members 870, 880 are combined, but also during the switching rotation operation in which the circular arrangement of the decorative members 870, 880 is released, making it easier to maintain the dramatic effect that utilizes the circular shape of the third operating unit 800.

As shown in Figures 104 and 105, the translucent decorative member 824 has not only a bulge 824a that is visible in the combined state, but also an extension 824c that extends radially outward from the bulge 824a when viewed from the front.

When the extension 824c is in the combined state, it is hidden by the decorative members 870 and 880, and therefore does not function as a decorative part, but it does have the effect of concealing the mechanism during the switching rotation operation shown in FIG. 104.

That is, as shown in Figures 104 and 107, the extension portion 824c is formed to be large enough to cover and conceal parts of the mechanism that are difficult to use for presentation, such as the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 and the extension arm portion 842 of the outer rotating member 840 (see Figure 61).

And because the decorative pattern is applied not only to the bulge 824a but also to the front side of the extension 824c, the decorative pattern can be seen in the area where the mechanism is hidden and concealed, improving the presentation effect.

An example of drive control of the third operating unit 800 will be described. First, the relationship between the lifting and lowering displacement of the third operating unit 800 caused by the lifting and lowering arm member 801 being driven and controlled, and the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 caused by the drive motor 861 being driven and controlled will be described.

According to this embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is configured to be able to perform the vertical displacement and rotational displacement independently. However, for example, due to the inertial load generated when the third operating unit 800 is vertically displaced, a rotational displacement may occur in the third operating unit 800 in conjunction with the vertical displacement. In this case, the third operating unit 800 may change its posture or the combined state of the third operating unit 800 may be released (the decorative members 870, 880 may be displaced radially outward against the attractive force of the magnet Mg2), which may reduce the presentation effect.

To avoid this, for example, the vertical displacement of the third operating unit 800 and the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 (particularly, the integral rotational movement) may be controlled to be performed simultaneously.

This allows the player to see the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 as it moves up and down as a dramatic action, preventing a decline in the dramatic effect. Furthermore, while the integral rotational action continues, a load continues to be applied in a direction that displaces the decorative members 870, 880 radially inward (see FIG. 101), so it is possible to prevent the combined state of the third operating unit 800 from being released.

In addition, even if control is not performed to simultaneously perform the lifting and lowering displacement and the rotational displacement, the third operating unit 800 may be controlled to adjust the orientation of the third operating unit 800 in advance in the rotational direction so that the orientation of the third operating unit 800 is such that the rotating arm member 850 is less likely to be displaced by the lifting and lowering displacement.

In this embodiment, a change in the detection mode of the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 by the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 68) means that the rotation mode of the inner rotating member 830 is being performed as a unitary rotation operation. Therefore, based on this premise, it is assumed that the detection mode of the detection sensor 813 and the control of the third operating unit 800 will be designed in association with each other.

This premise is based on the fact that the switching rotation operation is performed in a state where the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained (a state where the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are not interlocked). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid any state where this premise may be violated.

In this embodiment, when the inner rotating member 830 is rotationally controlled by the driving force of the drive motor 861, the resistance applied by the torque limiter 866 acts to suppress the rotation of the outer rotating member 840, thereby maintaining the position of the outer rotating member 840.

Therefore, for example, when the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 increases during the switching rotation operation, and the operating resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 increases, if the resistance exceeds the resistance applied by the torque limiter, the outer rotating member 840 and the inner rotating member 830 may work together, making it impossible to properly perform the switching rotation operation.

In contrast, this embodiment is configured to reduce resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850.

For example, the direction of displacement of the rotating tip of the intermediate arm member 850 that displaces the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834 from the combined state is along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832. In other words, since the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of the metal rod 832, it is possible to make it difficult for resistance to the rotation of the metal rod 832 to occur, and it is possible to keep the resistance generated between the metal rod 832 and the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 small.

When the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834 are positioned at their radially outer end positions (see FIG. 104), the displacement direction of the rotation tip side (e.g., the supported hole 854a) of the intermediate arm member 850 is aligned with the rotation direction of the metal rod 832, so that it is easy to create a state in which the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 move in parallel, especially when the speed is insufficient. In this case, the switching rotation operation is not performed properly.

In contrast, this embodiment employs a control mode in which, once the switching rotation operation has begun, driving continues at a sufficient speed until the combined state is reached. When the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834 are positioned at the outer radial end positions (see FIG. 104), the decorative members 870 and 880 are subjected to inertia such that they rotate around the metal rod 832.

Due to the effect of this inertia, the rotating member 834 fastened to the decorative members 870 and 880 rotates, and the bevel teeth portion 834a and the bevel teeth portion 854c rotate in mesh with each other, so that the rotating tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 passes through the radially outer end position and rotates radially inward (see Figures 65(b) and 67(b)).

When the intermediate arm member 850 is out of its radially outer end position, the tip of the intermediate arm member 850 is more likely to move in a direction along the metal rod 832, making it easier to reduce resistance to the rotational movement of the metal rod 832.

In this way, in this embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced by designing the relationship between the members and the drive control.

During the switching rotation operation, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained and the position of the detected part 844 does not change, so the end timing of the switching rotation operation cannot be determined by a change in the detection state of the detected part 844 by the detection sensor 813.

For example, the control to stop the drive motor 861 when the combined state is reached can be achieved by setting a drive time necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation in advance and controlling the drive to stop at that drive time; however, depending on the degree of resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850, the amount of displacement may differ even if the drive time is the same, and the drive may stop before the combined state is reached. In this case, the presentation effect may be reduced.

In response to this, instead of a control mode that stops the drive motor 861 when the combined state is reached, a control may be adopted in which it is determined that the switching rotation operation has ended and the integral rotation operation has begun when the detection state of the detected part 844 by the detection sensor 813 has changed (see FIG. 68), and the drive motor 861 is stopped after this determination. This control makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor 861 is stopped when the decorative members 870, 880 have not yet reached the combined state after the switching rotation operation has been performed.

As described above, the switching rotation operation is performed in the extended state of the third operating unit 800 as drive control, but the integral rotation operation can be performed regardless of the state of the third operating unit 800.

Since the switching rotation operation can be performed regardless of the position of the rotation direction of the third operating unit 800 as a drive control, as described above in FIG. 68, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot will be announced. In other words, the switching rotation operation can be performed not only from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 66(a)), but also from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is not arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

However, unlike when the switching rotation operation is performed while the detectable portion 844 is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change from the end of the switching rotation operation until the detectable portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so it is necessary to devise a control mode.

For example, the switching rotation operation may be performed for a drive period that is preset as a drive period necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation, regardless of the output of the detection sensor 813, or the drive motor 861 may be controlled to continue driving until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

In the latter case, after the switching rotation operation is completed, the operation mode shifts to a united rotation operation, and the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so that it can be determined that the switching rotation operation has already ended and the decorative members 870, 880 are in a combined state.

On the other hand, if the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change even though the drive motor 861 has been driven for a time sufficient to transition from a switching rotation operation to a unitary rotation operation and for the detected portion 844 to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, it can be determined that a malfunction has occurred in the third operating unit 800 based on the output of the detection sensor 813.

In the latter case, a switching rotation operation is performed from any rotational position of the third operating unit 800, and while the united state (see FIG. 32) is maintained, driving continues until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

As described above, when the third operating unit 800 is in a united assembly state, the appearance is unlikely to change even if the rotational arrangement is different. Therefore, even if the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 is continued until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in the united assembly state, it is easy to avoid a decrease in the presentation effect.

Furthermore, when controlling to return from the reverse performance shown in FIG. 68 to the normal performance, the detectable portion 844 is already positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so the period until the output of the detection sensor 813 changes after the switch rotation operation is completed can be minimized. In other words, a short drive period is sufficient for the detectable portion 844, which is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, to retreat from the detection groove, so the length required for control to return from the reverse performance to the normal performance can be minimized.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the degree of freedom of the rotational arrangement of the third operating unit 800, which initiates the switching rotation action to switch from a normal performance to a reverse performance, is improved, and while the return action may normally be prolonged, the switching rotation action from a reverse performance as a return action to a normal performance is shortened.

In other words, by performing part of the return operation to correct the difference in the rotational position of the third operating unit 800 (the rotational displacement until the detected part 844 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813) in a united state in which the appearance is unlikely to change even if the rotational position is different, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the performance effect of the third operating unit 800 during the return operation.

Furthermore, by performing part of the return operation in advance, it is possible to shorten the time required for the remaining return operation, which is the switching rotation operation.

A comprehensive explanation will be given of the configurations that are commonly adopted by multiple operating units 600, 700, and 800, including the reasons for the differences in how they are adopted.

First, as a first cross-sectional explanation, we will review the configuration of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 that are commonly used in each of the operating units 600, 700, and 800, and explain the reasons for the differences in their adoption (number of sensors, shape of the detected piece, etc.).

The detection sensor KS1 of the first operating unit 600 is a detection device for detecting the position of the first operating unit 600, and the extension portion 634b can enter the detection groove. The first operating unit 600 is equipped with only one detection sensor KS1 (see Figure 41). The multiple displacement members, namely the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, the protruding decorative portion 652b, and the second decorative rotating member 660, are configured so that the position and position of the other displacement members are determined when the position of the rotating member 620 is determined, so that the position and position of the multiple displacement members can be determined based on the detection result of the single detection sensor KS1. This makes it possible to reduce the number of detection devices.

The detection sensor 713 of the second operating unit 700 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 of the second operating unit 700, and the detection target portion 735 can enter the detection groove. There are three detection devices for the second operating unit 700 to detect the posture of the gear cam member 734 (see FIG. 50), which respectively correspond to the performance standby state, intermediate performance state, and extended state of the second operating unit 700.

The detection sensor 713 that determines the standby state is required to determine whether the device has returned to its initial position. The detection sensor 713 that determines the extension state is required to determine whether the device has reached the end position of the upward displacement, as well as to determine whether the device has performed a reversal operation of the lift-down reversal device 770 and whether it has shifted position due to the influence of unintended loads. The detection sensor 713 that determines the intermediate state is required to determine whether the device has reached the up or down position in the intermediate state, as well as to determine whether it has shifted position due to the influence of unintended loads. The reversal operation and the influence of unintended loads will be explained in order below.

First, the inversion operation will be described. The second operation unit 700 is configured to enable not only the up and down displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 that occurs in conjunction with the rotational operation of the gear cam member 734, but also the inversion operation of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 (see FIG. 59).

Since the reversal operation may cause the lifting and reversing performance device 770 to be displaced in the vertical direction, if only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines the performance standby state) is used, for example, it may not be possible to determine the vertical positional deviation in the extended state or intermediate performance state, and the performance operation may not be performed properly.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the second operating unit 700 is provided with a detection sensor 713 that corresponds to the standby state, intermediate state, and extended state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to determine that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction by performing an inversion operation of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 in the extended state, and by rotating the drive motor 731 in a direction that properly corrects the attitude of the gear cam member 734 (to the extended state) based on this determination result, it is possible to properly maintain the position of the lifting/reversing performance device 770.

In this embodiment, the reversing operation is permitted only when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state (when the gear cam member 734 is at the end of the operation), so that the positional deviation during the reversing operation can be easily corrected by simply rotating the gear cam member 734 towards the end of the operation.

Next, the effect of unintended load will be described. In the second operating unit 700, in addition to the vertical displacement of the lifting plate member 740 that occurs in conjunction with the pivoting arm member 720 that rotates due to the rotational movement of the gear cam member 734, there is also a vertical displacement of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 based on the lifting plate member 740 to displace to a forward/backward position corresponding to the vertical position of the lifting plate member 740 (see Figures 52 to 54).

As a result, as the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction by the load applied in the front-to-rear width direction of the gaming machine, the up-down positions of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 and the lifting plate member 740 fluctuate, which may cause the attitude of the gear cam member 734 to change. Examples of loads applied in the front-to-rear width direction of the gaming machine include impact loads when a player hits the gaming machine, and loads when opening and closing the front frame 14.

Since the load in the front-to-rear width direction may cause the lifting/reversing performance device 770 to be displaced in the vertical direction, if only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines the performance standby state) is used, for example, it may not be possible to determine the vertical positional deviation in the extended state or intermediate performance state, and the lifting/reversing performance device 770 may not be able to be maintained in the correct position.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the second operating unit 700 is provided with a detection sensor 713 corresponding to the standby state, intermediate state, and extended state. Therefore, for example, when a load in the front-to-rear width direction is applied to the gaming machine in the intermediate state, and the vertical positions of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 and the lifting/reversing plate member 740 change, the posture of the gear cam member 734 changes in conjunction with the load, so that it is possible to determine that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction, and by rotating the drive motor 731 in a direction that properly corrects the posture of the gear cam member 734 (to the intermediate state) based on this determination result, it is possible to properly maintain the position of the lifting/reversing performance device 770.

When the detected portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is positioned on the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, and it is determined that the detected portion 735 has come off the detection sensor 713 due to an unintended load, in this embodiment, although it is not possible to determine in which direction the detected portion 735 has come off, the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven in a direction that first displaces the performance device 780 downward. This makes it possible to prevent a collision between the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800.

In this embodiment, if this drive causes the detectable part 735 to again enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, it is understood that the displacement of the detectable part 735 due to the unintended load has occurred in the direction of upward displacement of the performance device 780, and if the drive is stopped at that point, the effect caused by the unintended load can be offset.

Furthermore, if this drive causes the detectable portion 735 to enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the performance standby state without entering the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, it is understood that the displacement of the detectable portion 735 due to the unintended load has occurred on the side that displaces the performance device 780 downward. If the drive is continued so as to displace it upward again and the drive is stopped when the detectable portion 735 enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, the effect caused by the unintended load can be offset.

The detected portion 735 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension portion 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 713. This makes it possible to improve the resolution for detecting the position of the gear cam member 734.

The detection sensor 778d is a detection device for detecting the posture of the upside-down member 781 of the second operating unit 700, and the arc-shaped protrusion 781d can enter the detection groove. There are two detection devices for the second operating unit 700 to detect the posture of the upside-down member 781 (see FIG. 56), which correspond to the upright vertical arrangement state and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781, respectively.

The second operating unit 700 is in a combined state in which the pair of covering members 787 arranged on the left and right sides are close to each other when the upside-down member 781 is in an upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)) or in an inverted vertical position (see FIG. 59(c)).

For example, if only a single detection sensor 778d (a detection device that inverts the upright vertical arrangement state of the upright inverted member 781) is employed, it is possible to determine the deviation of the upright inverted member 781 from the upright vertical arrangement state, and it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 782 so as to maintain the combined state of the covering member 787 based on the determination result. On the other hand, since it is not possible to determine the deviation of the upright inverted member 781 from the inverted vertical arrangement state, even if the combined state of the covering member 787 in the inverted vertical arrangement state changes due to an unintended load, poor control, or the like, the change in state cannot be determined by the detection sensor 778d, and the combined state will continue to be released, which is not desirable from the perspective of presentation.

In contrast to this, according to this embodiment, a detection sensor 778d is provided that corresponds to the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781 and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781. Therefore, regardless of whether the upright vertical arrangement state or the inverted vertical arrangement state is present, the detection sensor 778d can determine that a state change from the combined state has occurred, and the covering member 787 can be returned to the combined state by controlling the drive motor 782 to return to the combined state based on the determination result. This can improve the presentation effect of the second operating unit 700.

The arc-shaped protrusion 781d that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 778d. This improves the resolution for detecting the position of the upside-down member 781.

The detection sensor 813 of the third operating unit 800 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840 of the third operating unit 800, and the detection groove allows the detected part 844 to enter (see FIG. 60). The third operating unit 800 has one detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840, and this single detection device is used (shared) to determine the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 itself and the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 when the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 has stopped (switching rotation operation).

The detected portion 844 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension portion 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 813. This makes it possible to improve the resolution for detecting the position of the outer rotating member 840.

The detection sensor 813 is arranged for the purpose of detecting the position of the outer rotating member 840, and there is only one of them, so it is insufficient to determine the deviation of the decorative members 870, 880 from the combined state. For example, even if a displacement occurs that releases the combined state when the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in a position in which the detection target portion 844 is not positioned on the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor 813 cannot determine this.

For this reason, rather than determining whether there has been a deviation from the combined state and then controlling the return to the combined state, it is considered preferable to control the drive motor 861 to rotate for a fixed time (e.g., a short time) at fixed time intervals in a direction that returns the decorative members 870, 880 to the combined state (a direction that rotates the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front in the individual combined state (see Figure 66 (a)), and a direction that rotates the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the united state (see Figure 103 (b))).

With this control, even if the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 is unexpectedly released, the decorative members 870, 880 can be returned to the combined state by driving the drive motor 861 at regular time intervals, so that it is possible to prevent the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 from being maintained in a released state for a long period of time.

As a second cross-sectional explanation, the function of magnets Mg and Mg2 will be explained. As mentioned above, in the second operating unit 700, magnet Mg functions to maintain the position of covering member 787, and in the third operating unit 800, magnet Mg2 functions to maintain the combined state of decorative members 870 and 880. Similar technologies are used, but the design concepts for the direction of the load generated by magnets Mg and Mg2 are different, which will be explained here.

The second operating unit 700 is designed so that the direction of the magnetic force generated between the magnets Mg and the metal screws arranged on the left and right sides is aligned in the front-to-back direction at both the left and right positions. In other words, the line of action of the magnetic force is designed to be parallel to a plane perpendicular to the metal rod 785a that serves as the axis of rotation of the rotating operation of the covering member 787.

In this case, compared to when the magnetic force of the magnets Mg is generated in the axial direction of the metal rods 785a, the degree (magnitude) of the magnetic force generated as resistance to the sliding displacement of the covering members 787 moving toward and away from each other can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the operating resistance of the covering members 787 when they start to operate.

On the other hand, the third operating unit 800 is designed so that the direction of the line of action of the magnetic force generated between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 arranged in the decorative member 880 is arranged on a plane parallel to the plane on which the five metal rods 832, which serve as the rotation axis of the rotational movement of the decorative member 880, are arranged (a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830).

In this case, the degree to which the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 applies a load in the direction of rotation to the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced, making it easier to avoid malfunctions that would otherwise occur when the decorative members 870, 880 wobble in the direction of rotation due to magnetic force.

As a third cross-sectional explanation, we will explain the presentation that allows the display on the display device such as the third pattern display device 81 and the operating units 600, 700, and 800 to be viewed as a single unit.

In the first operating unit 600, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned so that it appears to overlap with the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 29). Therefore, for example, by displaying a position corresponding to the position of the protruding decorative portion 652b near the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make the display area and the protruding decorative portion 652b easier to see as a unified display performance.

In the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is positioned at the same height between the inner lower edge of the center frame 86 and the lower edge of the opening 511a (see Figures 26 and 52). Therefore, for example, by displaying a position corresponding to the position of the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 near the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make the display area and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 easier to view as a unified display performance.

In the third operating unit 800, each first covered portion 875 that is visible to the player in the individual combined state is decorated differently, and in the extended state, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is positioned to surround it when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first covered portion 875 is positioned in a range close to the first covered portion 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make it easier to view the display area and the first covered portion 875 as a unified display performance.

In addition, if the third operating unit 800 is driven and controlled to rotate as a unit, it becomes possible to execute a roulette-like operation in which each first covered portion 875 rotates. Even in this case, for example, by moving the display so as to run parallel to the first covered portion 875 in a range close to the first covered portion 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the display area and the first covered portion 875 as a unified display effect.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 108. In the first embodiment, the internal shapes of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 are fixed, but the sorting device 2300 of the second embodiment is equipped with a first flow path configuration part 2334 whose internal shape is variable. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

When describing the first flow path component 2334 as an alternative to the first flow path component 334 in the first embodiment, the configuration disposed on the right side is illustrated and described, but the configuration disposed on the left side can also be the first flow path component 2334. In addition, the configurations may be different between the left and right sides, such that only one of the left and right sides is the first flow path component 2334 and the other is the first flow path component 334.

Figure 108 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 2300 in the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in Figure 15. As shown in Figure 108, the first flow path component 2334 of the sorting device 2300 includes a through hole 2410 drilled in the front-rear direction at the bottom of the curved protrusion 334b, a slide member 2420 guided along the through hole 2410 so as to be able to slide back and forth, and a solenoid 2430 disposed inside the rear frame portion 332 so as to be able to generate a driving force for sliding the slide member 2420.

In FIG. 108, the front position FP of the slide member 2420 when the solenoid 2430 is in a non-energized state is shown by a solid line. When the solenoid 2430 is energized, the driving force of the solenoid 2430 causes the slide member 2420 to slide to the rear position RP.

In this embodiment, in the front arrangement FP of the slide member 2420, the upper side of the slide member 2420 is configured to protrude inward (upward) from the bottom surface 2334c, which is the bottom surface of the fixed flow path and on which the balls can roll, and in the rear arrangement RP, the upper side of the slide member 2420 is configured not to protrude inward (upward) from the bottom surface 2334c.

That is, in the front position FP of the slide member 2420, the ball abuts against the upper surface of the slide member 2420, and in the rear position RP of the slide member 2420, the slide member 2420 and the ball do not abut.

The upper surface of the slide member 2420 is formed as a plane parallel to the bottom surface 2334c. Therefore, even if the slide member 2420 slides while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334c, the effect on the flow of the ball can be kept small.

The downward flow direction of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334c is diagonally downward toward the front, and the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 is the front-to-back direction, so the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 is along the downward flow direction of the ball. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 affects the strength of the ball's rotation.

The ball rolls on bottom surface 2334c facing forward, so that it rotates in a forward rolling direction in the direction of travel (forward). When solenoid 2430 is de-energized (see FIG. 108), and current is applied to solenoid 2430, causing slide member 2420 to slide from front arrangement FP to rear arrangement RP, a rearward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the ball rolling on the upper surface of slide member 2420. This accelerates the forward rolling rotation of the ball, increasing the degree of rotation of the ball and increasing the rolling speed of the ball.

On the other hand, when the solenoid 2430 is changed from an energized state to a non-energized state (see FIG. 108), causing the slide member 2420 to slide from the rear arrangement RP to the front arrangement FP, a forward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334b via the upper surface of the slide member 2420. As a result, the forward rotation of the ball is decelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball can be reduced, and the rolling speed of the ball can be slowed down.

Furthermore, since the vertical position of the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 in the front arrangement FP is higher than the vertical position of the bottom surface 2334b, in addition to the frictional force from the slide member 2420, a load is generated in a direction pushing the ball upward. Therefore, the vertical speed of the ball rolling downward can be reduced, and the flow speed of the ball can be decelerated.

In this way, according to this embodiment, by executing control to cause a sliding displacement of the sliding member 2420 while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334b, it is possible to change the flow speed of the ball flowing down inside the sorting device 2300. This makes it possible to variably control the time from when the ball passes through the ball passing hole 163b until it reaches the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 74).

In this embodiment, the slide member 2420 is positioned behind the second flow path component 335, making it difficult for the player to understand the state in which the ball is being affected by the slide member 2420.

In other words, the ball comes into contact with the slide member 2420 before it is introduced into the second flow path component 335, which is easily visible to the player and likely to attract attention, making it difficult for the player to grasp how the ball is being given rotation or displaced vertically. This reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player as he or she watches the ball flow down the second flow path component 335.

In this embodiment, when the slide member 2420 is displaced while a ball is positioned above the bottom surface 2334c, a contact load is applied, whereas a ball passing above the bottom surface 2334c before or after the displacement of the slide member 2420 (when stopped) is not subjected to a contact load with the slide member 2420.

Therefore, the flow pattern (rotation, change in rotation, flow speed, change in flow speed, etc.) can be made different between the ball placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is in operation and the ball placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is stopped.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109. In the first embodiment, the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side, but in the allocation device 3300 of the third embodiment, the special rate detection sensor SE11 is moved to the rear of the normal detection sensor SE12, so that the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and rear. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

As an example of a change in the position of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, the explanation will be given to the right of the center, but the configuration on the left side of the left and right can be designed as desired. For example, on the left side, the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 can be arranged side by side as in the first embodiment, so that the positions of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are different on the left and right of the sorting device 3300, or on the left side, they can be arranged side by side, as described in detail below, so that the positions of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are symmetrical on the left and right of the sorting device 3300.

Figures 109(a) and 109(b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3300 in the third embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. Figure 109(a) illustrates a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see Figure 17) is de-energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, and Figure 109(b) illustrates a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position.

In addition, in Figures 109(a) and 109(b), the guide path of the ball after it flows through the third flow path component 336 is shown by imaginary lines. In this way, the guide path of the ball is changed depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

As shown in Figures 109(a) and 109(b), the middle member 3330 of the distribution device 3300 has a rear frame portion 3332 that defines the ball guide path to the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, and is configured in a shape that is open so that balls can be received from the left side.

The sliding displacement member 3370 is configured to be able to slide between a front position and a rear position. The rear position of the sliding displacement member 3370 (see FIG. 109(b)) is set as a position where the right end of the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 and the rear inner surface of the opening 3332g formed in the rear frame portion 3332 as the entrance of the path that guides the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11 are aligned on the left and right (or the right end of the front side surface 376a is positioned slightly forward).

By setting the position of the slide displacement member 3370 in this manner, if the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, the ball that passes through the third flow path component 336 is caused to flow to the right while abutting against the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12; on the other hand, if the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the ball that passes through the third flow path component 336 is caused to flow to the right while abutting against the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370, and passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In other words, the flow path of the ball passing through the normal detection sensor SE12 and the flow path of the ball passing through the special chance detection sensor SE11 are both configured as flow paths that flow to the right after passing through the third flow path configuration section 336. The only difference is the forward and backward position where the ball flows to the right.

As a result, it is difficult for a player looking at the third flow path configuration portion 336 from the front to determine whether the ball has flowed to the special bonus detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

The slide displacement member 3370 includes a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c extending from the front end of the thin plate portion 371 toward the front side in a rod shape, an upper front protrusion portion 3376b formed integrally with the upper protrusion portion 376, and an upper lateral protrusion portion 3376c formed integrally with the upper protrusion portion 376.

The upper surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, and is formed in a pair on the left and right sides of the center of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. It penetrates the front side of the discharge hole 337 and is configured so that it can be stored on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path component 336.

In other words, when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is positioned on the underside of the third flow path component 336 and does not come into contact with the ball, and when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is disposed across the front-to-rear gap between the front side surface of the discharge hole 337 and the ball guide portion 371b.

By configuring the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c in this manner, when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the lower left and right parts of the ball can be supported by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, and the ball can be bridged to the sliding displacement member 3370.

This makes it easier to prevent the ball from flowing down toward the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position. In other words, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c makes it easier to prevent the ball from being erroneously guided down.

In addition, the ball that has passed through the third flow path component 336 is positioned on the upper surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, which is formed flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, thereby making it possible to avoid a frontal collision between the ball and the ball guide portion 371b in the front-to-rear direction. In other words, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball collides head-on with the ball guide portion 371b, causing the ball to flow backward forward, or a situation in which the ball gets caught between the front surface of the ball guide portion 371b and the front surface of the discharge hole 337, causing malfunction.

The upper front protrusion 3376b is a shaped portion that is similar to the front-to-rear long protrusion 317 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment and is integrally formed with the upper protrusion 376 in the same relative position as the relative position at the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 in the first embodiment.

The upper lateral protrusion 3376c is a shaped portion that is similar to the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment and is integrally formed with the upper front protrusion 3376b in the same relative position as the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 in the first embodiment.

As a result, the action of the upper front protrusion 3376b and the upper side protrusion 3376c on the ball they come into contact with occurs as an action on the ball flowing down near the upper protrusion 376, regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

In other words, unlike when the front-rear long protrusion 317 and the left-right inner protrusion 318 (see FIG. 18) are fixed in position, when the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the protrusions 3376b and 3376c can eliminate the effect of urging a ball that has reached the forward position of the upper protrusion 376 toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 110 and 111. In the first embodiment, the special probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side, but in the allocation device 4300 of the fourth embodiment, the position of the normal detection sensor SE12 is moved to the rear of the special probability detection sensor SE11, so that the special probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and rear. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 110(a) and 110(b) are schematic top views of the third flow path component 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370, which show the configuration of the downstream side of the third flow path component 336 in the fourth embodiment.

Figure 111(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 taken along the line CXIa-CXIa in Figure 110(a), and Figure 111(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 taken along the line CXIb-CXIb in Figure 110(b). In Figure 111(b), the upper abutment portion 4373 is omitted for ease of understanding.

The sliding displacement member 4370 is configured to block either the special rate detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 so that the ball cannot pass through, and to open the other to allow the ball to pass through. It is equipped with a front sliding member 4371 that slides left and right above the special rate detection sensor SE11, and a rear sliding member 4375 that slides left and right above the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front slide member 4371 and the rear slide member 4375 slide in opposite directions to each other by the driving force of the solenoid. That is, when changing from the front open state shown in FIG. 110(a) and FIG. 111(a) to the rear open state shown in FIG. 110(b) and FIG. 111(b), the front slide member 4371 slides to the left and the rear slide member 4375 slides to the right.

The front slide member 4371 includes a slide plate 4372 that is arranged to cover the upper part of the probability change detection sensor SE11, and an upper abutment part 4373 that is formed in a shape similar to that of the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 17), and is integrally formed by a connecting part (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4372 and the upper abutment part 4373 slide and displace integrally.

The upper surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372 is flush with the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336, and is formed as an inclined plane with the same inclination in the front-to-rear direction (see FIG. 111(b)). Therefore, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the inclination of the upper surface 4372a allows the ball rolling on the upper surface 4372a to flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12. On the other hand, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the ball that has passed the lower bottom surface 336a comes into contact with the upper abutment portion 4373 and is subjected to a load, causing it to flow downward (to the lower right).

Therefore, when the front slide member 4371 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, it comes into contact with the ball at different points and is configured to change state so as to guide (flow) the ball in different directions.

The rear slide member 4375 includes a slide plate 4376 that is arranged so as to cover the upper part of the normal detection sensor SE12, and an upper abutment part 4377 that is formed in a shape similar to that of the front-rear long protrusion part 317 (see FIG. 17), and is integrally formed by a connecting part (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4376 and the upper abutment part 4377 slide and displace integrally.

The upper surface 4376a of the slide plate 4376 is an inclined plane formed from a shape that is the opposite of the upper surface 4372a (see FIG. 111(a)). Therefore, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the inclination of the upper surface 4376a allows the ball placed on the upper surface 4376a to flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the ball that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a and the upper surface 6372a comes into contact with the upper abutment portion 4377 and is subjected to a load, causing it to flow downward.

Therefore, the rear slide member 4375 is configured so that when the front open state and the rear open state change, it comes into contact with the ball at different points and changes state to guide (flow) the ball in different directions.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible that a ball that has passed backwards above the probability change detection sensor SE11 may return above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 again, thereby improving attention to the ball that has passed through the third flow path configuration portion 336.

As an example of how the ball returns to above the probability change detection sensor SE11, a solenoid may be driven to change state from the rear open state to the front open state when the ball passes backwards over the upper surface 4372a. In this case, the ball will run onto the upper surface 4376a before passing through the normal detection sensor SE12, and will flow backward along the slope of the upper surface 4376a, returning to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this way, when the timing of the ball passing through the third flow path component 336 coincides with the timing of the slide displacement member 4370 being driven, the ball is configured to return to the side of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, compared to gaming machines configured so that a ball that passes above the probability change detection sensor SE11 downstream does not pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11, attention to the ball after passing through the third flow path component 336 and the timing of the slide displacement member 4370 being driven can be improved.

Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112. In the first embodiment, the flow path of the balls is common up to the third flow path component 336, and the branch point BP1 is located behind the third flow path component 336. However, in the sorting device 5300 of the fifth embodiment, a slide displacement member 5370 is disposed upstream of the third flow path component 336, and the flow path of the balls changes upstream of the third flow path component 336. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 112(a) and 112(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device 5300 in the fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. Figure 112(a) shows a state in which the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the right side and the ball is guided by the sliding displacement member 5370 to the special detection sensor SE11, while Figure 112(b) shows a state in which the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the left side and the ball is guided by the sliding displacement member 5370 to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in Figures 112(a) and 112(b), the guide path of the ball after it flows through the first flow path component 334 is shown by imaginary lines. In this way, the guide path of the ball is changed depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 5370.

The sliding displacement member 5370 is configured to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown), and includes a thin plate portion 5371 that forms the rolling surface of the ball, and an upper protruding portion 5376 that protrudes upward from the upper surface of the thin plate portion 5371.

The thin plate portion 5371 is formed thin enough that the ball that has passed through the first flow path component 334 can ride up on it. The left side surface 5376a of the upper protrusion portion 5376 that faces the ball is formed in an arc shape with a concave flow path side, so that the ball can be smoothly guided backward.

In this embodiment, as with the sorting device 5300, the path along which the balls flow is long from front to back, and a configuration is adopted in which the visibility of balls flowing down the front side is higher than that of balls flowing down the rear side, while the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the front side where the visibility of the balls is higher, making it easier for the player to distinguish the manner in which the balls flow down (path along which the balls flow down)

In this embodiment, when the slide displacement member 5370 is positioned at the right side, the entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is not particularly blocked, and the structure allows balls to enter. On the other hand, balls flowing downstream on the upstream side of the entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 flow toward the front side while flowing downstream through the first flow path configuration portion 334.

As a result, immediately after passing through the first flow path configuration portion 334, a velocity in the opposite direction, namely backward, is unlikely to occur, making it difficult for the ball to enter the entrance to the path to the normal detection sensor SE11. Therefore, in this embodiment, a component for blocking the entrance to the path to the normal detection sensor SE11 is omitted, thereby reducing material costs.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113. In the first embodiment, the left and right flow paths are separated by the partition plate portion 338, and the flow paths do not merge. However, in the sorting device 6300 of the sixth embodiment, a merged flow path 6341 extending rightward from the downstream side of the curved protrusion 334b on the left is connected to the third flow path forming portion 336 on the right. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 113 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. As shown in Figure 113, the flow path on the right side of the sorting device 6300 is formed from flow path components 334 to 336, similar to the first embodiment.

On the other hand, the left flow path of the sorting device 6300 is formed from a merging flow path 6341 that extends in a straight line to the right from a point on the front side of the curved protrusion 334b with a space for one ball, and this merging flow path 6341 is connected to the third flow path component 336 as the right flow path. Therefore, in this embodiment, the balls flowing down the right flow path and the balls flowing down the left flow path merge at the connection point JP1 where the flow paths are connected, and the balls may collide with each other.

The merging flow path 6341 has a raised floor 6342 at the lower end of the flow path. The raised floor 6342 is formed as a floor surface at a position higher than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336. This allows a difference in height between the balls flowing from the merging flow path 6341 to the connection point JP1 and the balls flowing down the right flow path and into the third flow path component 336, thereby reducing the degree of backflow that occurs when the balls collide with each other.

The contact between the balls at the connection point JP1 can delay the flow of the balls compared to when the balls do not contact each other. This makes it possible to change the time it takes for a ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see Figure 16) to reach the branch point BP1 depending on whether the balls contact each other or not.

The operation timing of the sliding displacement member 370 is set to a constant operation from the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b, regardless of the ball's entry state, so by changing the timing at which the ball reaches the branch point BP1, it is possible to make the ball reach the branch point BP1 when the sliding displacement member 370 is in a different position.

The premise for balls to come into contact with each other is that the balls merge and that there are balls flowing down the merging flow path 6341. If the player wants to make contact between the balls, he or she can play by adjusting the firing strength so that the balls enter each of the pair of ball passing holes 163b on the left and right (see Figure 74). If the player wants to avoid contact between the balls, he or she can play by adjusting the firing strength so that the balls enter only the ball passing hole 163b on one side (the right side).

According to this embodiment, adjusting the ball launch strength is related to whether or not the ball makes contact at the connection point JP1, and is related to the state of the slide displacement member 370 at the time the ball reaches the branch point BP1, so it directly affects the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to adjust the ball launch strength.

In addition, according to this embodiment, contact at the connection point JP1 is closely related to the formation of a series of balls. In other words, two balls that come into contact at the connection point JP1 can be made to flow down to the branch point BP1 while being placed close to each other.

Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 114 and 115. In the first embodiment, the case was described where the flow path to the branch point BP1 was only the flow path formed by the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336, but the sorting device 7300 of the seventh embodiment is configured so that the balls can flow down to the branch point BP1 without passing through the first flow path configuration part 334 and the second flow path configuration part 335. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 114 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, and Figure 115 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 7300 taken along line CXV-CXV in Figure 114. As shown in Figures 114 and 115, the sorting device 7300 has a ball passing hole 7163b formed in an opening at approximately the center in the left-right direction in addition to the ball passing hole 163b as a path through which balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a can pass.

The ball passage hole 7163b is formed as a ball passage opening for the detection sensor SE71, which has the same function as the detection sensor SE1, which is used to detect balls entering the variable winning device 65 and to detect the timing to change the state of the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state when a specified number of balls have entered.

A cylindrical flow path 7164 is disposed downstream of the ball passing hole 7163b, and extends with a rectangular cylindrical cross section in a direction that slopes downward toward the rear. The cylindrical flow path 7164 is formed large enough to allow balls to flow down inside, and its end portion extends to the upper front side of the branch point BP1. In other words, the ball that passes through the ball passing hole 7163b is configured to flow down inside the cylindrical flow path 7164 and reach the branch point BP1.

The length of time required for the ball to pass through the cylindrical flow path 7164 is set to be shorter than the length of time required for the ball to pass through the flow path components 334-336, and is set to be equal to the length of time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path component 334.

Therefore, for example, when the sorting device 7300 is driven and controlled with the above-mentioned operation pattern Y (see FIG. 25), as described above, a ball that passes through the ball passing hole 163b and passes through the flow path configuration parts 334-336 can only reach the branch point BP1 after the slide displacement member 370 has returned to its front position, whereas a ball that passes through the ball passing hole 7163b and flows down the cylindrical flow path 7164 may reach the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In particular, a ball that passes through the ball passage hole 7163b immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b changes to the open state is likely to reach the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In other words, even if the driving control pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is the same, the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a can be configured to pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or not depending on whether the ball passes through the ball passing hole 163b or the ball passing hole 7163b. This can improve the player's attention to the flow of the ball inside the specific winning opening 65a.

As shown in FIG. 114, the cylindrical flow path 7164 is positioned to prevent the cylindrical flow path 7164 from reducing the visibility of the branch point BP1, the sliding displacement member 370, and the flow path components 334-336 when viewed from a general viewing direction during play.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the visibility of the branch point BP1 is maintained high, while the number of flow paths through which the ball is guided to the branch point BP1 is increased, which increases the variety of the length of time it takes for the ball to reach the branch point BP1, thereby improving the player's attention to the specific winning port 65a.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116. In the first embodiment, the long guide hole 616 of the first operating unit 600 connects the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b at one location, and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting position to switch the displacement direction of the axis O1. In the first operating unit 8600 of the eighth embodiment, the long guide hole 8616 is connected at multiple locations (two locations), and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting position to switch the displacement direction of the displacement direction O1. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 116 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 8616 and the rotating member 620 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in Figure 116, the guide elongated hole 8616 is bent twice to the left and right below the linear portion 616a.

That is, the guide slot 8616 includes a straight portion 616a, a first curved portion 8616b connected to the lower end of the straight portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape), and a second curved portion 8616c connected to the lower end of the first curved portion 8616b and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape) whose center of curvature radius is opposite to that of the first curved portion 8616b.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end position of the straight portion 616a, i.e., at the connection between the straight portion 616a and the first curved portion 8616b, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched, and the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (slowed down).

In addition, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end of the first curved portion 8616b, i.e., at the connection between the first curved portion 8616b and the second curved portion 8616c, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched, and the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (slowed down).

In this way, since it is possible to configure multiple intermediate positions at which it is easy to stop the axis O1, it is possible to increase the variety (variations) of stopping postures of the second decorative rotating member 660 (see Figure 43) that is stopped midway by stopping the axis O1 midway.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117. In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 of the first operating unit 600 is configured with a single path. However, in the first operating unit 9600 of the ninth embodiment, the guide slot 9616 has a first path configured with a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b, and a second path connected to the right side of the first path. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 117 is a front schematic diagram showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 9616 and the rotating member 620 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in Figure 117, the guide elongated hole 9616 has a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b like the guide elongated hole 616 in the first embodiment, and also has an angle maintaining portion 9616c that extends obliquely to the right from the connection point between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, and a connection portion 9616d that extends from the right end of the angle maintaining portion 9616c toward the curved portion 616b and is connected to a midpoint of the curved portion 616b.

The angle maintaining portion 9616c is formed in the same direction as the displacement trajectory of the axis O1 when it is assumed that the axis O1 is displaced while maintaining the angle θ when the rotating member 620 is rotated in the tilting direction from a state in which the axis O1 is disposed at the connection point between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b (see Figures 43 and 44).

In this way, the angle θ is maintained while the axis O1 is displaced through the angle maintaining portion 9616c, so the rotational orientation of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is maintained in such a manner that the third performance surface 661c faces forward (see Figure 43).

In other words, when the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c as the rotating member 620 rotates and displaces, the rotational mode of the box-shaped member 661, which rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction, is such that the third performance surface 661c can maintain a position facing forward over the formation length (formation angle width) of the angle maintaining portion 9616c.

When the axis O1 is displaced at the connecting portion 9616d, the change in angle θ accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is permitted, so the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620.

On the other hand, even if the tilt angle of the rotating member 620 is the same, the magnitude of the angle θ when the axis O1 is positioned on the curved portion 616b is different from the magnitude of the angle θ when the axis O1 is positioned on the connecting portion 9616d. Therefore, by making the path along which the axis O1 is displaced different between the left and right, it is possible to make the intermediate posture of the box-shaped member 661 that is linked to the rotation of the rotating member 620 different.

In addition, regardless of whether the path along which the axis O1 moves is to the left or right, there is only one angle θ when the axis O1 is located at the upper end of the range of possible displacement, and one angle θ when the axis O1 is located at the lower end, so the position of the box-shaped member 661 can be maintained when the axis O1 is located at the upper or lower end of the range of possible displacement (see Figures 40 and 45).

In other words, in this embodiment, when the axis O1 is positioned between the ends (midway position) of the displaceable range, it is possible to generate multiple types of arrangements of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 (see Figures 43 and 44) related to the arrangement of the axis O1, and multiple types of displacement speeds of the supported member 640 and rotation speeds of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 related to the displacement speed of the axis O1.

The guide slot 9616 is merely configured with multiple paths and does not have a mechanism for limiting the path along which the axis O1 can be displaced. This makes it possible to avoid malfunctions caused by a malfunction of the path limiting mechanism and to reduce product costs by simplifying the configuration.

On the other hand, the branching of the displacement path of the axis O1 can be controlled by the direction of the load applied to the axis O1 via the rotating member 620. This will be explained below. First, the case where the rotating member 620 is rotated and displaced in the tilting direction will be explained.

First, when the axis O1 is displaced along the left path (straight line portion 616a and curved line portion 616b), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is controlled so that the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 does not stop midway.

In this case, the axis O1 enters the curved portion 616b due to the inertia of the displacement along the direction in which the straight portion 616a extends (the up-down direction), and displaces to the lower end position of the guide slot 9616.

Secondly, when the axis O1 is displaced along the right path (angle maintaining portion 9616c and connecting portion 9616d), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is driven and controlled to stop or decelerate the rotating member 620 when the axis O1 is positioned at the connecting point of the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, and then the drive motor 631 is driven and controlled again in the same direction.

In this case, the inertia of the displacement along the direction in which the straight portion 616a extends (the up-down direction) is reduced, so the choice of whether the axis O1 will displace along the left path or the right path is made based on the side with less displacement resistance.

Here, when the axis O1 enters the angle maintaining portion 9616c, the magnitude of the angle θ is maintained, so there is no need to transmit the driving force to the intermediate gear 644 (see FIG. 44) that rotates in mesh with the rotating member 620, or to a member downstream of the intermediate gear 644 in the transmission of the driving force. In other words, because there is less displacement resistance, the axis O1 can enter the angle maintaining portion 9616b side.

In this way, in this embodiment, in drive control of the tilting direction of the rotating member 620, the drive motor 631 can be controlled to stop midway or not, allowing the path along which the axis O1 is displaced to be selected.

When the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction, the axis O1 receives a load from the rotating member 620 in the diagonal upper right direction, so that the axis O1 is unlikely to be displaced so as to enter the connecting portion 9616d, and the axis O1 can be displaced upward along the curved portion 616b.

In this embodiment, the connection point between the connecting portion 9616d and the curved portion 616b is set at a midpoint of the curved portion 616b, so that the right side surface of the curved portion 616b is formed as a surface that slopes upward and to the left and is located to the upper right of the axis O1, which is located at the bottom end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from displacing upward (bouncing back) along a circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is in no way limited to the above embodiment, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with some or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the balls are first caused to flow toward the front by the sorting device 300, and then flow backwards, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to ensure the time required for the balls to flow downward by forming multiple bends in the path or a deceleration protrusion that decelerates the balls, without forming a portion that causes the balls to flow toward the front.

In the above first embodiment, the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 is described as being curved, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and any shape can be used as long as it can block the flow of balls by contact. For example, it may be configured as an inclined flat surface, or may be formed with many small protrusions protruding from a flat surface, so that an irregular load is applied to the colliding ball.

In the above first embodiment, a ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a flows down the sorting device 300 primarily through the flow path components 334 to 336 in order, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, an opening penetrating downwards may be formed in the center of the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, allowing the ball to flow directly into the third flow path component 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one at a time, they do not pass through the opening, but when multiple balls enter the specific winning opening 65a together, the balls may be configured to pass through the opening. In this case, the time it takes for the balls to reach the sliding displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a pass through the opening or not.

In the first embodiment, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path configuration section 335. In this case, the order of the first flow path configuration section 334 and the second flow path configuration section 335 may be reversed. In other words, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, the branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the left and right directions, or the branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the front and back directions (flowing down toward the front side).

In the first embodiment, the flow path direction and inclination of each flow path component 334-336 were described as features of the sorting device 300 alone, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when installing the pachinko machine 10 on an island, the flow path direction and inclination may be designed taking into account the "laying down" that is performed on a daily basis.

"Laying down" refers to installing the pachinko machine 10 in a tilted position in the front-to-rear direction, rather than in a vertical position. Normally, pachinko machines are installed in a position (laying down) tilted backwards by about 1 degree (four-five rin). Compared to the explanation of the sorting device 300 alone (not laying down) above, when considering an installation angle of about 1 degree, the meaning of the inclination of the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 336, which have a tilt in the front-to-rear direction, changes.

In other words, as described above, the sorting device 300 alone is designed so that the first flow path component 334 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 7 degrees to the front, and the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 5 degrees to the rear, but when the installation angle is considered, both the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 form flow paths that are inclined downward by 6 degrees. On the other hand, the second flow path component 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, so it is less affected by the installation angle and can be considered to be inclined at about 5 degrees, as described above.

In this case, the acceleration of the balls flowing down through the sorting device 300 is the same in the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336, and the acceleration is slightly smaller in the second flow path component 335. This allows the speed at which the balls flow down in the left and right directions to be slowed down, making it easier for the player to see the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335. Also, since the first flow path component 334 remains shorter than the third flow path component 336, the balls can pass through the first flow path component 334 in a shorter time than they pass through the third flow path component 336.

In this way, the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the laying of the pachinko machine 10 because it has flow paths in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path component 334, 336 is made smaller than the laying angle (approximately 1 degree), the flow direction of the balls in the flow path components 334, 336 will change (reverse) depending on the quality of the laying (angle setting), so the inclination angle needs to be set to an angle larger than the laying angle.

In addition, if the flow path inside the sorting device 300 is configured to allow the balls to flow in the forward and backward directions and is visible, it may be possible to determine the degree of tilt of the pachinko machine 10 from slight differences in the flow speed of the balls flowing down the path. If it is desired to allow the degree of tilt to be determined, the sorting device 300 should be configured so that the flow path is easily visible.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, in order to prevent the degree of "rest" from being understood from slight differences in the speed at which the ball flows down, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are arranged to surround the front periphery of each flow path component 334-336, the variable winning device 65 is arranged to cover the upper side, and the light diffusion surface 340 is arranged to reduce visibility on the lower side.

In this way, the visibility of the balls flowing down each flow path component 334-336 is made poor except at the player's normal line of sight (a range of 0 degrees to approximately 30 degrees from the front). This makes it possible to avoid the degree of "rest" of the pachinko machine 10 being understood by comparing the flow speed of the balls flowing down each flow path component 334-336.

In the first embodiment, the inclination of the first flow path component 334 is greater than the inclination of the third flow path component 336, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the relationship of the inclinations may be reversed, or the inclinations may be the same.

In addition, each of the flow path configuration sections 334 to 336 has been described as a straight flow path that is bent to form a spiral flow path, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may have a meandering shape, or may have a flow path that is bent in a staircase shape.

In addition, the flow paths are configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of each flow path configuration section 334-336, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow paths may be bent at acute angles or obtuse angles at the connection points. Also, a crane may be used as each of the flow path configuration sections 334-336.

In the first embodiment, the third flow path component 336 is designed so that the time required for a ball to pass through it is 0.3 seconds, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the third flow path component 336 may be designed so that the time required for the ball to pass through it is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). This allows the balls flowing upstream down the third flow path component 336 to function as a screen for the balls flowing downstream down the third flow path component 336, even if the balls enter the sorting device 300 while maintaining the launch interval (0.6 seconds).

In the first embodiment, the flow time of the ball is ensured by ensuring the path length of the flow path components 334-336, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to provide long, alternating ridges that protrude from both inner walls of the path up to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction that intersects with the flow direction of the game ball, and to configure the ball to decelerate by colliding with these ridges. This makes it possible to ensure the flow time of the ball without increasing the path length.

The deceleration ridges may be evenly arranged over the entire range of the path up to the slide displacement member 370, or may be unevenly arranged. For example, by forming no ridges on the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335, and forming ridges only on the third flow path component 336, the balls can be made to quickly reach the third flow path component 336 while flowing slowly down the third flow path component 336.

The protrusions may be provided in a direction such that they protrude alternately from the left and right directions toward the inside of the path along the ball's flow path, or they may be provided in a direction that protrudes upward from the bottom at a specified interval.

When protruding from the left and right, the load applied to the ball from the protrusion has a left and right component, so it is preferable to consider the placement so that this load does not erroneously guide the ball to the normal detection sensor SE12. For example, at the position closest to the sliding displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner portions, the load from the protrusions is directed not toward the normal detection sensor SE12 but toward the partition plate portion 338, making it easier to avoid the ball being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

When protruding from below to above, the protrusion itself may function as a screen for the sliding displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the formation height and formation position taking into account the player's line of sight.

The protrusions may be formed so that they can move in and out. In this case, they may be able to block the flow of the ball when in the protruding state, and resume the flow of the ball when in the retracted state.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the slide displacement member 370 is covered by the balls flowing down the front side is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be placed in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 may be covered by this decorative member. This decorative member may be driven, or may be operated by the weight of the balls.

In addition, the case where the ball provides a screen is not limited to the case where the ball is placed on the front side. For example, if a mirror is placed on the back side of the sliding displacement member 370 and the state of the sliding displacement member 370 is visually confirmed using the reflection of the mirror, the screen function can be achieved by placing the ball between the sliding displacement member 370 and the mirror.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the balls that reach the slide displacement member 370 are concealed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning opening 64 may be positioned behind the play area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning opening 64 may be concealed, or the other general winning openings 63 may be concealed.

In the above first embodiment, the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 are described as being formed from linear flow paths capable of guiding balls one by one, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be formed as meandering flow paths, or flow paths that branch into multiple paths, or they may be configured to have different flow path widths, with balls more likely to remain in the areas where the flow path width is large.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which a blindfolding effect is created by the balls heading toward the slide displacement member 370, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging balls that have entered the other winning holes 63, 64, 65, and 140 may be arranged in front of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so as to intersect at the front side), and the slide displacement member 370 may be blindfolded by the discharge path and the balls arranged on the discharge path.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which balls that enter the specific winning port 65a flow exclusively through the first flow path component 334 to the second flow path component 335 side (the near side), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism that distributes balls may be disposed downstream of the specific winning port 65a, and the distribution mechanism may select balls that flow to the second flow path component 335 side, so that some of the balls flow to the second flow path component 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be one that is displaced by the weight of the balls, or may be driven by a drive device to perform a certain operation from the opening and closing of the opening and closing plate 65b, or may be controlled to operate in a certain pattern from the power-on of the pachinko machine.

When controlling the drive, for example, the balls may be controlled to flow to the second flow path component 335 side when the type of winning ball changes. For example, when a ball enters a specific winning port 65a and the number of balls that enter exceeds the count number (10 balls/round) (excess winning), the balls may be configured to flow to the second flow path component 335 side. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 side can be compared with the number of excess winning balls paid out, allowing the player to quickly grasp the additional profit that can be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

Also, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down the distribution device 300, if a ball enters when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is four (full), the ball may be configured to flow to the second flow path configuration section 335 side. In this case, by visually checking the ball flowing on the second flow path configuration section 335 side, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols 1 is full. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

If the displacement is caused by the weight of the ball, a predetermined action may be repeated each time a ball arrives, or it may be configured to perform a different action depending on the number of arriving balls. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the balls may not flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335, and when two or more balls enter the specific winning openings 65a together, the balls may flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335. The reverse may also be possible.

Furthermore, these operating modes may be the same downstream of the detection sensors SE1 arranged in a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right.

Here, if it takes a long time for the balls to flow down from the specific winning opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370, the long ball discharge time may result in the game being drawn out. For this reason, for example, the above-mentioned distribution mechanism may be used to cause the first certain balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a to flow down the second flow path configuration part 335, and subsequent balls may be discharged without passing through the second flow path configuration part 335. This eliminates the need to wait for the count number of balls to finish flowing down the flow path configuration parts 334-336, and therefore the length between rounds can be set to be short.

In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is disposed below the third pattern display device 81, and the balls are directed toward the front near the bottom end of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the specific winning port 65a may be disposed above the bottom edge of the third pattern display device 81, and the flow path components 334-336 of the distribution device 300 may be disposed adjacent to the third pattern display device 81 or toward the front of the display area when viewed from the front.

In this case, the line of sight for viewing the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 can be directed toward the display area of the third pattern display device 81. In this case, by associating the amount of profit the player can obtain from the flow of the balls down the sorting device 300 with the content of the notification on the LCD display, the player can easily know whether the profit he or she has obtained is large or small by checking the display.

In addition, although a case has been described in which the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 are seen in a position shifted downward in front view with respect to the balls rolling on the third flow path component 336, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 may be configured in an arrangement relationship such that they are seen overlapping, without being shifted up or down in front view with respect to the balls rolling on the third flow path component 336. In this case, not only the balls that have entered the sorting device 300, but also the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 can function as a screen for the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In the above first embodiment, the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370 is described as switching the slide displacement member 370 to the front position at a time when the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach it, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to switch to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the forward flow ball that reaches the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds have passed can be made to enter the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that follows the forward flow ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has passed will enter the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

If the trailing ball is positioned to blind the forward flow ball, the player will not be able to see when the forward flow ball's flow changes (downward) toward the special chance detection sensor SE11, because the trailing ball will hide it. Furthermore, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, the player is likely to believe that the ball has not entered the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through-hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, which improves the presentation effect of the display in gaming machines that maintain the player's sense of anticipation by displaying the time-saving state and the probability variation state in the same way.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which a ball that collides with the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not flow to the normal detection sensor SE12 side due to the load caused by the collision alone, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flow path upstream of the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball before being guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured in multiple types (for example, by arranging a crane or widening the path width to increase the freedom of the ball's flow direction), and it can be configured so that the ball can be guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the load caused by the collision with the left and right inner protrusions 318 alone depending on the difference in the speed and rotation of the ball.

In the above first embodiment, the sliding displacement member 370 and each of the protruding portions 317 to 319 are formed as separate bodies, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the protruding portions 317 to 319 may be integrally formed with the sliding displacement member 370. In other words, at least one of the protruding portions 317 to 319 may protrude from the upper protruding portion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is described as operation pattern Y, which takes into account the possibility of being hidden by the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to incorporate control that causes the LED of the light-emitting means 351 to emit light when it is hidden by the ball.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the guide slot 616 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width length of the guide slot 616 to form an external phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed by using magnetic force or the biasing force of a coil spring.

In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 is configured to have a shape that is bent at an intermediate position, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slot may be configured to have a shape that is bent multiple times. In this case, multiple positions can be formed where the resistance to the vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

The shape of the guide slot 616 may also be designed for the purpose of varying the magnitude of the change in angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620. For example, the guide slot 616 may be formed in a shape capable of guiding the supported member 640 so as to partially form a range in which the magnitude of the angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620 can be maintained.

In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 is fixed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a plurality of guide slots 616 may be formed through which the axis O1 can move, and the guide slot 616 through which the axis O1 is guided may be switched by a predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that is switched by contacting the rotating member 620), or the guide slot 616 may be configured to be shape-changeable.

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration was described in which the first performance surface 661a faces diagonally forward and left when the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned to the right of the third pattern display device 81, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the performance surface may be configured to face diagonally forward and right when positioned to the left of the third pattern display device 81, or the performance surface may be configured to face diagonally forward and upward (downward) when positioned below (upper) the third pattern display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged at the base end of the displacement, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and a linearly displaceable member may be arranged at the base end of the displacement. On the other hand, using the rotating member 620 instead of a linearly displaceable member functions favorably in ensuring the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

For example, when a laterally sliding member is fixed to the driven side of the supported member 640, the angles that affect the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are limited to angles above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.). In contrast, when the rotating member 620 is used, not only angles above the horizontal but also angles below the horizontal (angle b1, etc.) can be used. Regardless of this advantageous effect, a linearly sliding member may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640.

In the above first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped, and decorations are applied to three sides that intersect at right angles, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and each side may be configured to be controlled to stop in a position facing forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch between displays that are easily viewed as one with the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700.

In the first embodiment, the rotation axis of the rotating member 620 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can intersect at a right angle, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 may be configured with a component in the front-to-rear direction as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the above first embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is set to make it easier to maintain the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet may be arranged near the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet may be configured to generate an adhesive force between itself and a magnet arranged on the right front plate member 710, so that this adhesive force is easily generated when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state.

In addition, for example, the inclined portions 751, 762 may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape, rather than being formed linearly. In addition, when using the coil spring CS2, the spring is not limited to a spring that generates a biasing force only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, and may be configured to generate a biasing force in response to the extension displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the above first embodiment, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c are elastically deformed to maintain the position of the shaft rotating member 785 until the attractive force of the magnet Mg is exceeded, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of elastic deformation of the gear, a tolerance may be set for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support tube that supports the shaft.

In the first embodiment, the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may protrude forward by downward displacement. In this case, it may go beyond the upper edge of the center frame 86 from below to the front, or it may protrude forward from above the play area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the first embodiment described above, the rotation of the covering member 787 is in the opposite direction, so that the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 are not visible together, thereby reducing the distinguishing ability, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 may rotate facing outward to the left and right, rather than facing the front side. Also, even if they rotate in the same direction, they may be configured to rotate at different rotation angles.

In the first embodiment described above, the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 are configured to rotate (reverse) the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member 834 using the rotation angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in a single stroke in the metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 and a protruding piece protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotation timing of the rotating member 834 can be determined depending on the design of the groove.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which control is performed such that it is determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation when the output of the detection sensor 813 changes from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is arranged on the detection sensor 813, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is reversed with the detectable portion 844 not arranged on the detection sensor 813, it may be determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation by detecting that the detectable portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813.

In the first embodiment, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are configured to differ in places, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be disposed on both decorative members 870 and 880, or both decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by providing a torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. Note that in the case of an oil damper, resistance continues to be generated at all times regardless of switching of the operating mode, so a torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotation direction after the operating mode is switched to the integral rotation operation, making it easier to achieve high-speed rotation after switching to the integral rotation operation.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating portion 871a has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833. However, when the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the tip side (outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 during the switching rotation operation, the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 is exposed, so that the light LD1 can be reflected.

In the first embodiment described above, the lower bottom surface of the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward to the left and right inward, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the first flow path component 334 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left and right direction, or may be configured to be inclined downward to the left and right inward. The former is more effective at reducing the momentum of the ball toward the second flow path component 335 than the latter.

In addition, for example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the second flow path component 335 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) in the front-to-rear direction, or may be configured to be inclined downward toward the rear. The former is more effective at reducing the momentum of the ball toward the third flow path component 336 than the latter.

In addition, although the third flow path component 336 has been described as having a rolling surface (bottom surface) that slopes downward inward in the left-right direction, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path component 336 may be configured to be non-sloping in the left-right direction (parallel to the horizontal plane). In this case, the degree to which the balls are biased toward the partition plate portion 338 decreases, so the degree of damage to the partition plate portion 338 due to collisions and friction with the balls can be kept low.

In the first embodiment, the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d is arranged outside the trajectory of the ball passing through the branching point, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d may be configured to pass inside the trajectory of the ball passing through the branching point (by lowering the arrangement position). In this case, when the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned on, the ball passing through the branching point overlaps with the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d, so that the light can be configured to be reflected to the back side, and a state in which the light does not reach the light diffusion surface 333b (dark state) can be achieved.

In other words, the outer light-emitting means 351d remains lit, and the manner in which the ball flows down at the branching point can be correlated with the brightness of the light diffusion surface 333b (and the light diffusion surfaces 314c and 340 illuminated by the light diffused from the light diffusion surface 333b). Since each of the light diffusion surfaces 314c, 333b, and 340 has a larger area (projected area) at the player's line of sight than the ball, the player can easily grasp the manner in which the ball flows down at the branching point.

In the above first embodiment, the timing for controlling the illumination of the light emitting means 351 was described as during a jackpot game, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination may be controlled due to the detection of a win in the winning slots 63, 64, 140, etc., or due to an input operation of the frame button 22, or due to the occurrence of a win exceeding a prescribed number (the number of winning balls that determines the end of a round of play in a jackpot game, the maximum number of pending changes based on balls entering the winning slots 64, 140).

In the above first embodiment, if the operation of the sliding displacement member 370 is defective, the assembly position of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is defective, and therefore, by checking the operation of the sliding displacement member 370, the quality of the assembly of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 can be determined during the manufacturing stage. However, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a detection sensor that detects the position of the sliding displacement member 370 may be provided to detect the operation of the sliding displacement member 370 during operation. In this case, if the positional relationship between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 becomes misaligned due to repeated operation or the influence of some external force, even if this does not appear during the manufacturing stage, the occurrence of the misalignment can be determined by the malfunction of the sliding displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 that switches the direction of the ball flow at the branch point BP1 is a linear displacement in the forward and backward directions, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a rotational movement (e.g., a roulette type), or a shape that makes the ball flow irregularly (e.g., a funnel-shaped crane) may be provided so that the ball can flow in multiple directions.

In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is used as a device for switching whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be used as a device for guiding the ball to the starting winning port (winning port 64, 140), or as a device for guiding the ball to the specific winning port 65a, or as a device for guiding the ball to other winning ports or winning areas.

In the first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is placed in the lower corner of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sorting device 300 may be placed in the upper corner of the play area (e.g., above the center frame 86), or in the left or right corner (outside the left or right edges of the center frame 86), or in the center of the play area. For example, when placed in the upper corner of the play area, the line of sight of the player looking at the sorting device 300 is inclined diagonally upward from the horizontal plane, so the downstream balls can be configured to hide the upstream balls in the flow path portion that slopes downward toward the front side.

In addition, the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 may be configured to have a structure with an inclination that is reversed front to back, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161.

In the above first embodiment, the shape of the window portion 162d is described as being designed based on the shape of the flow path configuration portions 335, 336 in a front view and the arrangement of the seal member 313, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be such that (only) the slide displacement member 370 is visible from the player's line of sight (viewed diagonally downward), or the shape may be such that the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is reduced. Also, the shape may be such that the slide displacement member 370 is visible from either the front or rear position and not visible from the other.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the flow path components 334 to 336 are configured as a pair on the left and right sides so that they do not merge, which reduces the number of balls that enter one flow path (disperses the balls), making it easier to avoid ball clogging, while allowing the sliding displacement member 370 to switch the paths of any of the balls that have passed through each flow path.

In this regard, the shape of the window portion 162d may be such that only one of the pair of left and right components of the slide displacement member 370 (e.g., ball guide portion 371b, upper protrusion portion 376) is visible and the other is not. In this case, the player can predict the path of the ball on the side that is not visible, which increases the player's interest.

In the above first embodiment, the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 from the state where the ball can land on the ball guiding portion 371b is set to the backward direction (the forward direction of the ball's travel direction flowing down the third flow path component 336), and the sliding suppresses the ball's forward rotation, thereby suppressing the amount of rotation just before the ball falls, making it appear to the player that the ball is temporarily stopped, but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

For example, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from a state in which the ball can rest on the ball guide portion 371b may be configured to be a forward direction (the opposite direction to the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336).

That is, the ball guide portion 371b is displaced forward, and the ball guide portion 371b enters the lower side of the third flow path component 336, thereby enabling the probability change detection sensor SE11 to be opened. The upper protrusion portion 376 is constructed separately from the ball guide portion 371b, and is positioned so that it protrudes toward the branch point BP1 side when the ball can land on the ball guide portion 371b. When the ball guide portion 371b is displaced to a state where the ball cannot land on it, the upper protrusion portion 376 displaces in the opposite direction at the same time as the displacement of the ball guide portion 371b, ensuring a passage for the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this case, the ball's forward rotation can be accelerated by the sliding of the ball guide portion 371b against the ball as it slides, increasing the amount of rotation just before the ball falls, making it appear to the player that the ball has fallen instantly (smoothly).

In the first embodiment described above, the rotating member 620 is controlled in such a way that the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off when the extension portion 634b is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, taking into consideration the inertial load applied to the rotating member 620 after the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the detection sensor KS1 detects that the extension portion 634b is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, the drive power of the drive motor 631 may be reduced and the drive motor 631 may be rotated weakly for a short period of time before being stopped. This allows the rotating member 620 to reliably reach the displacement end position (the position for the performance standby state).

In the above first embodiment, the grooves of the front-upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 of the second operating unit 700 are described as being made up of straight inclined grooves, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by making the grooves have a partial curve, such as curving forward at the lower end, the displacement of the performance device 780 can be a displacement mode that combines up-down sliding displacement, forward-backward sliding displacement, and forward-backward posture displacement.

The grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 may have various shapes. For example, they may be V-shaped (or inverted V-shaped) when viewed from the left and right, or may be curved in an S-shape.

In the above first embodiment, the reversing operation of the second operating unit 700 is described as being performed by delaying the start timing of the reversing operation using magnetic force, thereby displacing the members to avoid collision between each other (for example, the main body member 771 and the covering member 787, the drive motor 782 and the covering member 787), but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a design method may be used that avoids collision between the components by setting the number of gears between the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785.

In the above first embodiment, the second operating unit 700 is described as being in an extended state at the upper end position, with the tip of the pivot arm member 720 positioned at a left-right position that coincides with the left-right center of the performance device 780, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by positioning the tip of the pivot arm member 720 to the right of the left-right center of the performance device 780, a long support position distance can be ensured between the metal bar 702 supporting the left side of the lifting plate member 740 and the pivot arm member 720 supporting the right side of the lifting plate member 740. This allows the lifting plate member 740 to be stably supported.

In the above third operating unit 800, the bulge 824a is configured as a part that remains unchanged in shape and is visible to the player regardless of whether the decorative members 870, 880 are in an individual combined state or a combined state, and in both the individual combined state and the combined state, the bulge 824a is visible to the player as a part (central part). This explains the case where the bulge 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885 are designed to have shapes that minimize discomfort with each other, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a display device (segment display device or liquid crystal display device) may be disposed in a positional relationship in which the display unit is disposed in front of the bulge portion 824a. In this case, unlike when the visibility of the bulge portion 824a is changed by changing the irradiation mode (brightness or color) of the light from the inner light-emitting portion 823a, the object visible in the bulge portion 824a can be changed by switching the display mode of the display unit, thereby improving the freedom of presentation.

Also, for example, the shape of the covering portion 875, 885 of either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 may be redesigned to extend toward the center of the circular shape in the combined state, and the extended portion may be configured to cover the bulge portion 824a. In this case, in either the individual combined state or the combined state, the bulge portion 824a can be hidden so that it is not visible to the player, thereby reducing the degree of restriction on the design freedom of the bulge portion 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885.

In the first embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is described as having multiple decorative members 870, 880 that are attracted to each other by magnetic force, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the combined state may be maintained by a load caused by a concave-convex engagement, or the combined state may be maintained by the biasing force of a spring member.

In the above first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is realized by setting the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 of the third operating unit 800 to be smaller than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting an operating mode that creates momentum, the switching rotation operation can be realized even when the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is equal to or greater than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866.

As an example of an operation mode that creates momentum, rotation control in the reverse direction may be used as a preparatory operation (preparatory movement). In this case, a reaction force can be applied to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880, and a load can be generated in a direction that throws the intermediate arm member 850 radially outward from the position in the combined state. This makes it easier to release the magnetic attraction.

In the first embodiment, as a measure to suppress wobbling during the switching rotation operation of the third operating unit 800, a case was described in which the decorative members 870, 880 are configured to cause radial displacement before the reversing operation, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the magnet Mg2 is configured to be arranged so that the line of action of the magnetic force can be written on the plane on which the metal rod 832 as the rotation axis of the reversing operation is arranged, even if the reversing operation occurs before the radial displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 from the combined state, the magnetic force generated between the multiple (five) decorative members 870, 880 occurs on the same plane, so that wobbling generated in the third operating unit 800 during the switching rotation operation can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment described above, the switching rotation operation is configured in such a way that the decorative members 870, 880 are rotated 180 degrees, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be configured to be combined again with a 120-degree rotation operation. In this case, it is possible to perform an action presentation in which the side visible when viewed from the front of the decorative members 870, 880 is the same before and after the switching rotation operation, but the angle at which the covering portions 875, 885 are visible is different (for example, 60 degrees to the right before the operation and 60 degrees to the left after the operation).

In addition, the structure of the multiple intermediate arm members 850 may be configured so that, for example, the lengths are not common, or the formation range or shape of the bevel tooth portion 854c is not common, so that decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure the combined state by a 180-degree inversion operation and decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure the combined state by a 120-degree inversion operation coexist in the switching rotation operation. For example, of the five decorative members 870, 880, one decorative member 870, 880 may be configured to be inverted 120 degrees in the switching rotation operation, and the other (four) decorative members 870, 880 may be configured to be inverted 180 degrees in the switching rotation operation.

The angle of the reversal operation in the switching rotation operation can be set arbitrarily. It can be 180 degrees or 120 degrees as mentioned above, or it can be set to 0 degrees, 360 degrees, or any angle between 0 degrees and 360 degrees.

In the first embodiment, the torque limiters 866 are arranged in a pair, one on the left and one on the right, in asymmetric positions above the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, they may be arranged in symmetric positions, both of the pair of torque limiters 866 may be arranged on the left, right or lower side of the outer rotating member 840, or they may be arranged on opposing sides (directly opposite sides) across the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which multiple (five in the first embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 are configured with a common shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shapes of the supported holes 854a and guide holes 854b in which the linear motion members 833 that slide along the metal rod 832 are disposed may be made different, so that the start timing of the sliding displacement along the metal rod 832 differs between the linear motion members 833.

For example, by mixing an intermediate arm member 850 in which the design has been modified to form the supported hole 854a as a long hole or a hole with a large diameter, and the shape of the guide hole 854b has been correspondingly modified, it is possible to provide a difference in the timing at which the linear member 833 starts to move during the switching rotation operation.

This allows the decorative members 870, 880, which are fastened to the rotating member 834 connected to the linear member 833, to have a difference in the timing of their radial outward displacement from the combined state, so that the attracted portions of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 can be separated in the shear direction (radial direction).

In this case, the load required to remove the suction can be reduced, so the driving force required for the drive motor 862 can be reduced and the positioning of the third operating unit 800 can be stabilized.

It is not necessary that the displacement mode that causes displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 occurs every time. For example, the displacement mode that causes displacement in the shear direction may be configured to occur when a switching rotation operation is performed from the combined state (forward path), but not to occur when the combined state is reached by the switching rotation operation (return path).

For example, by configuring the design of the intermediate arm member 850 so that the displacement mode is different between the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 rotates from the combined state (the state in which the rotating tip is located on the rotating shaft side of the inner rotating member 830) to the state in which the decorative members 870, 880 are located at the outermost diameter position, and the state in which the intermediate arm part i850 rotates from the state in which the decorative members 870, 880 are located at the outermost diameter position to the combined state, it is possible to selectively generate a displacement mode that generates a displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2.

In the first embodiment, the number of detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, 813 for each operation unit 600, 700, 800 is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of one detection sensor KS1, multiple detection sensors KS1 may be configured to be arranged at positions where they can detect the extension portion 634b, and instead of three detection sensors 713, two or less or four or more detection sensors 713 may be used. Note that an example of the arrangement of the detection sensor KS1 is a position where it can detect the extension portion 634b in the intermediate performance state or the extended state of the first operation unit 600.

Also, for example, only one of the two detection sensors 778d may be used, or instead of one detection sensor 813, multiple detection sensors 813 may be arranged in positions that can detect the detected portion 844. For example, five detection sensors 813 may be arranged at equal intervals on the circumference to determine the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state of the third operating unit 800 in five different ways (five different patterns depending on the direction of rotation).

In the second embodiment above, a case was described in which the ball continues to roll regardless of the position of the slide member 2420, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 in the front position FP and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314 of the upper member 310 may be configured to be the same length as the diameter of the ball. In this case, when the slide member 2420 is in the front position FP, the ball can be sandwiched between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314, which enhances the deceleration effect of the ball and makes it easier for the ball to become stuck.

In the second embodiment described above, there is no description of forming a protrusion on the inside of the first flow path forming portion 2334, but the first flow path forming portion 2334 may be configured to have a protrusion for decelerating the ball. In this case, the height of the protrusion may be set to a height that abuts either the ball resting on the slide member 2420 in the front position FP or the ball resting on the bottom surface 2334c when the slide member 2420 is in the rear position BP, but does not abut the other. In this case, the deceleration effect of the protrusion can be generated when the slide member 2420 is in either the front position FP state or the rear position BP state.

In the above third embodiment, the sliding displacement member 3370 is described as being formed integrally with the thin plate portion 371 and the upper front protrusion portion 3376b and the upper lateral protrusion portion 3376c, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper front protrusion portion 3376b and the upper lateral protrusion portion 3376c, which are separate members, may appear and disappear in the vertical direction in accordance with the timing at which the thin plate portion 371 is positioned at the front position and the rear position, thereby forming a state in which the ball is abutted and a state in which it is not abutted.

The front-to-rear arrangement of the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is not limited in any way, but placing the special chance detection sensor SE11 at the rear, as in this embodiment, makes it easier to avoid erroneous winning into the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In the fourth embodiment, the sliding plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373, and the sliding plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally formed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, these may be configured as separate members and configured to operate synchronously (linked) by matching the timing. In addition, they may be configured to slide in the forward and backward directions.

In the above fourth embodiment, when the slide members 4371, 4375 slide and displace when the ball passes rearward over the upper surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372, the ball is returned to the front due to the inclination of the upper surface 4376a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional ball entry detection sensor may be arranged behind the slide plate 4372 in the front open state.

In this case, it can be configured so that only the ball that was on the slide plate 4372 when the state changed from the rear open state to the front open state is guided to the additional ball entry detection sensor. The greater the benefit that the player can obtain by the ball entering the additional ball entry detection sensor (for example, the acquisition of multiple jackpots or the acquisition of the right to move to a higher probability state, which is greater than the right obtained by the ball entering the probability change detection sensor SE11), the greater the attention paid to the ball that has passed through the third flow path configuration portion 336.

In the sixth embodiment, the flow path from the raised floor 6342 at the downstream end of the merging flow path 6341 is configured as a flow path along the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a curved flow path with the connection point JP1 side facing backward near the raised floor 6342. This allows both the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the raised floor 6342 and the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the second flow path configuration part 335 to have a backward velocity component, and it is possible to prevent backflow from occurring due to collision between them.

The connection point JP1 may be configured to be located at the center of the left and right of the sorting device 6300. The flow path components 334-336 may also be configured to have a structure with an inclination that is reversed front to back, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and normal detection sensor SE12 may be configured to be located near the fixed member 161. In this case, it is easier for the balls to gather at the connection point JP1 and then flow down to the front, improving the attention to the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 6300.

In the above ninth embodiment, the guide elongated hole 9616 is configured as a branched elongated hole, and the way in which the axis O1 passes through the guide elongated hole 9616 is changed depending on how a load is applied to the axis O1. However, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the guide elongated hole 9616 may be switched. That is, in the guide elongated hole 9616, only the straight portion 616a is always configured as a long hole, and the curved portion 616b, the angle maintaining portion 9616c, and the connecting portion 9616d may be configured to alternate between being configured as a long hole and being blocked. In this case, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced along an incorrect path, and therefore to prevent the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

For example, the long guide hole 9616 having a branch may be configured to include a switching valve that limits the displacement path of the axis O1 by blocking one of the paths. In this case, while the shape of the long guide hole 9616 is fixed, the switching valve can limit the displacement path of the axis O1, preventing the axis O1 from displacing along an incorrect path, thereby preventing the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from displacing in an unintended manner.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<The point at which the ball passing through the path forming means conceals the passed means>
A gaming machine A1 comprising a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, wherein the path forming means comprises a displaceable means that can be positioned in a position overlapping at least a portion of a first gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, on the upstream side of the passed means and in front of the first gaming ball, when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and are configured so that the area around the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to recognize due to a decorative plate 302 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the decorative plate 302 always makes it difficult to recognize the ball detection hole 431, so it is not possible to respond to a game mode in which the ball entering the ball detection hole 431 is confirmed to continue or stop the launch of the game ball, and there is a possibility that the player will feel dissatisfied. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the parts related to the game ball launch operation.

In contrast, according to gaming machine A1, the means for reducing the visibility of the first gaming ball in the path configuration means is a predetermined displaceable means, so it is possible to configure a state in which the first gaming ball is easy to see. Therefore, in a state in which the first gaming ball is easy to see, it is easy to confirm the flow of the first gaming ball and to decide whether to continue or stop the operation of launching the gaming ball, so that it is possible to improve the parts related to the operation of launching the gaming ball.

The form of the specified displaceable means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be another game ball, or it may be a decorative member that is configured to be displaceable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

Gaming machine A2 is characterized in that in gaming machine A1, the displacement means is a second gaming ball that flows downstream upstream of the first gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 can change the visibility of the first gaming ball by using the gaming ball guided toward the passing means, which reduces material costs and design costs compared to when other decorative members are used as the displaceable means.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the path configuration means in gaming machine A2 has a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 has a forward/backward path that allows a second gaming ball to be positioned in front of the first gaming ball, so that the second gaming ball can hide at least a portion of the first gaming ball when viewed from the front.

In the gaming machine A3, the forward/rearward path is configured such that when the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball flow down the path configuration means at the launch interval set in the launch device, the second gaming ball hides at least a portion of the first gaming ball. Gaming machine A4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A3, gaming machine A4 can also provide the effect of making it difficult to recognize a first gaming ball as a second gaming ball when multiple gaming balls flow down the path configuration means with the launch intervals unchanged. This makes it possible to create a difficult-to-recognize situation even under normal circumstances.

Gaming machine A5 is characterized in that, in gaming machines A3 and A4, the front-rear direction path is arranged such that the front side component is located closer to the center of the gaming area than the rear side component.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A3 and A4, gaming machine A5 can configure a forward/backward path that is inclined along the line of sight of the player looking at the passing means, making it easier for the first gaming ball to be hidden by the second gaming ball. In other words, the blindfolding effect can be improved.

Gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A5, the front side component is positioned in the line of sight of the player who is looking at the passing means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine A5, gaming machine A6 can produce a similar blindfolding effect regardless of the length of the distance between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball placed on the forward/backward path.

In other words, it is usually believed that the closer the first and second game balls are to each other, the greater the concealment effect, but if the first and second game balls are positioned in the line of sight, the effect of the distance between them can be eliminated.

A gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the path configuration means in any of the gaming machines A2 to A6 includes a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball, and a left-right direction path formed with a left-right width that allows the gaming ball to flow down in the left-right direction upstream of the front-rear direction path.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A2 to A6, gaming machine A7 can also block the player's line of sight with gaming balls flowing down a left-right path, so a concealing effect can be created not only when the player views the passed-through means with a line of sight that does not shift left or right relative to the passed-through means, but also when the player shifts left or right and peers at the passed-through means. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the passed-through means, regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a concealing effect can be created in all directions).

This effect is more pronounced when one side of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction is sealed with a wall. In other words, when one side is sealed with a wall, the wall acts as a screen on the left or right side, making it easier to create a state in which the passing means is not visible.

A gaming machine A8 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the path configuration means includes a first flow path through which the gaming ball passes through the passing means in a first manner, and a second flow path through which the gaming ball passes in a second manner, and is configured so that the first gaming ball is at least partially covered by the predetermined displaceable means and can be seen, regardless of which flow path of the path configuration means the first gaming ball flows down.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, gaming machine A8 can make it difficult to recognize the flow pattern of the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, regardless of whether or not the gaming ball passes through the passing means, thereby increasing the attention to the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means.

The first and second aspects are not limited in any way. For example, the direction in which the ball flows down may be different, or the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

A gaming machine A9 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a branching means is provided on the upstream side of the passing means for dividing the flow direction of the gaming ball, the branching means is provided with a switching means for switching the flow direction of the received gaming ball, and the path configuration means is configured so that gaming balls whose flow paths are divided by the branching means and that reach the switching means flow down the same path for a predetermined section.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the gaming machine A9 makes it more difficult to grasp the flow of the gaming ball, since the gaming ball that reaches the switching means flows down the same path for a certain section, compared to when the gaming ball that reaches the switching means immediately flows down a path that corresponds to the subsequent flow path. This makes it possible to improve the player's ability to focus on the gaming ball.

In the gaming machine A9, the path configuration means has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the gaming balls flowing down, and the protruding portion acts to branch the gaming balls in the branching means. A10.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A9, gaming machine A10 can use the protruding portion to branch the game balls, improving the durability of the structure compared to, for example, a case in which branching is caused by the movement of a valve body.

In the gaming machine A10, the protruding portion includes a first protruding portion that extends in a predetermined direction and a second protruding portion that extends in a direction different from the first protruding portion, and the protruding amount of the first protruding portion and the protruding amount of the second protruding portion are configured to be different. Gaming machine A11.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A10, gaming machine A11 can differentiate the effect of the first protrusion on the gaming ball from the effect of the second protrusion on the gaming ball depending on the way the gaming ball flows down. This makes it possible to use the fixed first and second protrusions to cause the gaming ball to branch according to a predetermined rule depending on the way the gaming ball flows down.

<Points to appeal for the introduction of a ball passing through a route forming means into a passed means>
A gaming machine B1 comprising a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, the path forming means having a specified portion that constitutes the upstream side of the passed means, the specified portion being positioned on a more conspicuous side than the passed means, and configured to be able to guide gaming balls to the passed means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and the area around the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to identify by the decorative plate 302, and depending on the state of the big prize component 300, the game ball may flow down a position outside the decorative plate 302 or may flow down in a manner that is hidden behind the decorative plate 302 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, highly visible gaming balls that fall off the decorative plate 302 and flow down are configured to miss the ball detection hole 431, and some of the gaming balls that flow down so as to be hidden behind the decorative plate 302 are guided to the ball detection hole 431. This means that the visibility of the gaming ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, and the player may feel dissatisfied because paying attention to the gaming ball is likely to be wasted. In other words, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in terms of making the way the gaming ball flows down after attracting attention worth paying attention to.

In response to this, gaming machine B1 is configured so that a gaming ball that has flowed down a specified section arranged on the more conspicuous side can be guided to the passing means, and so the degree of improvement in attention to the gaming ball can be associated with the gaming ball passing through the passing means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the likelihood that a gaming ball that has flowed down a specified section will pass through the passing means, leading to an improvement in terms of the significance of paying attention to the gaming ball after it has attracted attention.

In addition, this configuration makes it easier to guide the player's gaze to the game ball flowing down the specified area, reducing the possibility that the player will miss the game ball heading toward the passing means.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

The conspicuous side is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the display device side that easily attracts the player's attention, the winning hole side or the starting hole side, the front side (nearby side) that is easy for the player to see, the stage side (mainly the part where the game ball is temporarily held at the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame) where the gaze is likely to be focused as the probability of the ball entering a specific ball entry hole is remarkably high, the V-winning hole side that directly leads to winning a jackpot, the ball dispensing device side as an object of operation, the performance operation button side, the area where the game ball that has strayed from the ball entry hole flows down (the area where the player will inevitably follow it with his eyes out of frustration), the bright side as a light-emitting means switches between light and dark, or any other side. Also, it is possible to intentionally form a less conspicuous side to make it stand out in comparison.

Gaming machine B2 is characterized in that in gaming machine B1, the path configuration means has a second predetermined portion that makes a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means less noticeable than when the ball entered, and the predetermined portion is positioned on a more noticeable side than the second predetermined portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 reduces the attention of the gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means at the second specified section before it flows down the specified section, thereby making it possible to highlight the attention of the gaming ball as it flows down the specified section.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the predetermined portion of gaming machine B1 or B2 has sections where the flow speed of gaming balls differs.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 can improve the effect of attracting the player's attention compared to when there is no difference in the flow speed of the gaming balls.

Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B3, the second flow speed of gaming balls flowing down the second specified portion is configured to be faster than the first flow speed of gaming balls flowing down the specified portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B3, gaming machine B4 can shorten the time it takes for a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means to reach a specified section.

Gaming machine B5 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B4, characterized in that the specified section has a section in which the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction differs.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B4, gaming machine B5 can create sections in which the apparent displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction is different, regardless of the actual speed at which the gaming ball flows down. By reducing the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction at any specified location, the player's gaze can be easily focused on a specified location and distracted from other areas.

The manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a difference between displacement on a straight line arranged on a plane perpendicular to the front-to-rear direction when viewed from the front and displacement on a straight line having a front-to-rear component, a difference between displacement on a straight line and displacement in a curved or serpentine shape, or some other difference.

Gaming machine B6 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B5, and is characterized in that it is equipped with an introduction means configured to be able to introduce gaming balls into the path configuration means, and the predetermined portion is disposed outside the introduction means when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Gaming machine B6 can ensure the visibility of the introduction means in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B5. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the introduction means while also increasing the attention to gaming balls that are likely to pass through the passing means.

A gaming machine B7 is any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, and is characterized by having an avoidance means configured to cause gaming balls on the front side of the path configuration means to flow down so as to avoid the line of sight toward the passing means or the specified part.

Gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B6, is configured so that gaming balls can flow down the front side of the path configuration means, and is equipped with an avoidance means for ensuring that the flow path of the gaming balls avoids line of sight toward the passing means, so that it is possible to ensure both the size of the gaming area and the visibility of the gaming balls toward the passing means.

The manner in which the game ball affected by the avoidance means flows down is not limited in any way. For example, it may flow down avoiding a position directly in front of the passing means, it may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the passing means and the player's eye position, it may flow down avoiding a position directly in front of the last position at which the player can see the game ball heading towards the passing means, it may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the last position mentioned above and the player's eye position, or it may be something else.

In gaming machine B7, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state in which the game ball flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, and the acceptance state change means is configured to be able to guide the game ball that has reached the acceptance state change means in the acceptance state to the path configuration means side when the state changes from the acceptance state to the non-acceptance state.

In addition to the effects of game machine B7, game machine B8 can prevent game balls that reach the receiving state change means and then flow down like a bridge from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means.

Gaming machine B9 is characterized in that it is provided with a partitioning means that is arranged above the passing means in a front view of gaming machine B7 or B8 and that partitioning means partitions the gaming area, and that the partitioning means is configured to allow gaming balls to flow down the left and right outer sides.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B7 and B8, gaming machine B9 uses a partitioning means to prevent gaming balls from flowing down in front of the passing means, making it easier to ensure visibility toward the passing means.

The partitioning means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that forms the flow surface of the game balls, or it may be a ball entry port forming means through which the game balls can enter. The partitioning means may be a means with a fixed shape (appearance) or a means with a variable shape (appearance).

In the gaming machine B9, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state where the game balls flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state where the game balls cannot be accepted, and the part of the partition means on the acceptance state change means side is configured to easily guide the game balls to the acceptance state change means side. A gaming machine B10.

In addition to the effects of game machine B9, game machine B10 can be configured to accept a game ball that is in the process of being accepted by the acceptance state change means by pushing it into the acceptance state change means using the partition means. This makes it easier to prevent a game ball that slides sideways while being accepted from escaping from the acceptance state change means and falling down the front side of the passing means.

For example, the receiving state changing means may be a special winning device equipped with an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on a left-right axis, and the partitioning means may be a first winning port located above the special winning port of the special winning device. A game ball that reaches the special winning port just before the opening/closing plate is closed is often pinched between the pivoting tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening that is covered by the opening/closing plate, and slides sideways in the direction of the edge (the direction of the pivoting axis of the opening/closing plate).

Since the game ball after sliding can reach any position within the range of the pivot tip of the opening and closing plate, if at least a part of the opening and closing plate is positioned above the passing means, the game ball after sliding may fall to the front side and then pass in front of the passing means, and the game ball after sliding should not be allowed to fall to the front side.

If it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front after sliding sideways, it will be necessary to position the opening and closing plate so as to avoid the position of the passing means when viewed from the front, which reduces the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

In contrast, gaming machine B10 makes it easier to prevent the game ball from falling onto the front side of the opening and closing plate after sliding sideways, improving the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

Gaming machine B11 is any one of gaming machines B7 to B10, characterized in that gaming balls flowing down the path configuration means and gaming balls flowing down the front side of the path configuration means are configured to flow down in a similar manner.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B7 to B10, gaming machine B11 makes it difficult to distinguish between gaming balls that flow down the path forming means and may pass through the passed means and gaming balls that flow down the front side of the path forming means and do not pass through the passed means, making it difficult to determine the number of gaming balls flowing down the path forming means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between cases where it is easy and difficult for game balls to enter the path forming means from game balls flowing down near the path forming means.

A gaming machine B12 is any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, and is characterized by having a light-emitting means that irradiates light from behind the ball flowing down the specified portion.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, gaming machine B12 makes it easier to avoid the front of the ball flowing down a specified area reflecting light, making it difficult to see.

<Points to ensure the path length to the V-hole while saving space>
A gaming machine C1 comprising: a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down; a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through; and a state switching means configured to switch between a first state in which the gaming balls can flow down to the passed means and a second state different from the first state, wherein the path forming means comprises a delay means which delays the vertical displacement of the gaming balls, and the delay means allows the gaming balls to flow down towards the passed means.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, a distribution unit 75 that is configured to be movable left and right is arranged in the flow path of the gaming ball that entered the second large winning opening 12, and the flow direction of the gaming ball can be changed by the positioning of the distribution unit 75 (see, for example, JP 2014-155538 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, it is essential for the distribution unit 75 to operate for a short period of time to prevent erroneous entry into the specific area 73 or balls being caught by the distribution unit 75, and some players may feel suspicious of the behavior of the distribution unit 75 and be unable to continue playing with confidence.

One example of a solution to this problem is to lengthen the flow path length from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75. For example, by changing the position of the distribution section 75 from directly below the second large prize opening 12 to a position near the center of the left and right of the play area (near the first large prize opening 10), it is possible to ensure a long flow path length from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75. This is thought to reduce the possibility of an erroneous prize entry into the specific area 73.

On the other hand, when this method is implemented, it becomes necessary to ensure the visibility of the flow path of the game ball over a wide area from the second large prize opening 12 to the first large prize opening 10, and the design freedom of the game area is limited in this area. In other words, there is a problem in that the design freedom of the game area is limited over a wide area in order to prevent erroneous winning into the specific area 73.

In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of preventing game balls from entering the game area by mistake while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

In contrast, according to gaming machine C1, the path configuration means is equipped with a predetermined delay means, so even if the vertical length of the path configuration means in a front view is shortened to save space, it is possible to ensure that a long time passes before a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means passes through the passing means.

Therefore, the timing at which it becomes necessary to operate the state switching means to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passing means can be set to a predetermined time after the game ball enters the path configuration means, so that erroneous winning can be avoided without operating the opening/closing device that switches whether or not the game ball can enter the path configuration means for a short period of time. This makes it possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating hastily. This makes it possible to avoid erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

The form of the delay means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a form in which a protrusion for deceleration is formed in the flow path, or a form in which a predetermined flow path is provided that causes the game ball to flow down a flow path having a forward/rearward component.

In gaming machine C1, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the acceleration of the game ball flowing down the flow path toward the front side is greater than that of the flow path toward the back side. Gaming machine C2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 can ensure a longer period during which the player can see the gaming ball flowing down a specified flow path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the inclination of the specified flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape on the game ball side of the specified flow path.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the delay means in gaming machines C1 or C2 has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the acceleration of the gaming ball flowing down is greater in a flow path toward the front side than in a flow path in which the gaming ball flows down while maintaining its front-to-rear position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C1 and C2, gaming machine C3 can ensure a longer period during which the player can see the gaming balls flowing in front of them. This makes it easier to increase the player's attention to the gaming balls flowing down a specified flow path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the inclination of the specified flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape on the game ball side of the specified flow path.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the gaming ball passes through a position located in front of the passing means when viewed in the predetermined direction.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, gaming machine C4 can reduce the visibility of the area near the passed means when the gaming ball is placed in the front position. This can increase the attention to the area near the passed means.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C4, the front position can be configured in multiple places.

According to gaming machine C5, by arranging game balls at multiple front positions, the game balls at the front can hide at least a portion of the game ball at the back. Since the passing means is arranged behind the game ball at the back, the field of view toward the passing means can be blocked by the multiple game balls, and the visibility of the passing means can be reduced.

In this case, if the interval between balls entering a specified flow path is short, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is always positioned at one of the front positions, making it possible to create a state in which the passing means is not visible.

Gaming machine C6 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C5, characterized in that the path configuration means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a spiral pattern when viewed from above.

Gaming machine C6 has the same effect as any of gaming machines C1 to C5, and in addition, it can shorten the vertical width required to install a path configuration means of the same length.

In addition, compared to when a turn-around path is formed, there is no need to make the path walls thinner, which improves the strength of the flow path, and reduces the possibility of ball clogging, etc., compared to a turn-around path that turns 180 degrees.

Gaming machine C7 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C6, characterized in that the path configuration means includes a front-rear flow path section extending in the front-rear direction.

Gaming machine C7 has the same effect as any of gaming machines C1 to C6, but also reduces the width of the path configuration means, so that a pair of path configuration means can be configured symmetrically with a reduced width.

Gaming machine C8 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C7, characterized in that the passing means is positioned diagonally downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path configuration means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C7, gaming machine C8 makes it easier to bring the passing means and the ball receiving portion of the path forming means within the field of view of a player looking from the front side.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C8, gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the path configuration means includes a first receiving means configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and a second receiving means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and is configured so that the profits obtained by the player change depending on the receiving mode of the gaming balls of the first receiving means and the second receiving means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C8, gaming machine C9 has a first receiving means and a second receiving means that are configured to be able to receive gaming balls at all times, and furthermore, the benefits obtained by the player change depending on the receiving mode of the gaming balls by the first receiving means and the second receiving means, thereby improving the player's attention to the gaming balls.

The manner in which the game balls are received is not limited in any way. For example, the game balls may be received only by the first receiving means, or only by the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the first receiving means and a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the second receiving means. Also, the frequency with which balls enter each receiving means may differ, or the balls may enter at different positions.

In gaming machine C9, the profits obtained by the player change depending on whether gaming balls are received by only the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or whether gaming balls are received by both the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Gaming machine C10.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine C9, gaming machine C10 makes it easier for players to shoot game balls in a predetermined launch pattern by setting the amount of profit the player can obtain.

The benefits that the player can obtain are not limited in any way. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the game balls flowing down, or it may be a benefit related to the game obtained by the game balls flowing down (payout of prize balls, winning a jackpot, the game state changing to a special state after the jackpot ends, the game state changing to a normal state (falling down), etc.).

Gaming machine C11 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C9 or C10, the path configuration means is configured symmetrically from the first receiving means and second receiving means to the passed means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C9 and C10, gaming machine C11 can reduce the possibility of a player suffering a disadvantage regardless of whether the game ball is mainly shot from the left or right side.

In any of gaming machines C9 to C11, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state in which the game ball flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, and the acceptance state changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state change means or the state change state. Gaming machine C12 is characterized in that.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C9 to C11, gaming machine C12 changes the receiving state depending on the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state change mode, so that it is possible to reduce the impact of the player's skill in firing the game ball on the profits that the player can obtain.

A gaming machine C13 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C12, the state change mode of the receiving state change means is configured in a plurality of types.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine C12, gaming machine C13 can change the reception mode of the gaming balls to the first reception means and the second reception means even when the gaming balls are launched in a certain launch mode. This makes it possible to adjust the profits that the player can obtain from the mode of state change of the reception state change means.

<Important points regarding the opening and closing member that moves parallel to the direction in which the ball flows>
Gaming machine XA1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow game balls to flow down, a passing means configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the path forming means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path forming means, wherein the state switching means is configured so that the direction of displacement occurring during the state change is along the direction in which the game ball flows down.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the flow direction of the game balls and the opening and closing direction of the opening and closing plate of the big prize component 300 are approximately perpendicular, and the opening and closing operation is completed without being involved in the rolling of the game balls, so there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening and closing plate (state switching means).

In contrast, according to the gaming machine XA1, the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to follow the direction in which the gaming ball flows downward, so that the state switching means is displaced when the gaming ball is in close proximity to or in contact with the state switching means, thereby affecting the change in the rolling pattern of the gaming ball. This makes it possible to improve the role of the state switching means.

For example, when a gaming ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means can be slid to the right with the gaming ball on top of it, applying a load to the gaming ball that rotates it in the forward direction of the rolling rotation, thereby accelerating the gaming ball.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means can be slid leftward with the game ball on top of it, applying a load to the game ball that rotates it in the opposite direction to the rolling rotation, thereby slowing down the rotation of the game ball.

In addition, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the bottom end of the rolling game ball, a load can be applied to the game ball that is not only in the rolling direction of the game ball, but also has a component in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction, so that the change in the flow pattern of the game ball can be made complex and irregular.

These effects on the way the game ball flows down can be varied in various ways when the state switching means is opened and closed, allowing players who are watching the game balls to concentrate on the game without getting bored.

In addition, the positional relationship between the opening and closing operation of the state switching means and the gaming ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be positioned so that it rubs against the side of the gaming ball, or it may be positioned so that it collides with the gaming ball in the direction opposite to the flow of the gaming ball.

In the state switching means that is displaced in a manner that collides with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to perform a closing operation in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball, so that the game ball can be bounced back, or it may be configured to perform a closing operation in the same direction as the flow direction of the game ball, so that the introduction of the game ball thereafter can be restricted with little resistance.

Gaming machine XA2 is characterized in that in gaming machine XA1, the state change of the state switching means is configured to be executable while the state switching means and the gaming ball are in contact with each other.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XA1, gaming machine XA2 can cause the gaming ball to spin by changing the state of the state switching means.

Gaming machine XA3 is characterized in that the state switching means in gaming machine XA1 or XA2 is equipped with a change means that changes the direction of the load in a direction intersecting the direction of the displacement.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines XA1 and XA2, gaming machine XA3 can release the load applied from the gaming ball during the displacement of the state switching means, thereby reducing the load applied to the state switching means.

<Important points regarding the opening and closing member that allows balls to flow in a first direction when open and in a second direction when closed>
Gaming machine XB1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow game balls to flow down, a passed means configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the passed means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the passed means, wherein the state switching means is configured to be able to guide the game ball in a first direction in the introduction state, and to be able to guide the game ball in a second direction in the non-introduction state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it is extended forward, but when it is retracted to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball and it falls freely, so it does not guide it. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, when it is retracted to the rear, it is necessary to prepare a part (frame part, etc.) other than the lower movable body 371 to guide the game ball flowing down, and there was a problem that there was room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members) for guiding the game ball flowing down.

In contrast, with the gaming machine XB1, the state switching means is configured to guide the gaming ball in different directions depending on whether it is in the introduced state or not, making it unnecessary to use a dedicated component for guiding the flow path of the gaming ball, thereby reducing the number of components required. This makes it possible to diversify the flow direction of the gaming ball in a limited space.

The relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited in any way. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set left and right with respect to the game ball flowing down in the front-to-back direction. In this case, it is possible to maximize the difference in direction after guidance by the state switching means begins, while only slight displacement of the game ball is discernible when viewed from the front before it is guided by the state switching means.

The arrangement of the guide section that produces the guiding effect of the state switching means is not limited in any way. For example, the guide section may be disposed on a movable member of the state switching means, or the guide section may be disposed on a non-movable section in the periphery of the state switching means, and may be configured so that the state is switched to one in which the game ball is likely to approach or come into contact with the guide section by the operation of the movable member.

When the guide is provided on a movable member, it is preferable that the design not only provides guidance after switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also takes into consideration the effect on the game ball during the state switching operation.

For example, if the state switching means is equipped with a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball, providing a wall portion with a surface (flat, curved, etc.) shape that is inclined with respect to the flow direction, rather than providing a wall portion with a flat shape perpendicular to the flow direction, makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball becomes large in a direction that causes the game ball to flow backwards. This makes it easier to avoid the game ball flowing backwards.

Gaming machine XB2 is characterized in that in gaming machine XB1, the state change of the state switching means occurs due to a displacement in a third direction, and the third direction is perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XB1, gaming machine XB2 can reduce the possibility of malfunction of the state switching means due to the load applied by the guided gaming ball.

Gaming machine XB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the path configuration means has a pair of left and right paths, the state switching means has a pair of guide sections capable of receiving gaming balls from the pair of left and right paths, and the first direction and the second direction are configured symmetrically in the pair of guide sections.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines XB1 and XB2, gaming machine XB3 can complicate the path along which the gaming ball flows. Also, since the first direction and the second direction of the pair of guide sections are configured symmetrically on the left and right, the displacement that the state switching means receives due to the load that the pair of guide sections receive from the gaming ball can be symmetrical on the left and right.

This makes it easier to uniformly position the state switching means, for example, when gaming balls are placed into a pair of left and right paths in approximately equal numbers, depending on the load that the guide section receives from the gaming balls.

Gaming machine XB4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XB3, the state switching means has a protruding portion formed to protrude in a direction intersecting the third direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XB3, gaming machine XB4 can reduce the contact area with other components by using the protruding portion, thereby reducing the displacement resistance of the state switching means.

The gaming machine XB5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine XB3 or XB4, it is provided with an abutment means configured to be able to abut when the state switching means is in the introduced state or the unintroduced state, and is configured to be able to correct the left-right displacement of the state switching means by abutting against the abutment means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines XB3 and XB4, gaming machine XB5 can receive load from the gaming ball from either the left or right direction, so the displacement of the state switching means, which tends to become disorderly, can be returned to an orderly state by the action of the abutment means.

<Separation, inversion, combination, and rotation are all part of the same movement>
A gaming machine D1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable so as to change the visible surface, the displacement means comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and configured such that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced relative to each other in a predetermined manner of displacement.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, the rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of the base arm 220 is configured to be able to rotate multiple times (see, for example, JP 2016-116782 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, although the rotating base 214 is rotationally displaced, the surface visible to the player is the same, which creates the problem that it is difficult to maintain attention to the displacement means.

In contrast, gaming machine D1 is configured so that the visible surface of the displacement means can be changed in response to the displacement, allowing attention to be maintained on the displacement means.

In addition, the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member relative to each other, thereby increasing the attention to the displacement means.

In the gaming machine D1, the predetermined displacement includes at least a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move toward or away from each other based on a collection section where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collected and arranged, and a second displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member rotate based on the collection section. In the gaming machine D2, the predetermined displacement includes at least a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move toward or away from each other based on a collection section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 can easily dynamically cause relative movement between the first and second displacement members. That is, with only the first displacement as a displacement based on the assembly part, the displacement between the first and second displacement members is likely to be reduced at the terminal part where the distance from the assembly part is the shortest or longest, and the first and second displacement members may appear to be stationary, which may reduce the presentation effect. However, by mixing in the second displacement, it is possible to cause a rotational displacement even at the terminal part, improving the presentation effect.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the predetermined displacement in gaming machine D1 or D2 includes at least a third displacement in which the visible surface of the displacement means is inverted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 and D2, gaming machine D3 inverts the surface that is visible due to the third displacement, making it possible to significantly change the decorations that are visible to the player before and after the third displacement.

A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixed by suction or adhesion, and the load related to the fixing acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machine D4 has a load related to the fixing that acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first and second displacement members, so the displacement of the first and second displacement members can be designed taking into account the load related to the fixing.

For example, in the case of driving force transmission by gears, if deformation of the shape is not taken into account, mechanical displacement will occur. However, if the load related to fixing is taken into account, the elastic change of the component due to the load will become apparent, causing a delay in the timing of the displacement of the component.

The degree of fixation may also be configured to vary depending on the visible surfaces of the first and second displacement members.

In this case, the effect of fixation differs depending on the surface being viewed, so the degree of fixation can be varied on the side the player can see.

This allows, for example, inverted surfaces of the same displacement means to be easily viewed as one surface tightly joined together and integrated, while the other surface can be easily viewed as loosely joined together and easily displaced relative to one another.

In addition, for example, by configuring the degree of adhesion of the first displacement member and the second displacement member to differ for each fixed position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member differs.

The manner in which the magnet can be attached is not limited in any way. For example, the magnet can be attached with an adhesive tape, or the magnet can utilize the adhesive force between the magnet and the metal part. The first and second inverted members can also be designed to use, for example, fixing screws or bolts as the metal part that is attached to the magnet.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in the forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, displaces in the forward direction in a first displacement mode, and displaces in the reverse direction in a second displacement mode different from the first displacement mode, and the second displacement mode is configured to displace in the first displacement mode after displacing in the predetermined mode.

According to gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is configured as a displacement mode in which a predetermined mode is added before the first displacement mode, so that the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means can be reduced. This reduces the attention to the displacement means when retracting, and relatively increases the attention to the displacement means that displaces at the presentation position.

In conventional machines, the rotation pattern was the same in both forward and reverse directions, so after extending the display to the performance position (the position in front of the LCD display area), it was necessary to rotate again in the opposite direction multiple times before retreating to the retracted position (the position outside the LCD display area). In this case, there was a possibility that the viewer's gaze would be drawn to the part retreating from the performance position, which could be seen as a problem.

The type of displacement is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a rotational displacement or a linear displacement. The displacement may be on a plane, may span multiple planes, or may be three-dimensional.

Gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the displacement means in gaming machine D5 is equipped with a release means configured to release the load transmission when the operating resistance becomes greater than a predetermined amount.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D5, gaming machine D6 can change the displacement mode of the displacement means by varying the magnitude of the operating resistance of the internal structure of the displacement means.

Gaming machine D7 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D6, and is provided with a light emitting means for irradiating light toward the displacement means, the displacement means including the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be able to change the visible state of the light from the light emitting means depending on whether the visible surface is one side or the other side.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D6, gaming machine D7 can change the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means in accordance with the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

For example, it is possible to change between a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are perceived as emitting light individually and a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are perceived as emitting light together.

Gaming machine D8 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D7, and is provided with a detection means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to detect whether the displacement of the displacement means is in an acceptable state or not.

According to gaming machine D8, in any of gaming machines D1 to D7, the detection means can detect a state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permissible, so that the displacement means can be prevented from colliding with surrounding structural parts during displacement.

In addition, since the detection means can detect the section in which the displacement means can be displaced while the displacement means is being displaced, by controlling the displacement to occur in a displacement mode that includes zooming in and out after a certain amount of displacement from the performance position toward the evacuation position, it is possible to suppress an increase in attention to the displacement means compared to when the displacement from the performance position to the evacuation position occurs in a displacement mode that includes zooming in and out from the start of the displacement.

Gaming machine D9 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D7, and is characterized in that it is equipped with a detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 to D7, gaming machine D9 can reduce the number of detection means. Various types of values for the displacement of the displacement means are exemplified. For example, they may be values for the respective positions and attitudes of different movable members, or they may be values related to the change in the operating mode when the operating mode changes at a predetermined timing.

The arrangement of the detection means is not limited in any way. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure that detects the arrangement and attitude of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip end side of the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means comprises the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be reversible between a position in which the surface facing the player is one side and a position in which the surface is the other side, and when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are distinguishable, whereas when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are indistinguishable. Gaming machine D10.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, gaming machine D10 can maintain high expectations from the player that a reversal action will occur, regardless of the state of the first and second displacement members when one side is facing the player.

<Points for changing the easily visible surface by arranging the displacement means having a plurality of visible surfaces>
A gaming machine E1 is provided with a displacement means having a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visible, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable between a first state in which the first visible surface is easy to see and a second state in which the second visible surface is easy to see depending on the arrangement.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a reversible reversing unit 71, and are configured to change the appearance seen by the player by changing the surface seen (see, for example, JP 2016-153095 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the reversing unit 71 is turned over while remaining in a fixed position, so the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the surface seen. In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

In contrast, with gaming machine E1, the displacement means can switch between a state in which the first visible surface is easily visible and a state in which the second visible surface is easily visible depending on the position, so that the line of sight of a player who wishes to see the first visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner that follows the path of the change in position of the displacement means.

A gaming machine E2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, an opening portion is provided that opens so that the displacement means can be viewed, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening portion side is easily visible.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E1, gaming machine E2 allows a player looking through the opening to the rear side to easily see the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

Gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the displacement means in gaming machine E2 is positioned closer to the rear side when placed on the edge of the opening than when placed in the center of the opening.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 makes it possible to make the displacement means visible from the front when it is placed in the center of the open section, while reducing the amount of eye movement required when viewing the displacement means when it is placed on the edge of the open section. This makes it possible to achieve both good visibility of the displacement means and reduced fatigue for the player who follows the displacement means with their eyes.

Gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement means has a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and when the first visible surface and the second visible surface of one set are visible, the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the other set are difficult to see.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E3, gaming machine E4 has different letters and figures for each set on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, allowing players viewing the displacement means to see different letters and figures, and by configuring the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the set that are not intended to be visible to be difficult to see, it is possible to avoid the appearance of the displacement means being unsightly.

For example, if the first set displays characters or figures on the first and second visible surfaces indicating that there is a low expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot, and the second set displays characters or figures on the first and second visible surfaces indicating that there is a high expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot, the level of expectation of a jackpot can be confirmed through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. In this case, the display of the expectation of a jackpot by the displacement means can be maintained even after the displacement means is retracted from the front side of the display area of the display device, so that the display of the expectation of a jackpot can continue to be visible even to a player who has taken their eyes off the liquid crystal display device.

The manner in which the display is made difficult to see is not limited in any way. For example, it may be arranged on a surface on a side other than the player's side (the rear side, the left or right outer surface, etc.), or it may be configured to reduce visibility by being shielded with a shielding means.

Gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface that are visible in gaming machine E4 is configured so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during the operation.

According to gaming machine E5, it is possible to easily avoid predicting the pair of first and second visible surfaces that will be displayed to the player during the action of switching (before confirmation) the pair of first and second visible surfaces that are visible in gaming machine E4. This makes it possible to improve attention to the displacement means.

The manner in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are configured to be difficult to recognize during the above-mentioned switching operation is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make them difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) may be configured to be separable from the other parts and operated in a separated state to make them difficult to recognize, or a light-emitting means may be used to set the brightness to create a relatively dark part to make it difficult to recognize.

In this case, the manner in which the separation occurs is not limited in any way. For example, during the above-mentioned switching operation, the device may be configured to operate facing backward so that only one of the part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part is visible, and the other part is not visible, or the device may be configured to operate in a state in which the part and the other part are simultaneously visible but out of alignment.

Gaming machine E6 is characterized in that it has an opening section in which the displacement means is open so as to be visible in gaming machine E5, and the switching operation is performed in a state in which the displacement means is positioned in the center of the opening section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E5, gaming machine E6 makes it easier for players to see the switching action, improving attention to the switching action.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E5 or E6, during the switching operation, one of the part of the first visible surface and the other part faces the front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E5 and E6, gaming machine E7 makes it difficult to recognize the first visible surface during operation by making a portion of the first visible surface visible and the entire surface invisible during operation.

Gaming machine E8 is any one of gaming machines E1 to E7, and is provided with a second displacement means configured to be capable of blocking at least a portion of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable to a third state for making the first visible surface visible together with the second displacement means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E7, gaming machine E8 can improve the design freedom of the presentation position of the displacement means by making at least a portion of the second visible surface difficult to see using the second displacement means.

Gaming machine E9 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change the surface visible when viewed in a specified direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface as the displacement occurs.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E8, gaming machine E9 changes the surface that is visible when viewed in a specified direction between the first visible surface and the second visible surface, so the surface that is easily visible can be changed at will, regardless of the amount of change in the player's line of sight.

A gaming machine E10, which is a gaming machine E9, characterized in that the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E9, gaming machine E10 can increase the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state by changing the posture of the displacement means.

Gaming machine E11 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E9 or E10, it has an auxiliary means configured to be arranged close to the displacement means, and in the first state, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is arranged away from the auxiliary means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E9 and E10, gaming machine E11 can arrange the auxiliary means close to the displacement means so that they can be viewed as one unit, and can also arrange the auxiliary means and the displacement means so that they can be viewed separately, allowing the displacement means to give multiple different impressions to the player.

The type of the auxiliary means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a means whose arrangement is fixed, or it may be a movable means.

Gaming machine E12 is characterized in that in gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is configured to be switchable between a state in which it is viewed integrally with the displacement means and a state in which it is viewed separately from the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E11, gaming machine E12 can switch between viewing the displacement means and the auxiliary means as a single unit or separately, thereby increasing the variety of visible patterns relative to the number of components.

<Points at which the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means to the displacement amount of the installation means at the same time differs between sections>
A gaming machine F1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable, an arrangement means for arranging a first part on the displacement means, and a support means for supporting a second part of the arrangement means, wherein the support means is configured to be capable of controlling the arrangement of the second part relative to the first part during the displacement of the displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a tiltable base arm 220, a rotating part 211 rotatably attached to the tilt tip side of the base arm 220, and a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force for rotating the rotating part 211, and is configured to rotate the rotating part 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (see, for example, JP 2016-116782 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the rotating part 211 is prone to wobbling at the tip of the base arm 220, and rotating the rotating part 211 while the base arm 220 is tilting and displacing may cause a malfunction in the mechanism. As a result, the rotational displacement of the rotating part 211 is assumed to be performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, and the degree of freedom of displacement is low.

In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of increasing the design freedom for the displacement of the displaceable parts.

In contrast, according to gaming machine F1, the placement means is supported at at least two points by the displacement means and the support means, and the two support points are configured to displace relative to one another during the displacement of the displacement means. The support means makes it possible to control the placement of the second part based on the first part, so that the placement means can be displaced during the displacement of the displacement means while being stably supported. This allows for greater design freedom in the displacement of the placement means (displaceable part).

The manner of the support means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be supported in a manner that restricts displacement in a guide groove formed in a fixed base means, or it may be connected to a displaceable second displacement means and supported. Furthermore, control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but also includes mechanical control, such as restricting (guiding) the displacement of the second part with a wall portion.

A gaming machine F2, characterized in that in the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace a first section and a second section, the support means has a first range in which the second part is supported when the displacement means displaces the first section, and a second range in which the second part is supported when the displacement means displaces the second section, and the direction in which the second part is displaced in the first range is different from the direction in which the second part is displaced in the second range.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 allows the displacement speed of the arrangement means to be varied even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, and the support means is configured to allow changes in the displacement direction of the second portion, so that the displacement of the arrangement means can be made smooth even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

Gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the support means in gaming machine F1 or F2 is equipped with a limiting portion that limits the displacement of the second portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F1 and F2, gaming machine F3 can limit the displacement of the second part at the boundary position (limiting part) between the first and second ranges, so that when the second part is displaced from the side with larger displacement to the side with smaller displacement, it is easier to stop the second part at the boundary position (limiting part) between the first and second ranges.

The type of load required to displace the second part relative to the first part is not limited in any way. For example, the second part may be pulled, or the second part may be pushed.

The type of the limiting section is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a type that sets an increase or decrease in the displacement resistance of the second section, or a type that switches the displacement direction of the second section.

A gaming machine F4, in which the first section is arranged closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means in the second section with respect to the displacement means as a reference is smaller than the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means in the first section with respect to the displacement means as a reference.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F2 and F3, gaming machine F4 can create a section where the relative amount of displacement of the arrangement means based on the displacement means becomes smaller at a mid-displacement position of the displacement means, so that in addition to the end position of the displacement of the displacement means, positions can be provided where the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily viewed as one unit. As a result, the number of positions where the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily viewed as one unit can be increased.

A gaming machine F5 is one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, characterized in that the displacement speed (ratio) of the second part based on the displacement speed of the first part is configured to be variable.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, gaming machine F5 can change the displacement speed of the second part of the arrangement means on the support means side even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, so that a motion presentation can be created in which the displacement speed of the arrangement means is variable through simple drive control of the drive means (constant speed drive).

Gaming machine F6 is any one of gaming machines F1 to F5, characterized in that the support means is configured to reduce the displacement speed at the displacement end of the second portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F1 to F5, gaming machine F6 can prevent the second part from bouncing back, making it easier to stop the placement means early at the end of the displacement.

The method for preventing the second part from bouncing back is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to reduce the displacement speed of the second part at the end of the displacement (e.g., the amount of displacement of the second part when the first part displaces a predetermined unit length), or it may be configured to restrict the displacement of the second part by a geometric design such as erecting a wall in the direction of displacement of the second part when the first part is stopped.

In addition, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, and the displacement resistance of the second portion may be increased. For example, a load may be applied to the displacement end of the second portion by magnetic force or the like to increase the displacement resistance of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be increased by the biasing force of a coil spring or the like.

Gaming machine F7, characterized in that the support means in the gaming machine F6 is configured so that the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part intersects with the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part when the first part stops at the displacement end.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F6, gaming machine F7 has a support means that has the function of guiding the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part, thereby reducing the return displacement (bound) of the second part when the first part stops.

A gaming machine F8 is any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, and is characterized in that it is provided with a supported means that is displaceably supported by the arrangement means, and the supported means is configured to displace by an amount of displacement that corresponds to the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, gaming machine F8 can also produce complex effects using the supported means that displace in conjunction with the placement means.

The manner in which the supported means is displaced is not limited in any way. For example, the supported means may be displaced so as to move parallel to the disposition means on a predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced, or the supported means may be displaced in a manner different from the manner in which the disposition means is displaced (for example, a sliding displacement on a predetermined plane) (for example, a rotational displacement about a predetermined axis) at a position away from the predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced.

The manner in which the displacing means is displaced with respect to the amount of displacement of the displacing means is not limited in any way. For example, the displacing means may be a change in posture, or may be a displacement while maintaining the posture.

A gaming machine F9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F8, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion has a section in which it can move back and forth in a direction intersecting the displacement trajectory of the first portion.

Gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F8, can achieve a displacement mode in which the amount of relative displacement of the second part with respect to the first part returns and changes (for example, increases and then decreases) while the first part is displaced, thereby realizing a displacement mode in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while the position of the second part is maintained.

A gaming machine F10, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine F8 or F9, the (relative) rotational displacement speed of the supported means with respect to the placement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F8 and F9, gaming machine F10 can make the displacement mode of the supported means the same as that of the displacement means, sandwiching the placement means. This gives the player the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own drive means.

Gaming machine F11 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines F1 to F10, the placement means includes a posture change means that changes its posture to switch the side facing the player between the first side and the second side as the position change means itself is displaced, and the posture change means is configured so that when the second portion is positioned at the end of the displacement, the first side or the second side is in a posture facing the player.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the gaming machine F11 faces the first or second surface of the position change means toward the player, allowing the player to understand that the second portion has reached the end of the displacement, making it possible to easily understand the end of the presentation action by the displacement means.

A gaming machine F12 is any one of the gaming machines F1 to F11, and is configured so that electrical wiring is inserted into the arrangement means through the second part, and is provided with an arrangement means in which the electrical wiring is arranged inside and fixed to the second part, the arrangement means having an opening through which the electrical wiring can be inserted, and the opening is configured to be displaceable so as to avoid contact of the electrical wiring with the surrounding parts formed around it.

Gaming machine F12 has the same effects as any of gaming machines F1 to F11, and also prevents electrical wiring from coming into contact with surrounding areas.

The positioning means may be configured as a means for combining multiple components when the second part is composed of multiple components, or as a means for preventing a separate component from falling off the second part when a separate component is disposed in the second part.

Gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1 to XA3, XB1 to XB5, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F12. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then displaying the identification information in a definite manner, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the necessary condition being that the determined identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

Gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1 to XA3, XB1 to XB5, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F12. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which launches a ball into a predetermined gaming area in response to the operation of the control handle, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card) according to the number of winning balls is given.

Gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1 to XA3, XB1 to XB5, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F12. Among them, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and using balls as gaming media, a predetermined number of balls being required to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and a large number of balls being paid out when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines equipped with a large prize component that can configure multiple types of flow paths for gaming balls toward the ball detection hole (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2017-185021 A).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem in that the number of components required to guide the gaming ball increases. The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the number of required components.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which the gaming ball can be introduced into the passed means and a non-introduction state in which the gaming ball cannot be introduced into the passed means, and the state switching means is configured to be able to guide the gaming ball in a first direction in the introduction state and to be able to guide the gaming ball in a second direction in the non-introduction state.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 1, the number of components required can be reduced.
<Code>
10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
13 Game board (part of area configuration means)
65b Opening and closing plate (part of introduction means, receiving state changing means, avoidance means)
86 Center frame (opening)
141 Design elements (partition means, part of avoidance means)
163b Ball passage hole (first receiving means, second receiving means)
312 Opening (second specified portion, ball receiving portion)
317 Long front-rear protrusion (part of the first flow path, part of the protrusion, part of the second protrusion, part of the state switching means)
318 Left and right inner protruding portions (part of the branching means, part of the protruding portion, first protruding portion, part of the state switching means)
319 Left and right outer protrusions (part of the second flow path, part of the state switching means)
310 Upper member (part of path configuration means)
330 Middle member (part of delay means, part of route configuration means)
334 First flow path configuration section (part of the path configuration means, front and rear flow path section)
335 Second flow path configuration portion (predetermined portion, part of path configuration means, left-right path)
336 Third flow path configuration section (part of the path configuration means, front-rear direction path, front-rear flow path section)
351 Light emitting means
370 Slide displacement member (part of branching means, switching means, part of state switching means)
380 Lower member (part of path configuration means)
600 First operating unit (displacement means)
616 Guide slot (support means)
616a: Straight portion (part of the support means, first area, limiting portion)
616b Curved portion (part of the support means, second area, limiting portion)
620 Rotating member (displacement means)
640 Supported member (part of the installation means)
642 Cylindrical part (first part)
652 Front rotating member (supported means)
652b Protruding decorative part (part of auxiliary means)
660 Second decorative rotating member (position changing means)
661a: First performance surface (first visible surface, first surface)
661b Second performance surface (second visible surface, second surface)
670 Decorative fixing members (part of auxiliary means)
700 Second operating unit (displacement means)
787a1 First main decorative surface (part of first visible surface)
787a2 First minor decorative surface (part of the second visible surface)
787b1 Second main decorative surface (part of the first visible surface)
787b2 Second minor decorative surface (part of the second visible surface)
800 Third operating unit (displacement means, second displacement means)
813 Detection sensor (detection means)
823b Outer light emitting unit (light emitting means)
840 Outer rotating member (part of assembly)
866 Torque limiter (release means)
870 First decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
875 First covered part (part of the visible surface)
880 Second decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
885 Second Covering Section (Part of the Visible Surface)
C1 collar (part of the arrangement means, second part)
C2 Dish-shaped lid portion (part of the mounting means, second portion)
P1 sphere (part of the displaceable means)
SE11: Probability change detection sensor (part of the passing means)
SE12 Normal detection sensor (part of the passing means)

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
612 Front cover member (support means)
616 Guide slot ( part of support means)
616a Straight section (part of the support means, first section , limiting section)
616b Curved portion (part of the support means, second section , limiting portion)
620 Rotating member (displacement means)
630 Drive transmission device (drive means)
640 Supported member (part of relative movement means)
642 Cylindrical part (first part)
C 1 collar (part of relative movement means, second portion )
C2 Dish-shaped lid portion (part of the relative movement means, second portion)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising: a displacement means configured to be displaceable; a relative movement means configured to be capable of moving relative to the displacement means by engaging a first portion with the displacement means; a support means for supporting a predetermined portion of a second portion of the relative movement means; and a drive means for generating a drive force for causing the displacement,
the support means is configured to be able to limit a position of the second portion corresponding to a position of the first portion when the displacement means is displaced;
The displacement means is configured to be able to displace the first section and the second section,
The gaming machine includes a direction of a straight line connecting a first position and a second position along which a specific portion of the second portion different from the predetermined portion of the second portion is displaced when the displacement means displaces the first section;
a direction of a straight line connecting a third position and a fourth position to which the specific portion is displaced when the displacement means displaces the second section is different from a direction of a straight line connecting the third position and the fourth position to which the specific portion is displaced,
When the displacement means is displaced, there are a case where the direction in which the specific part is displaced is along the displacement direction of the displacement means, and a case where the direction in which the specific part is displaced is not along the displacement direction of the displacement means,
The gaming machine, wherein the relative movement means rotates around the predetermined portion when the displacement means is displaced.

Images